UDC

PROFESSIONAL STANDARD OF
THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

p JGJ 3-2010
Record Number: J 186-2010

Technical Specification for Concrete Structures

of Tall Building

Issued on: October 21, 2010 Implemented on: October 1, 2011

Issued by Ministry of Housing and Vrban-Rural Development of the People's Republic

of China
 PROFESSIONAL STANDARD OF

THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

9=:i $A~~ ~o 001T ~t5F ii

Technical Specification for Concrete Structures

of Tall Building

~ FzI Jtm ¥fE 1~jE ± ~s ttJ a* ~Jh! *¥

JGJ 3 - 2010
Approval Department: Ministry of Housing and Urban-rural Development of the People's Republic of
China

Implementation Date: October 1, 2011

Beijing 2010
 NOTICE

This specification is written in Chinese and English. The Chinese text shall be taken as the ruling
one in the event of any inconsistency between the Chinese text and the English text.
 Announcement of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-rural

Development of the People's Republic of China

No. 788

Announcement on Publishing the Professional Standard of "Technical

Specification for Concrete Structures of Tall Building"

"Technical Specification for Concrete Structures of Tall Building" has been approved as a
professional standard with a serial number of JGJ 3 - 2010 and will be implemented on October 1,
2011. Therein, Atiicles 3.8.1, 3.9.1, 3.9.3, 3.9.4, 4.2.2, 4.3.1, 4.3.2, 4.3.12, 4.3.16, 5.4.4, 5.6.1 , 5.6.2,
5.6.3 , 5.6.4, 6.1.6, 6.3.2, 6.4.3, 7.2.17, 8.1.5 , 8.2.1 , 9.2.3 , 9.3.7, 10.1.2, 10.2.7, 10.2.10, 10.2.19, 10.3.3,
I 0.4.4, 10.5.2, 10.5 .6 and 11.1.4 therein are compulsory provisions and must be enforced strictly.
"Technical Specification for Concrete Structures of Tall Building" JGJ 3-2002 shall be abolished
simultaneously.

Authorized by the Standard Rating Research Institute of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-
Rural Development of the People 's Republic of China, this specification is published and distributed
by the China Architecture & Building Press.

Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development of the People's Republic of China

October 21, 2010

 Foreword

According to the requirements of Document Jian Biao [2006] No. 77 issued by the former Ministry
of Construction (MOC)-"Notice on Printing and Distributing 'the Development and Revision Plan
(first batch) of National Engineering Construction Standards in 2006'", the drafting group revised this
specification through the extensive investigation and study, by arnestly suming up and accumulating
the experiences in actual practices, by reference to the relevant international standards and foreign
advanced standards, as well as on the basis of widely soliciting opinions.

Major technical contents of this specification: 1. General Provisions; 2. Terms and Symbols;
3. Basic Requirement of Structural Design; 4. Loads and Seismic Action; 5. Structural Analysis;
6. Design of Frame Structure; 7. Design of Shear Wall Structure; 8. Design of Frame-shear Wall
Structure; 9 . Design of Tube Structure: 10. Design of Complicated Tall Buildings; 11. Design of
Mixed Structure; 12. Design of Basement and Foundation; 13 . Construction of Tall Building.

Major contents revised in this specification: 1. Application scope was revised; 2. Relevant
requirements in structural plane and vertical plane regularity were revised and supplemented;
3. Maximum applicable height of some structures were adjusted, and maximum applicable height
requirements of buildings in Intensity 8 (0.3g) seismic precautionary region were added; 4 . Basic
methods for performance-based seismic design of structure and basic requirements for progressive-
collapse-resistant design were added; 5. Building comfo1t level design requirements were revised and
supplemented; 6. Contents related to wind load and seismic action were revised and supplemented;
7. "Strong-column weak-beam and strong-shear weak-bent" and internal force adjustment coefficient
of some members were adjusted; 8. Relevant requirements for frame, shearwall (including sho1t-limb
shearwall), frame-shearwall and tube structure were revised and supplemented; 9. Relevant requirements
for complex tall buildings were revised and supplemented; l 0. Design requirements related to tube in
tube structure, steel pipe concrete and steel plate shearwall were added in the composite structure;
11. Requirements related to basement design were supplemented; 12. Relevant requirements for
structural construction were revised and supplemented.

The provisions printed in bold type in this specification are compulsory ones and must be
enforced strictly.

Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development is in charge of the administration of this

specification and the explanation of the compulsory provisions; China Academy of Building Research
is responsible for the explanation of specific technical contents. During the process of implementing
this Specification, the relevant opinions and advice, whenever necessary, can be posted or passed on
to China Academy of Building Research (add ress: No. 30, North 3rd Ring East Road, Beijing I OOO 13,
China).

Chief Development Organization:

China Academy of Building Research

Participating development organizations:

Beijing Institute of Architectural Design

East China Architectural Design & Research Institute Co., Ltd.

 The Guangdong Provincial Architectural Design & Research Inst itute

CCDI (Shenzhen) Design Consu ltation Co., Ltd.

Shanghai Building Science Research Institute (Group) Co., Ltd.

Tsinghua University

RSB Architecture Eng ineer Design Associates

Beijing Construction Engineering Group Co., Ltd.

China Construction Eighth Engineering Division

Chief Drafting Staffs: Xu Peifu, Huang Xiaokun, Rong Bosheng, Cheng Maokun, Wang Dasui,
Hu Shao long, Fu Xueyi, X iao Congzhen, Fang Ehua, Q ian Jiaru,
Wang Cuikun, Xiao Xuwen, Ai Yongxiang, Qi Wuhui, Zhou Jianlong,
Chen Xin, Jiang Lixue, Li Shengyong, Zhang Xianlai, Zhao J ian

Chief Examiners: Wu Xuemin, Xu Yongji, Ke Changhua, Wang Yayong, Fan Xiaoqin,

Dou Nanhua, Lou Yu, Wang Lichang, Zuo Jiang, Mo Yong, Yuan Jixi,
Shi Zuyuan, Zhou Ding, Li Yarning, Feng Yuan, Fang Taisheng, Lv X ilin,
Yang Sixin, Li Jingfang
 Contents

General Provisions .................................................. ...................................... ... .... ........ ....... .............. 1

2 Tenns and Symbols ..... ............................. ........................................................ ............. .................... 2

2.1 Terms ... ........... ..... ..................................................... ...................................... .. ........... ............. 2

2.2 Syrnbols .................................................................................................................... ....... ......... 3

3 Basic Requirement of Structural Design .............................. ..................................... ........................ 7

3.1 General Requirement ................................................................................................................ 7

3.2 Materials ............... .. ..... ... ................. ......................................................................................... 7

3.3 Height and Aspect Ratio Limitations .............. .................... ...................................................... 9

3 .4 Structural Plan Layout .................................... .......................... .................. ............................ 10

3.5 Structural Vertical A rrangement ............................................................................................. 13

3.6 Diaphragm System .................................................... ............................................................. 15

3.7 Limitations for Story Drift and Comfort ................................................................................ 16

3.8 Strength Design of Members .................................................................................................. 18

3 .9 Seismic Design Grade of Structural Members ......................... ................ ............ .................. 19

3 .10 Requirement for Members of Special Seismic Design Grade ............. ........ ......................... 21

3. I I Performance-based Seismic Design of Structures .. ... ..... .. ......................................... ........... 22

3 .12 Requirement for Preventing Structural Progressive Collapse .............................................. 25

4 Loads and Seisn1ic Action ........................................... ..... ..... ............ ................... .......... ... ... ......... .. 28

4.1 Vertical Load ........................................... .. ........................ ................................................... .. 28

4 .2 Wind Load .......................... ... .... .... ..................... ... .. .... ........................................................... 28

4 .3 Seisrnic Action ......................................................... ........ ................... ................. ................... 30

5 Structural Analysis ................... ............. .......................................................................................... 40

5.1 General Requirernent. ................. ............ .......... .................. ................. .. ... ........ ..... ................. 40

5 .2 Analysis Pararneters ............................................................................................................... 41

5.3 Analysis Modeling ..... ..... ....... .................... ........ .... .... ......... .. ................. ............. ................... 42

5.4 Second-Order Effects and Structural Stability ............................................................... ....... .43

5.5 Elasto-Plastic Analysis and Check of Story Drift of Weak and/or Soft Stories ..................... .45

5 .6 Effects of Combinations of Loads and/or Seismic Actions ..... ... ...... ..................................... .4 7

6 Design of Fraine Structure ................................... ... ........................................................................ 50

 6.1 General Requirement. ............................................................................................................. 50

6.2 Strength Design ..... .. ................................................................ ..... .. .......................... .............. 52

6.3 Requirement for Detailing of Frame beams .................................................. ......................... 56

6.4 Requirement fo r Detai ling of Frame Columns ....................................................................... 60

6.5 Requirement for Splices and Anchorages of Reinforcement ................................ .. ............... 65

7 Design of Shearwall Structure ......................................................................................................... 70

7 .1 General Requirement ............................................................................ .. ................................ 70

7.2 Section Design and Detailing ............... ..... .. ...................................... .............................. ....... 72

8 Design of Frame-shear Wall Structure ............................................................................................ 87

8.1 General Requirement ....................................................... ............. ........... ..... .......................... 87

8.2 Strength Design and Detailing ............................................................................................... 90

9 Design of Tube Structure ................................................................................ ................................. 93

9 .1 General Requireinent .............. ....................................... ................... ................... .............. ..... 93

9.2 Fran1e-corewall Structure ......................................... .. .................... .. ....................... ......... .. .... 95

9.3 Tube in Tube Structure ..................... .................. ............................................................... .... .95

10 Design of Complicated Talr Buildings ............... ......... .................................................................. 99

10.l General Requi reinent ...................................... .............................................................. .. .... 99

l 0.2 Structure with Transfer Story ................................................... ........................................... 99

10.3 Structure with Outriggers and/or Belt Members ....................... ....................................... 107

10.4 Structure with Staggered Stories ....................................................................................... 108

10.5 Towers Linked with Connective Structure ....................................................................... 109

l 0.6 Structure with Setback and Cantilever ............................................................................. 110

11 Design of Mixed Structures ......................................................................................................... 112

11.1 General Requirement ...................................................................................................... .. 112

11.2 Structural Layout and Arrangement. ................................................................................. 113

11.3 Structural Analysis ............................................................................................... ............. 115

11.4 Design of Structure Members ........................................................................................... 116

12 Design of Basement and Foundation ........................................................................................... 125

12.1 General Requirement.. ............................................................................. ........... .............. 125

12.2 Design of Basen1ent .................. ......... .... ....... ................................................. ...... ............ 126

12.3 Design of Foundation ................................................................................................. ...... 127

13 Construction of Tall Building .. .... .. ........... ............................. ......... .............. .. ... .... ...... ................ 132

13 .1 General Requiren1ent .. ....... ........................... ...... ...... ....... ............................. .................... 132

13.2 Surveying ........ ........ .... ... ............ ... ..... ............ .... ..... ..... ..... ........... ................. ................... 132

13.3 Foundation ..... ......... ........ ....... ........................ ............ ... .... ....... ....... ....... .. ............ ............ . 135

13 .4 Vertical Transportation .... ....... ........ ..... ...... .. ..... ................... ............. ........... ....... ...... ..... ... 13 6

13.5 Scaffold and Falsework ........ .................. ... .... ...... ..... .. .. ... .. ..... .......................................... 137

13.6 Fonnworks ....... .............................................................................. ........................... ....... 138

13.7 Steel Reinforcement ........... ............ .............................. .. .. ... .. .... ........ ... ..... ... ... ................. 141

13.8 Concrete ................ ......... ...... ....... ......... ... .................. .......... ..... ....... ... .... ... ...................... . 142

13 .9 Massive Concrete ....... .. .. ............ ......... .......... ... ............. ... ........................................... ..... 144

13.10 Mixed Structures ... ....... ............................................................ .... .... ... .... ... .. ..... ...... ..... .. 145

13 .11 Complicated Structures ................................................................. ....... ....... .. ..... ...... ...... . 146

13. 12 Construction Safety ............ .... .... .......... ... .... ........ .. .. ..... ....... ........................................... 14 7

13 .13 Green Construction .............. .... ................. ....... ....... ....... ....... ........ ...... ... ...................... ... 14 7

Append ix A Calculation of the Acceleration of Floor Vertical Vibration .... ... ...... .... .............. ......... . 15 0

Appendix B Wind Pressure Coefficients of Buildings ............ ......................... ....... ........ ........ .... .... . 152

Appendix C Horizontal Earthquake Calculation with Equivalent Base Shear Method ..... .... .. ........ 156

Appendix D Check of Stability of Structural Wall ...... .. ..... .... ...... ......... .... ....... ... .. ..... ..... ... ......... ..... 159

Appendix E Lateral Stiffness Requirements for Stories Adjacent to Transfer Story ... .......... ........ ... 16 1

Appendix F Design of Concrete Filled Circular Steel Tubes ........ ....... ........ .. .. ........... ....... ...... ........ 163

Explanation of Wording in This Specification ... .... ........ .... ... .... ... ...... ........ .... .. ........... .. ............ .......... 175

List of Quoted Standards ..... ........ .. ......... ...... .... ........... ...... ...... ... .... ....... ..... .............. ... ........... ......... .... 176
 1 General Provisions

1.0.1 This Specification is Formulated with a view to realizing reasonable application of concrete
structure (including steel and concrete composite structure), safety and usability, advanced technology,
economy and rationality, as well as convenient construction during the tall building engineering.

1.0.2 This Specification is applicable to the concrete structures of residential building of 10 stories
and above or with building height greater than 28m, or the other tall civil building w ith building
height greater than 24m. As for the tall civil building structures of non-seismic design or of seismic
design in Intensity 6-9 seism ic precautionary intensity, the applicable maximum height and structure
type shall meet the relevant requirements of this specification.

This Specification is not applicable to the tall buildings built in the dangerous areas or within the
minimum avoidance distance of seismogenic fault.

1.0.3 Supplementary analysis and argumentation may be carried out for the concrete structures of
tall building adopting seismic design by performance-based seismic design of structure, where the
building height, regularity and structure type exceeds the requirements of this specification, or there
are special requirements in seismic precautionary criterion .

1.0.4 As for tall building structure, conceptual design, structural selection, and regularity of plane
and vertical plane layout shall be emphasized; constructional measures shall be strengthened ; structure
system with good seismic protection and wind resistance as well as economic rationality shall be
selected preferentially. During the seismic design, the integral seismic performance shal l be ensured to
make the integral structure have necessary bearing capacity, rigidity and ductility.

1.0.5 During the design and construction of concrete structures of tall building, not only the
requirements stipulated in thi s specification, but also those in the current relevant ones of the nation
shall be complied with.
 2 Terms and Symbols

2.1 Terms

2.1.1 Tall building, high-rise building

It refers to the residential building of 10 stories and above or with building height greater than
28m, or the other tall civi l bui ld ing with building height greater than 24m.

2.1.2 Building height

It refers to the height from the outdoor ground to the maj or roof of bui ld ing, excluding the height
of elevator machine room, water tank and frame that protrude out the roof.

2.1.3 Frame structure

It refers to the structure, composed of beams and columns as the primary member, bearing the
ve1tical and horizontal actions.

2.1.4 Shearwall structure

It refers to the structure, composed of shearwall, bearing the vertical and horizontal actions.

2.1.5 Frame-shearwall structure

It refers to the structure, j ointly bearing the vertical and horizontal actions by frame and
shearwall.

2.1.6 Slab-column shearwall structure

It refers to the structure, composed of beam less floor slab and column, jointly bearing the ve1tical
and horizontal actions by slab-column frame and shear wall.

2.1.7 Tube structure

It refers to the building structure, mainly composed of the vertical tube, bearing the vertical and
horizontal actions. Tubes in the tube structures are d ivided into the thin-wall tubes enclosed by
shearwalls and frame tubes enclosed by thick-column frames or wall frames.

2.1.8 Frame-corewall structure

It refers to the tube structure composed of core tube and peripheral spare-column fr?me.

2.1.9 Tube in tube structure

It refers to the tube structure composed of core tube and peripheral frame tube.

2.1.10 Mixed structure, hybrid structure

It refers to the building structure, composed of steel frame (frame tube), section steel concrete
frame (frame tube), steel pipe concrete frame (frame tube) and reinforced concrete core tube, jointly
bearing the horizontal and ve rtical actions.

2.1.11 Structural transfer member

2
 It refers to the structural members arranged for the structrual form transfer from the upper stories
to the lower stories or for the structural layout change from the upper stories to the lower stories,
including transfer beam, transer truss and transfer slab. Transfer beams of some frame-supported
shearwall structures are also called frame-suppo1ted beam.

2.1.12 Transfer story

It refers to the story arranged with structural transfer members, including horizontal structural
members and the vertical structural members below them.

2.1.13 Story with outriggers and/or belt members

It refers to the story arranged with horizontal extension arm structure (beam or truss) connecting
inner tube and peripheral structure, if necessary, ribbon horizontal truss or beam may be arranged
along the peripheral structure of the story.

2.1.14 Towers linked with connective structure (s)

It refers to the structure with connective structure between two or more towers, except the
podium building.

2.1.15 Multi-tower structure with a common podium

It refers to the structure with two or more towers on the upper part of podium building unseparated
by the structural joint.

2.1.16 Performance-based seismic design of structure

It refers to the structural seismic design based on the seismic performance objectives of structure.

2.1.17 Seismic performance objectives of structure

It refers to the seismic performance level of structure set aiming at the ground motion levels of
different ea1thquakes.

2.1.18 Seismic performance levels of structure

It refers to the definition for seismic performances of structure such as post-disaster damage
conditions and continue-to-use possibilities.

2.2 Symbols

2.2.1 Mechanical property of material

C20-- Concrete strength grade of which the standard value for its cube strength is 20N/mm2 ;

Ec- - Elastic modulus of concrete;

E 5- -Elastic mod ulus of reinforcement;

/ck,/c--Standard value and design value of axial compressive strength of concrete respectively;

fik,/r--Standard va lue and design value of axial tensile strength of concrete respectively;

/;k-- Standard value of ordinary reinforcement strength;

3
 /y,fy--Design value of tensile and compressive strength of ordinary reinforcement respectively;

/,v--Design value of tensile strength of transverse reinforcement;

/y1i,/yw--Design value of tensile strength of horizontally and vertically distributed reinforcement

in shearwall respectively.

2.2.2 Action and action effect

FEk--Standard value of the total horizontal seismic action of a structure;

FEvk--Standard value of the total ve1tical seismic action of a structure;

Gro-Representative vaiue for total gravity load of structures in the case of calculating
seismic action;

Geq--Representative value for equivalent total gravity load of structures;

M--Design value of bending moment;

N--Design value of axial force:

Sd- -Design value of load effect or in combination of load effect and seismic action effect;

V--Design value of shear force;

w0- -Basic wind pressure;

wk--Standard value of wind load;

!i.Fn-- Standard value of the additional horizontal seismic action at the top of structure;

ti.u--Inter-story displacement of story

2.2.3 Geometric parameters

as, a's-- Distance from the resultant force point of longitudinal tensile and compressive
reinforcement to the near side of section respectively;

As, A'5- -Sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the tens ile zone and compressive area
respectively;

As1i- -Total sectional area of horizontally distributed reinforcement of shearwal l;

Asv--Total sectional area of each limb of stirrup in the same section of beam and column ;

Asw--Total sectional area of vertically distributed reinforcement of shearwall web;

A- -Sectional area of shearwa ll;

Aw--Area of shearwall web in T-shaped or I-shaped section;

b- -Rectangular section width;

bb, be, b" - -Sectional width of beam, column and shearwall respectively;

B- -Bu ilding plane width, structure width on windward side;

d--Reinforcement diameter, pile body diameter;

4
 e--Eccentricity;

e0--Distance from the action point of axial force to the centroid of section;

e,--Deviant of mass center on the ih story in consideration of occasional eccentricity

calculation seismic action;

h--Story height, section height;

h0--Effective height of section;

H- -Building height;

H,--Height from the / hstory of building to the outdoor ground;

la--Minimum anchorage length of longitudinal tensile reinforcement during non-seismic

design:

lab--Basic anchorage length of tensile reinforcement;

lab~Basic anchorage length of longitudinal tensile reinforcement during seismic design;

/3 E--Minimum anchorage length of longitudinal tensi le reinforcement during seismic design;

s--Stirrup spacing.

2.2.4 Coefficient

a--Horizontal seismic influence coefficient;

Omax, avmax- - Maximum horizontal and vertical seismic influence coefficient respectively;

a 1--Ratio of stress in the concrete rectangular stress diagram in the compressive area to
design value of axial compressive strength of concrete;

/Jc--Concrete strength influence coefficient;

/Jz- -Wind fluttering coefficient at z height;

y,--Participation coefficient ofj vibration mode;

YE1i- -Paitial coefficient of horizontal seism ic action;

YEv--Pa1tial coefficient of ve1tical seismic action;

y0 --Partial coefficient of permanent load (gravity load);

Yw--Pa1tial coefficient of wind load;

YR~Seismic adjustment coefficient of member bearing capacity;

l]p- -Elasto-plastic displacement enhancement coefficient;

},- - Shear span ratio, horizontal earthquake shear force coefficient;

Av--Stirrup characteristic value;

µ~Axial compression ratio of column, axial compression ratio of wall limb;

µ 5--Shape coefficient of wind load;

5
 Pz--Variation coefficient of wind pressure height;

(y--Yield strength coefficient of story;

Psv--Area reinforcement ratio of stirrup;

p"--Reinforcement ratio of vertically distributed reinforcement in shearwall;

'l'w --Combination value coefficient of wind load.

2.2.5 Others

T1--Natural vibration period (basic natural vibration period) of structural first translation
or of structure based on translation;

Ti --Natural vibration period of structural first torsional vibration or of structure based on

torsional vibration;

Tg--Characteristic period of the site.

6
 3 Basic Requirement of Structural Design

3.1 General Requirement

3.1.1 Seismic precautionary intensity of tall buildings must be determined according to the documents
(drawings) approved and issued as the limits of authority specified by the state. Typically, the basic
seismic intensity determined according to Seismic Ground Motion Parameter Zonation Map of China
shall be adopted as the seismic precautionary intensity.

3.1.2 As for the tail concrete buildings adopting seismic design, the seism ic precautionary category
shall be determined according to the requirements of the current national standard "Standard for
Classification of Seismic Protection of Building Constructions" GB 50223 .

Note: Category A. Category B and Category C buildings in this specification are short for buildings of particular fortificati on category.
major fortification category and standard fortification category respectively specified in "Standard for Classification of Seismic
Protection of Building Constructions" GB 50223.

3.1.3 Concrete structures of tall building may adopt such structural systems as frame, shearwall,
frame-shearwall, slab-column sheanvall and tube structure.

3.1.4 Tall buildings shall not adopt severely-irregular structural system and they shal l meet the
following requirements:

1 They shall be possessed of necessary bearing capacity, rigidity and ductility;

2 The whole structure shall be prevented from losing the abilities to bear gravity load, wind
load and seismic action due to the failure of partial structure or members;

3 Effective strengthening measures shall be taken for potential weak positions.

3.1.5 Structural system of tall buildings shou ld also meet the fo llowing requirements:

1 Vertical and horizontal layout of structure should enable the structure to have reasonable
rigidity and bearing capacity distribution, and avoid formi ng weak positions due to the partial mutation
of rigidity and bearing capacity or structural torsion effect;

2 The structural system shou ld have several defense lines in the seismic design.

3.1.6 Measures should be taken for concrete structures of tall bui lding to reduce the adverse effect
of non-load effects such as concrete shrinkage, creep, temperature change, and foundation differential
settlement. Various cmtain walls for buildings should be adopted for the outer walls cif tall building
whose building height is not less than l SOm.

3.1.7 Non-structural members of tall building such as filler wall and pa1tition wall should adopt
various light materials, shall reliably connect w ith the major structure and shall meet the requirements
for bearing capacity, stability and deformation .

3.2 Materials

3.2.1 Concrete structures of tall building should adopt high-strength and high-performance concrete
and high-strength reinforcement; where the members have larger internal force or higher seismic
7
performance requirements, section steel concrete and steel pipe concrete members should be adopted.

3.2.2 The strength grade of concrete for various structures shall not be less than C20 and shall meet
the following requirements:

1 During the seismic design, concrete strength grade of Seismic Grade I frame beam, column
and their nodes shall not be less than C30;

2 Concrete strength grade of tube structure should not be less than C30;

3 Concrete strength grade of basement floor as the build-in position of superstructure should
not be less than C30;

4 Concrete strength grade of floor slab in transfer story, transfer beam, transfer column, box-
type transfer structure and transfer thick s lab shall not be less than C30;

5 Concrete strength grade of pre-stressed concrete structure should not be less than C40 and
shall not be less than C30:

6 Concrete strength grades of section steel concrete beam and column should not be less than
C3 0;

7 Concrete strength grade of cast-in-place non-prestressed concrete should not be greater than
C40;

8 During the seism ic design, concrete strength grade of frame co lumn, should not be greater
than C60 in Intensity 9, should not be greater than C70 in Intensity 8; concrete strength grade of
shearwall should not be greater than C60.

3.2.3 Stressed reinforcement and its performance of concrete structures of tal l building shall meet
the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of Concrete Structures"
GB 500 I 0. As for the frame and diagonal bracing member designed according to Grade I, II and III
seismic grade, their longitudinal stressed reinforcement shall also meet the following requirements:

1 The ratio of the measured value of tensile strength to that of yield strength of reinforcements
shall not be less than 1.25;

2 The ratio of the measured value of yield strength to standard value of yield strength of
reinforcements shall not be greater than 1.30;

3 The measured value of the overall elongation under the maximum tension of reinforcements
shal l not be less than 9%.

3.2.4 During the seismic design, steels in the composite structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 The ratio of the measured value of yield strength and measured value of tensile strength of
steels shall not be greater than 0.85;

2 The steels shall have obvious yield steps and their elongation rate shall not be less than 20%;

3 The steels sha ll have good weldability and qualified impact ductility.

3.2.5 Section steel of section steel concrete ve11ical member and steel pipe of steel pipe concrete in
the composite structure should adopt Q345 and Q235 steel, or may adopt Q390 and Q420 steel or
other steels that meet the strucn1ral performance requirements; section steel beam should adopt Q235
8
and Q345 steel.

3.3 Height and Aspect Ratio Limitations

3.3.1 Maximum applicable height of reinforced concrete tall building structure shall be classified
into Grade A and Grade B. Maximum app licable height of Category B and Category C tall buildings
of reinforced concrete in Grade A height shall be in accordance with those specified in Table 3 .3 .1 - 1;
maximum applicable height of Category B and Category C tall buildings of reinforced concrete m
Grade B height shall be in accordance with those specified in Table 3.3 .1-2.

As for the tall building structures irregular in both horizontal and vertical directions, their
maximum applicable height should be reduced properly.

Table 3.3.1-1 Maximum Applicable Height of Reinforced Concrete Tall Building in Grade A Heig ht (m)

Seismic precautionary intensity

Non-seismic
Structural system Intensity 8
design Intensity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 9
0.20g I 0.30g

Frame 70 60 50 40 35 -

Frame-shearwail 150 130 120 100 80 50

Shearwall linked with the ground 150 140 120 100 80 60

Shearwall
Partial frame-supported shcarwall 130 120 JOO 80 50 Inapplicable

Frame-corcwall 160 150 130 100 90 70

Tube
Tube-in-tube - 200 180 150 120 100 80

Slab-column shearnall 110 80 70 55 40 Inapplicable

Note: I Frame in this Table excludes special-shaped column frame;

2 Partial frame-supported shearwall structure refers to the shearwall structure with partial frame-supported shearwall above
ground;

3 Category A buildings should meet the requirements of this Table after improved by l intensity according to the local seismic
precautionary intensity in the case of Intensity 6. 7 and 8; they shall be studied specially in the case of Intensity 9;

4 As for the frame structure. slab-column shearwall structure and other structures m the column of Intensity 9 seismic
precaution. where building height is greater than the values specified in this Table, the strucwre design shall have reliable
cnterion and effective strengthening measures shall be taken .

Ta ble 3.3.1 -2 Maximum Applicable Height of Rein fo rced Concrete Tall Bu ildin g in Grade B Height (m)

Seismic precautionary intensity

Non-seismic
Structural system Intensity 8
design Intensity 6 Intensity 7
0.20g 0.30g

Frame-shearwall 170 160 140 120 JOO

Shear wall linked with the ground 180 170 150 130 110
Shearwall
Partial frame-supported shearwall 150 140 120 100 80

Frame-corewall 220 210 180 140 120

Tube
Tube-in-tube 300 280 230 170 150

9
 Note. I Partial frame-supported shcarwall structure refers to the shearwall structure with partial frame-supported shearwall above
ground:

2 Category A buildings should meet the requirements of this Table after improved by I intensity according to the local seismic
precautionary intensity in the case of Intensity 6 and 7: they shall be studied specially m the case of Intensity 8:

3 Where the building height is greater than the values specified in this Table. the structure design shall have reliable criterion
and effective strengthening measures shall be taken.

3.3.2 Height-width ratio of reinforced concrete tall bui lding structure should not be greater than the
requirements of Table 3.3.2.

Table 3.3.2 Applicable Maximum Height-width Ratio of Reinforced Co ncrete Tall Building Struct ure

Seismic precautionary intensity

Structural system Non-seismic design
Intensity 6 and 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9
Frame 5 4 3 -
Slab-column shearwall 6 5 4 -

Frame-shearwall. shearwall 7 6 5 4

Frame-corewall 8 7 6 4

Tube-in-tube 8 8 7 5

3.4 Structural Plan Layout

3.4.1 In one absolute construction unit of tall building, structural plane shape should be simple and
regular, in uniform mass, rigidity and bearing capacity distribution, and shall not adopt severely
irregu lar p lane layout.

3.4.2 Tall building should adopt the planeform with less wind action effect.

3.4.3 Plane layout of concrete tall building adopting seismic design shou ld meet the following
requirements:

1 Plane should be simple, regu lar, symmetrical and eccentricity reduced;

2 Plane length should not overlong (Figure 3.4.3); LIB should be in accordance with those
specified in Table 3.4.3;

Ta ble 3.4.3 Ratio limit of Plan e Dimension a nd Protruding Part Dimension

Precautionary intensity LIB /!B..," li b

Intensity 6 and 7 :56 0 :50.35 :52.0

Intensity 8 and 9 :55.0 :50.35 :51.5

3 Length I of plane protruding part should not be overlong and its width b should not be
undersize (Figure 3.4.3); llBmax, lib should be in accordance with those specified in Table 3.4.3;

4 Build ing plane should not adopt corner overlapping or wasp waist plane layout.

3.4.4 During the seismic design, as for the reinforced concrete tall building in Grade B height,
composite structure tall building and complex tall building structure specified in Chapter 10 of this
specification, the plane layout sha ll be simple, regular a nd eccentricity reduced.

10
 (a)
H~~
t=_ L ~
(b)

~]
~,
(C)

i
-4

(c)

Figure 3.4.3 Building Plane Sketch

3.4.5 Structural plane layout shall reduce the influence of torsion. Under the action of horizontal
seismic force in consideration of occasional eccentricity influence, the maximum horizontal displacement
and inter-story displacement of vertical story member should not be greater than 1.2 times of the mean
on this storey and shall not be greater than 1.5 times of the means, for the tall buildings in Grade A
height; they should not be greater than 1.2 times of the means on this storey and shall not be greater
than 1.4 times of the means, for the tall buildings in Grade 8 height, composite structure greater than
Grade A height and complex tall buildings specified in Chapter I 0 of this specification. Ratio of first
natural vibration period Ti of structure based on torsion to that T1 of structure based on translation
shall not be greater than 0.9 for the tall buildings in Grade A height; and it shall not be greater than
0.85 for the tall buildings in Grade B height, composite structure greater than Grade A height and
complex tall buildings specified in Chapter 10 of this specification.

Note: Where the maximum mter-story displacemem angle of story is not greater than 40% of the limits specified in Article 3.7.3 of

this specification, the ratio of the maximum horizontal displacement or inter-story displacement to the story mean of the vertical

story member may be broaded properly but shall not be greater than 1.6.

3.4.6 Where the slab plane is relatively long and narrow, and have larger indentation or openings,
their adverse effects to the structure shall be taken into consideration in the design. f:ffective floor
slab width should not be Jess than 50% of the floor width of this story; total area of floor slab
openings should not be greater than 30% of the floor area; the minimum clear width of floor slab on
any direction, after deducting indentation or openings, should not be less than Sm, and the clear width
of any s ide of floor slab w ith openings shall not be less than 2m .

3.4.7 As for the buildings with larger protruding length such as* and 1f shaped buildings, where
the floor s labs in the central patt are greatly weakened, the constructional measures of the floor slabs
and the walls on the connecting part shall be strengthened, if necessary, connecting beams or connecting
plates may be arranged in the grooves of the protruding segments.

3.4.8 After the floor s labs are weakened by large openings, the following measures should be taken:
II
 1 Floor slabs around the openings shall be thickened, reinforcement ratio of floor slabs shall be
improved, and double-layer two-way reinforcement shall be adopted;

2 Edge beams and concealed beams shall be arranged at the edges of openings;

3 Diagonal reinforcement shall be configured in a centralized way at the corners of the floor
slab openings.

3.4.9 During the seismic design, planefonn and structural layout shou ld be adjusted for the tall
building to avoid the need to arrange seismic joints. As for the buildings with complex shape and
irregular plane and vertical plane, the necessity of seismic joints shall be determined according to the
comparative analysis on such factors as the irregularity degree, subgrade foundation conditions,
technology and economy.

3.4.10 Seismic joints arranged shall meet the following requirements:

1 Width of seismic joints shall meet the following requirements:

1) As for the buildings with frame structures, if the height of the buildings does not exceed
I Sm, the width of seismic joints shall not be less than I OOmm; if not, the w idth, for
Intensity 6, 7, 8 and 9 shou ld be increased by 20mm respectively when the height is
increased by every Sm, 4m, 3m and 2m;

2) As for the buildings with frame-shearwall structures, the width of seismic joints shall not
be less than 70% of the value specified in Item I of this Item; as for the buildings with
sheanvall structures, the width shall not be less than 50% of the value specified in Item 1),
however, the width for both two kinds of buildings shou ld not be less than I OOmm.

2 Where the structural systems are different at both sides of the seismic joint, the width of
seismic joint shall be detennined according to the adverse structure type;

3 Where the building height is different at both sides of the seismic joint, the width of seismic
joint may be determined according to the lower building height;

4 As for the buildings with frame structures of Intensity 8 and 9 seismic design, if the structural
story height at both sides of the seismic joint differ greatly, the stirrups of the frame columns at both
sides of the seism ic joint shall be thickened along the total height of the building, and at least two
bump walls vertical to the seismic joint shall be built at both sides of the seismic joint along the total
height of the bui lding as required;

5 Where relatively-large differential settlement exists in the foundation of adjacent structures,

the width of seismic joint should be enlarged;

6 Seismic joints should be arranged along the total height of the buildings, which may be
omitted for the basement and foundation , but the construction and connection shall be strengthened at
the places corresponding to the upper seismic joints;

7 Seismic joints should not be arranged by bracket joist method between construction units or
between main building and podiums, otherwise reliable measures shall be taken.

3.4.11 During the seismic design, the width of expansion joint and settlement joint shall meet the
req uirements for seismic joint width in Article 3.4.10 of this specification .

12
3.4.12 The maximum spacing between the expansion joints of tall building structure should be in
accordance with those specified in Table 3.4.12.

Table 3.4.12 Maximum Spacing of Expansion Joints

Structural system Construction method Maximum spacing (m)

Frame structure Cast-in-place 55

Shearwall structure Cast-in-place 45

Note: I The spacing of expansion joints for frame-shearwall may adopt the values between the frame structure and shearwall structure

in this Table according to the specific arrangement conditions of structures;

2 The spacing of expansion joints shall be reduced properly in the case of non-heat preservation or heat insulation measures

for the roofs. relatively large concrete contraction or relatively long exposed time of indoor structure due to construction

factors:

3 The spacing of expansion jomts should be reduced properly for the structures in the dry climate zone, or in the zone where

summer is hot and rainstorm is frequent.

3.4.13 Where effective constructional measures and construction measures are adopted to reduce the
influence of temperature and concrete shrinkage to the structures, the spacing of expansion joints may
be broadened properly. These measures may include, but not limited to the following aspects:

1 Reinforcement ratio shall be improved for the positions suffering from large temperature
change influence such as top story, bottom story, gable wall and bay at the longitudinal wall end;

2 Heat preservation and heat insulation measures shall be strengthened for the top story, and
external insulating layer shall be arranged for the outer wall;

3 Post-placed construction strip (800mm-l OOOmm wide) shall be reserved every 30-40m;
reinforcement shall adopt overlapping joint; post-placed strip concrete should be placed after 45 days;

4 Cement with small contraction shall be adopted, cement content shall be reduced, and proper
additive shall be added in the concrete;

5 Constructional reinforcement rate of each story of floor slabs shall be improved or partial
pre-stressed structures shall be adopted.

3.5 Structural Vertical Arrangement

3.5.1 The vertical shape of tall building should be regular and uniform, free from exce·ssive outward
projection and setback. The lateral stiffness of structural should reduce gradually and uniformly from
the lower to the upper pa1i.

3.5.2 During the seismic design, lateral stiffness change between adjacent stories of tall building
shall meet the following requirements:

1 As for the frame structure, lateral rigidity ratio y1 of story to its adjacent upper story may be
calculated according to Formula (3.5.2-1 ); the ratio of this story to the adjacent upper story should not
be less than 0.7; the ratio of this story to the mean of the adjacent upper three stories should not be
less than 0.8.
13
 (3.5.2- 1)

Where y1- -Lateral rigidity ratio of story;

V;, V;. 1--Standard val ues of seismic shear force on the i 1" story and i+ 11" story (kN);

!'ii, l'i11.1- -Inter-story displacement under the action of seismic action standard value on the /"
story and i+ I1" story (m).

As for the frame-shearwall, s lab-column shearwall structure, shearwall structure, frame-

2
corewall structure and tube in tube structure, lateral rigidity ratio y2 of story to its adjacent upper story
may be calculated according to Formula (3.5.2-2); the ratio of this story to the adjacent upper story
should not be less than 0.9; where this story height is greater than 1.5 times of the height of the
adjacent upper story, the ratio should not be less than 1.1; as for the build-in story at the bottom of the
structure, the ratio should not be less than 1.5.

(3.5.2-2)

Where y2--Lateral rigidity ratio of story in consideration of story height correction.

3.5.3 Inter-story shear bearing capacity of story lateral-force-resisting structure in the tall building of
Grade A height should not be less than 80% of that of the adjacent upper story, shall not be less than
65% of that of the adjacent upper story; inter-story shear bearing capacity of story lateral-force-
resisting structure in the tall building of Grade B height shall not be less than 75% of that of the
adjacent upper story.

Note: Inter-story shear bearing capacity of story lateral-force-resisting structure refers to the sum of the all shear bearing capacity of
column, shearwall and diagonal bracing on this story along the considered horizontal seismic action direction.

3.5.4 During the seismic design, structural ve1tical lateral-force-resisting members should be linking
the upper and lower continuously.

3.5.5 During the seismic design, when the ratio of he ight H 1 between the structural upper story
setback position and outdoor ground to bui lding height His greater than 0.2, the horizontal dimension
B 1 of upper story after setback should not be less than 75% of the horizontal dimension of the lower
story (Figure 3.5.5 a and b);

Where the upper stories seem ounvard projection compared with the lower stories, the horizontal
dimension B1 of upper stories should not be greater than 1.1 ti mes of horizontal dimension B of the
lower stories, and horizontal outward projection dimension a should not be greater than 4m (Figure
3.5.5 c and d).

3.5.6 Story mass should be distributed uniformly along the height; story mass should not be greater
than 1.5 times of the mass of the adjacent lower story.

3.5.7 Such tall building structure should not be adopted, whose stiffness and bearing capac ity
change on the same story both dissatisfy the requi rements of Atticle 3.5.2 and Atticle 3.5.3 of this
specification.
14
 1~ ~1~
::::·1 a
B

( a)
L B

(b)
u 8

(c)
B

(d)

F igure 3.5.5 Structural Vertical Setback and Outward Projection Sketch

3.5.8 As for the stories whose lateral stiffness change, bearing capacity change and vertical lateral-
force-resisting member continuity fail to conform to the requirements of Aiticles 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and 3.5.4
of this specification, their shear force corresponding to the standard value of seismic action shall be
multiplied by the enhancement coefficient of 1.25.

3.5.9 Where some walls and columns are dismantled to form spacious rooms at the top story of the
structure, elastic or elasto-plastic time-history analysis supplement calculation should be carried out
and effective constructional measures should be taken.

3.6 Diaphragm System

3.6.1 Where building height is greater than 50m, frame-shearwall structure, tube structure and
complex tall building structure specified in Chapter 10 of this specification shall adopt cast-in-place
floor structure; shearwall structure and frame structure should adopt cast-in-place floor structure.

3.6.2 Where the building height is not greater than 50m, cast-in-place floor structure should be
adopted during the Intensity 8 and 9 seism ic designs; assembled monolithic floor may be adopted
during the Intensity 6 and 7 seismic designs and shall meet the following requirements :

1 As for the prefabricated slab without cast-in-place composite layer, the length of slab end laid
up on the beam should not be less than 50mm.

2 Horizontal reinforcing bar should be reserved at the end of prefabricated slab, and its length
should not be less than 1OOmm.

3 Prefabricated hollow slab nose end shall be provided with plug whose depth should not be
less than 60mm and which shall be poured compactly with not Jess than C20 concrete.

4 Upper margin width of floor prefabricated slab joint should not be less than 40mm. Where
slab joint is greater than 40mm , reinforcement shall be arranged in the slab joint and should penetrate
the whole construction unit. Concrete strength grade of cast-in-place slab joint and slab joint beam
shou ld be greater than that of prefabricated slab.

5 Reinforced concrete cast-in-place layer should be arranged on each layer of floor. Thickness
of cast-in-place layer shall not be less than 50mm; reinforcement mat not Jess than 6mm in diameter
and not greater than 200mm in spacing shall be arranged along two directions on the layer; reinforcement
shall be anchored in the beam or shearwall.

3.6.3 Cast-in-place floor structures shall be adopted for top story of buildings, structural transfer
15
story, base plate top story of large base plate multi-tower structure with a common podium, stories
with complex plane or excessive openings, as well as basement story as the build-in position of the
superstructure. Cast-in-place floor slab thickness of general story shall not be less than 80mm, and
should not be less than I OOmm where concealed pipes are embedded in the slab; the floor slab thickness
at the top story should not be less than l 20mm, and double-layer and two-way reinforcement should
be adopted; floor slab of transfer story shall meet the relevant requirements of Chapter l 0 in this
specification; the roof deck thickness of ordinary basement should not be less than l 60mm ; garret
floor of basement story ascted as the build-in position of the superstructure shall adopt beam and slab
structure, the floor slab thickness should not be less than 180mm, double-layer two-way reinforcement
shall be adopted, and the reinforcement ratio shou ld not be less than 0.25% in each direction on each
layer.

3.6.4 Thickness of cast-in-place pre-stressed concrete floor slab may be adopted according to 1/45-
1150 of the span and should not be less than l 50mm.

3.6.5 During the design of cast-in-place pre-stressed concrete slab, measures shall be taken to
prevent or reduce the pre-stress of major structure to the floor slab.

3.7 Limitations for Story Drift and Comfort

3.7.1 Under the regular service conditions, tall building structure shall have sufficient rigidity and
free from excessive displacement which may influence the structural bearing capacity, stabi lity and
service requirements.

3.7.2 Under the regular service conditions, structural horizontal displacement shall be calculated
accordi ng to the wind load and seismic action specified in Chapter 4 of this specification as well as
the elastic method specified in Chapter 5.

3.7.3 Under the action of wind load calculated as the elastic method or standard value of frequent
earthquakes, the ratio of inter-story maximum horizontal displacement to story height !:!..u/h should
meet the following requirements:

1 As for the ta! I building not greater than l 50m high, the ratio of inter-story maximum
displacement to story height !:!..u/h should not be greater than the limits specified in Table 3.7.3.

Table 3. 7.3 Limit of Ratio oflnter-story Maximum Displacement to Story Height

Structural system 6 11/h limit

Frame l /550

Frame-shearwall, framc-corewall. slab-column shearwall l /800

Tube in tube. shearwall l / 1000

Transfer story except the frame structure 1/ 1000

2 As for the tall building not less than 250m high, the ratio of inter-story maximum displacement
to story height !:!..u/h should not be greater than the 1/500.

3 As for the tall building l 50m- 250m high, the ratio of inter-story maximum displacement to
story height !:!..u/h may be used by linear inse11ion according to the limits specified in Item 1 and Item
2 of this At1icle.

16
 Note: Inter-story ma"Xirnum displacement 6u shall be calculated by the ma"Ximum horizontal displacement difference of vertical story

members. not deducting the mtegral bending deformation. During the seismic design, the influence of occasional eccentricity

may not be taken into consideration for the story displacement calculation in this Article.

3.7.4 Elasto-plastic deformation checking calculation for weak story of tall building structure under
the action of rare ea1thquake shall meet the following requirements:

1 Elasto-plastic deformation checking calculation shall be carried out for the following structures:

1) Frame structure whose story yield strength coefficient is less than 0.5 in Intensity 7-9;

2) Category A building and Category B building structures in Intensity 9 seismic precaution

zone;

3) Seismically isolated and energy-dissipated building structures;

4) Structures with building height greater than l 50m.

2 Elasto-plastic deformation checking calculation should be carried out for the following
structures:

1) Vertical irregular tall building structures which belong to the height scope listed in Table
4.3.4 of this specification and dissatisfy the requirements of Articles 3.5.2-3.5.6 in this
specification;

2) Category B building structures on Category III and IV grounds in Intensity 7 zone and in
Intensity 8 seismic precaution zone;

3) Slab-column shearwall structure.

Note: Yield strength coefiicient of story is the ratio of story shear capacity calculated according to the actual reinforcement of member

and standard value of material strength to the elastic earthquake shear force of story calculated according to the rare seismic

action.

3. 7.5 Inter-story elasto-plastic displacement of structural weak story (pmt) shall meet the requirements
of the following Formula:

(3.7.5)

Where fj.up--lnter-story elasto-plastic displacement;

[Bp]--Limit for inter-story elasto-plastic displacement angle, which may be adopted

according to Table 3.7.5; as for the frame structures, if their axial compression ratio
is less than 0.40, then this limit may be increased by 10%; if the stirrup standard
value along the full height of the column is 30% greater than the minimum stirrup
characteristic value of frame column stirrup specified in this specification, this
limit may be increased by 20%, however, it should not be increased by over 25%
totally;

h--Story height.

3.7.6 Ta ll concrete building structure with not less than 150m building height shall meet the wind
vibration comfo11 level requirements. Under the action of standard value of wind load which may be
encountered every I 0 years specified in the current national standard "Load Code for the Design of
17
Building Structures" GB 50009, calculated values of downwind and crosswind maximum vibration
acceleration at the structural peak shall not be greater than the lim its specified in Table 3.7.6.
Downwind and crosswind maximum vi bration acceleration at the structural peak may be calculated
according to the relevant requirements of the current professional standard "Technical Specification
for Steel Structure of Tall Buildings" JGJ 99, or determined by the wind tunnel test results; structural
damping ratio should take 0.01 - 0.02 in calculation.

Table 3.7.5 Limit of Inter-story Elasto-plastic Displacement Angle

Structural system [8.J

Frame structure 1/50

Frame-shearwall structure. frame-corcwall structure, slab-column shearwall structure l/100

Shearwall structure and tube in tube structure 1/120

Transfer story except the frame structure 11120

Table 3.7.6 Limit for Wind Vib ration Acceleration at the Structural Peak a 1;'"

Use functions Gi;m (!'1/s 2)

House and apartment 0. 15

Office and hotel 0.25

3.7.7 Floor structure shall have appropriate comfort level. Vertical vibration frequency of floor
structure should not be less than 3 Hz; ve1tical vibration acceleration peak va lue shall not be greater
than the limits specified in Table 3. 7. 7. Ve1tical vibration acceleration of floor structure may be
calculated according to Appendix A of this specification.

Table 3.7.7 Li mit for Vertical Vibration Acceleration of Floor

Peak acceleration limit (m/s 2)

Personnel activity environment Vertical natural vibration frequency not Vertical natural vibration frequency not less
greater than 2Hz than 4Hz

House and office 0.07 0.05

Mall and indoor vestibule 0.22 0.15

Note: Where vertical natural vibration freq uency of floor structure is 2-4Hz, peak acceleration limit should be selected according to
the linear interpolation.

3.8 Strength Design of Members

3.8.1 Bearing capacity of tall building structure members shall be checked and calculated
according to the following Formula:

Durable design conditions and temporary design conditions

(3.8.1-1)

Seismic design conditions (3.8.1-2)

Where )'o- -Structural significance coefficient, which shall not be less than 1.1 for the
structural member with Grade I safety class, and shall not be less t han 1.0 for
the structural member with Grade II safety class;
18
 Sd--Combined effect design value of action, which shall meet the requirements of
Articles 5.6.1-5.6.4 of this specification;

Rd- -Design value of member bearing capacity;

/'RE- -Seismic adjustment coefficient of member bearing capacity.

3.8.2 During the seismic design, seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity for reinforced
concrete member shall be adopted according to Table 3 .8.2; seism ic adjustment coefficient of bearing
capacity for section steel concrete member and steel structures shal l be adopted according to the
requirements of Atticle 11.1.7 in this specification. If only the ve1tical seismic action combination is
taken into consideration, the seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity of various structural
members shall be taken as 1.0.

Table 3.8.2 Seismic Adjustment Coefficient of Bearing Capacity

Columns with axial Columns with axial

Member type Beam compression ratio compression rat io Shearwall Various members Node

less than 0.15 not less than 0.15

Eccentric Eccentric Eccentric Partial Shear, eccentric

Stress state Bending Shear
compression compression compression pressure-beanng tension

YRE 0.75 0.75 0.80 0.85 1.0 0.85 0.85

3.9 Seismic Design Grade of Structural Members

3.9.1 As for tall building structures of various seismic precautionary categories, their seismic
measures shall meet the following requirements:

1 Category A and Category B buildings: seismic measures shall be strengthened by

improving one intensity according to the local seismic precautionary intensity, however, when
the seismic fortification intensity is Intensity 9, seismic measures shall be taken according to the
requirements much higher than Intensity 9; where the building site belongs to Category I, seismic
structural measures shall be allowed to be taken according to the local seismic precautionary
intensity requirements.

2 Category C buildings: their seismic measures shall be determined according to the local
seismic precautionary intensity; where the building site belongs to Category I, except intensity 6,
seismic structural measures shall be allowed to be taken according to the requirements of
reducing one grade of local seismic precautionary intensity.

3.9.2 If the building site belongs to Category III or IV, in the areas where the design basic seismic
acceleration is 0.1 Sg or 0.30g, seismic structural measures should be taken respectively according to
the various building requirements where se ismic precautionary intensity is Intensity 8 (0.20g) and
Intensity 9 (0 .40g).

3.9.3 During the seismic design, different seismic grades shall be adopted for the reinforced
concrete structure member of tall building according to the seismic precautionary classification,
intensity, structure type and building height; in addition, the corresponding requirements of
calculation and constructional measures shall also be satisfied. Seismic grade of reinforced
concrete structure of Category C buildings in Grade A height shall be determined according to
19
Table 3.9.3. Where the local precautionary intensity is Intensity 9, Category B buildings in
Grade A height shall adopt the special seismic grade and Category A buildings shall adopt much
more efficient seismic measures.

:'\ote: " Special grade, Grade I, II, III and I\'"' in this specification are short for "special seismic grade. Grade I, II. III and I\..'.

Table 3.9.3 Seis mic Grade of Tall Building Structure in Grade A Height

Intensity
Structure type
Intensity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 8 In tensity 9

Frame structure III II I I

Height (m) :560 >60 :560 >60 :560 >60 :550

Frame-shea rwall
Frame IV III Ill II II I I
struc1ure
Shearwall III II I I

Shear wa ll Height (m) :580 >80 :580 >80 :580 >80 :560

Slructure Shearwall IV III III II II I I

Par tial Shear wall not at bottom r einforced part IV III III II II
frame-supported
Shearn•all at bottom reinforced part III II II I I - -
shear wall
Frame-supported frame II II I I
structure

Fra me III II I I
Frame-corewall
Core tu be II II I I
Tube structure
Inner t ube
Tube in tube III II I I
Outer t ube

S lab-column IIeight :535 >35 :535 >35 :535 >35

shearwall Frame, slab column a nd column strip III II II II I I -

structure S hea rwall II II II I II I

:'l'ote: 1 Where it is approximate or equal to height boundary, the seismic grade may be determined according to degree of

irregularity of buildings as well as conditions of site a nd base;

2 As for the tube stru cture with transfer story al the bottom, the seismic grade of transfer frame shall be adopted

according to the req ui rements of partial frame -supported shearwall structure in the table;

3 Where th e h eight of frame-corewall structure is less than or equal to 60m , its seismi c grade shall be allowed to be

adopted according to the frame-shearwall structure.

3.9.4 During the seismic design, seismic grade of reinforced concrete structure of Category C
buildings in Grade B height shall be determined according to Table 3.9.4.

3.9.5 As for the tall building of seismic design, when the top story of the basement is used as the
bui ld-in end of superstructure, the seismic grade of the first story underground shall be the same as
that of the superstructure; the seismic grade of the seismic structural measures below the first story
underground may be reduced by one grade story by story, but shall not be less than Grade IV; for the
part of the basement exceeding the up per main building or without superstructure, the seismic grade
may take Grade Ill or IV according to the specific conditions.

20
 Table 3.9.4 Seismic Grade of Tall Build in g Structure in G rade B height

Intensity
Structure type
Intensity 6 Intensity 7 I ntensity 8

Frame II I I
Frame-shearwall
Shearwall II I Special grade

Sheanvall Sheanvall II I I

Partial Sheanvall not at bottom reinforced part II I I

fra me-supported Shearwall at bottom r einforced part I I Special grade

shearwall Frame-supported frame I Special grade Special grade

Frame II I I
Fram e-corewall
Tube II I Special grade

Outer tube II I S pecial grade

Tube in tube
Inner tube II I Special grade

Note: As for the tu be structu re with transfer story at the bottom, the seismic grade of transfer frame and tube a t bottom
r einforced part shall be adopted according to the requirements of partial frame-supporced shearwall structure in the

Table.

3.9.6 During the seismic design, the seismic grade of the podiums connected w ith the main building
as an integral shall not only be determined according to the podiums, but also the relevant scope shall
not be less than the seismic grade of the main building; the seismic structural measures of main
bui lding structure shall be strengthened properly on the one story above or below the podiums roof
deck. If the podiums and the main building are separated, the seismic grade shall be determined
according to the podiums.

3.9.7 Where the seismic measures of Category A and B buildings are determined by improving one
grade according to Article 3 .9 .1 of this specification, or the seismic structural measures of Category C
buildings at Category III or IV site w ith 0.1 Sg or 0.30g design basic seismic acceleration are
determined by improving one grade according to A11icle 3 .9 .2 of this specification, if the building
height exceeds the corresponding maximum applicable height after improving one grade, much more
efficient seismic structural measures than corresponding seismic grade shall be taken.

3.10 Requirement for Members of Special Seismic Design Grade

3.10.1 Reinforced concrete member of special se1sm1c design grade shall not only meet all the
design requirements of Grade I reinforced concrete member, but also meet the relevant. requirements
of this section.

3.10.2 Speciai sei smic design grade frame column shall meet the followi ng requirements:

1 Secti on steel concrete column and steel core concrete column should be adopted;

2 Enhancement coefficient of column end bending moment 1/c and that of column end shear
force '7vc shall increase by 20%;

3 Minimum stirrup characterist ic value Yv in the densified area at the end of reinforced concrete
column shall be increased by 0.02 according to the values specified in Table 6.4. 7 of this specification ;
constructional reinforcement percentage of all longitudinal reinforcement, middle and side column
21
shall not be less than 1.4%: corner column shall not be less than 1.6%.

3.10.3 Special seismic design grade frame beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 Enhancement coefficient of beam end shear force IJvb shall be 20%;

2 The minimum area reinforcement ratio of stirrup in the densified area at the beam end shall
increase by I 0%.

3.10.4 Special seismic design grade frame-supported column shall meet the following requirements:

1 Section steel concrete column and steel core concrete column should be adopted.

2 The bending moment enhancement coefficient shall take 1.8 at the lower end of the column
at the bottom story and at the upper end of column connected with the transfer story; the enhancement
coefficient of column end bending moment (17c) at other stories shall be 20%; the one of column end
shear force (17vc) shall be 20%; the one of column and axial force produced by the seismic action shall
be 1.8, but which may be omitted in the calculation for the axial compression ratio of column.

3 Minimum stirrup characteristic value l.v in the densified area at the end of reinforced concrete
column shall increase by 0.03 according to the values in Table 6.4 .7 of this specification, and the
volumetric stirrup ratio shall not be less than 1.6%; the minimum constructional reinforcement
percentage of all longitudinal reinforcement shall be 1.6%.

3.10.5 Special seismic design grade shearwall and tube wall shall meet the following requirements:

1 Design value of bending moment at the bottom reinforced part shal l multiply by I. I
enhancement coefficient; design value of bending moment at other parts shall multiply by 1.3
enhancement coefficient. Design value of shear force at the bottom reinforced part shall be adopted
according to 1.9 times of shear force calculated value in consideration of the seismic action combination:
design value of shear force at other pa1ts shall be adopted according to 1.4 times of shear force
calculated value in consideration of the seismic action combination.

2 Minimum reinforcement ratio of horizontally and vertically distributed reinforcement at

general parts shall take 0.35%; minimum reinforcement ratio of horizontally and ve11ically distributed
reinforcement at the bottom reinforced part shal l take 0.40%.

3 Minimum constructional reinforcement ratio for the longitudinal reinforcement of constrained

boundary members shall take 1.4%, and stimtp characteristic value should increase by 20%; reinforcement
ratio for the longitudinal reinforcement of structural boundary members shall not be Jess than 1.2%.

4 Boundary members at the bottom reinforced pat1 of shearwall linked with the ground 111
frame-supported shearwall structure should be equipped with section steels which should extend one
story upward and downward.

5 The requirements for the connection beam are the same as those for Grade I.

3.11 Performance-based Seismic Design of Structures

3.11.1 In the performance-based seismic design of structure, the pa1ticularity of structural schemes
shall be analyzed, appropriate seismic performance objectives of structure shall be selected, as well as
measures meeting the expected seismic performance objectives shall be taken.
22
 Seismic performance objectives of structure shall be selected in full consideration of such
factors as seismic precautionary category, precautionary intensity, site conditions, structural particularity,
construction cost, post-disaster loss and reconstruction easiness. Seismic performance objectives of
structure are divided into Grade A, B, C and D; structural seismic performances are divided into Level
1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (Table 3.1 1. 1); each performance objective corresponds to a group of seismic performance
levels of structure under the designated earthquake ground mot ion.

Ta ble 3. 11.1 Seismic Perfo rm a nce Obj ectives of Structure

~ e

Frequent earthquake
I
A

I
B

I
c

1
D

Precautionary intensity earthquake I 2 3 4

Estimated rare earthquake 2 3 4 5

3.11.2 Macroscopic discrimination may be carried out for the se1sm1c performance levels of
structure according to Table 3 .11 .2.

Table 3.1 1.2 Expected Post-disaster Performance State of Each P erform ance Level Structure

Damage position
Seismic performance Macroscopic damage Possibility of continuous
Ordinary vertical Energy consuming
levels of structure degree Key member service
member member
Intact and May continue to be used
I Undamaged Undamaged Undamaged
undamaged without repair
Basic intact and May continue to be used
2 Undamaged Undamaged Slight damage
slight damage after slight repair
Light damage, moderate May continue to be used
3 Light damage Slight damage Slight damage
damage of some members after general repair

Moderate damage, May continue to be used

Moderate damage
4 Moderate damage Light damage relatively serious damage after repair or
of some members
of some members reinforcement
Relatively serious
Relatively serious Need inspection and
5 Moderate damage damage of some Relatively serious damage
damage overhaul
members
Note: "Key member" refers to such member whose fai lure may cause continuous damage of structure or severe damage ~ndanger mg the life
safety; "ordinary vertical member" refers to the vertical member except the "key member"; "energy consuming member" includes frame
beam, shearwall connection beam and energy consuming bracing.

3.11.3 Structures of different seismic performance levels may be designed accord ing to the following
requirements:

1 Structure of Grade 1 performance level shall meet the requirements of elastic design . Under
the action of frequent earthquakes, the bearing capacity and deformation shall meet the relevant
requirements of this specification; under the action of precautionary intensity earthquake, seismic
bearing capacity of structural mem ber sha ll meet the requirements of the fo llowing Formula:

23
 (3.11.3-1)

Where Rd, yruo--Are the design value and seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity of
members respectively, the same as Article 3 .8.1 of this specification;

SGE> YG, YE11, YEv--The same as Article 5.6.3 of this specification;

S~hk --Internal force of member of horizontal seismic action standard va lue, without
regard to the enhancement coefficient related to the seismic grade;

s;vk --Internal force of member of ve1tical seismic action standard value, without regard
to the enhancement coefficient related to the seismic grade.

2 As for the structure of Grade 2 performance level, under the action of precautionary intensity
earthquake or estimated rare earthquake. the seismic bearing capacity key member and ord inary
vertical member should meet the requirements of Formula (3.11.3- 1); the shear bearing capacity of
energy consuming member should meet the requirements of Formula (3 .11.3-1 ); the bearing capacity
of normal section shall meet the requirements of the following Formula:

(3 . 11.3-2)

Where Rk--Standard value of setional bearing capacity, calcu lated according to the standard
value of material strength .

3 Elasto-plastic computational analysis shall be carried out for the structure of Grade 3
perfom1ance level. Under the action of precautionary intensity earthquake or estimated rare ea1thquake,
the bearing capacity of normal section of key member and ordinary ve1iical member shall meet the
requirements of Formula (3 .11 .3 -2); the bearing capacity of normal section of key member in the
horizontal long-cantilevered structure and long span structure shall meet the requirements of Formula
(3 .11.3-3 ), and its shear bearing capacity should meet the requirements of Formula (3.11.3 -1); the
shear bearing capacity of some energy consuming members, before entering into the yielding stage,
shall meet the requirements of Formula (3.11.3-2).Under the action of estimated rare ea1thquake, the
inter-story displacement angle at the structural weak positions shall meet the requirements of A1ticle
3.7.5 of this specification.

(3.11.3-3)

4 Elasto-plastic computational analysis shall be carried out for the structtire of Grade 4
performance level.Under the action of precautionary intensity earthquake or estimated rare earthquake,
the seismic bearing capacity of key member shall meet the requirements of Fonnula (3 .11.3-2); the
bearing capacity of normal section of key member in the horizontal long-cantilevered structure and
long span structure shall meet the requirements of Formula (3 .11.3-3); some vertical members and a
majority of energy consuming members enter into the yielding stage, but the shear section of
reinforced concrete vertical member shall meet the requirements of Formula (3 .11.3 -4), and the shear
section of steel-concrete combination shearwall shall meet the requirements of Formula (3.11.3-5).
Under the action of estimated rare eatthquake, the inter-story displacement angle at the structural
weak positions shall meet the requirements of Article 3.7.5 of this specification.

24
 (3.11.3-4)

(3.11.3-5)

Where VGE--Member shear force under the action of gravity load representative value (N);

v;k --Member shear force of seismic action standard value (N), without regard to the
enhancement coefficient related to the seismic grade;

fck--Standard value of concrete axial compression strength (N/mm2) ;

/ak--Standard value of section steel strength in the hidden column at the end of
shearwall (N/mm2) ;

Aa--Sectional area of section steel in the hidden column at then end of shearwall
(mm 2) ;

.fspk--Standard value of steel plate strength in the shearwall (N/mm 2);

Asp-Cross-sectional area of steel plate in the shearwall (mm 2) .

5 Elasto-plastic computational analysis shall be carried out for the structure of Grade 5
performance level.Under the action of estimated rare earthquake, the seismic bearing capacity of key
members should meet the requirements of Formula (3 .11.3-2); more vertical members enter into the
yielding stage, but the vertical members in the same story should not all yield ; shear section of
ve11ical member shall meet the ·requirements of Formula (3 .11.3-4) or (3 .11.3-5); relatively severe
damage is allowed for some energy consuming members; inter-story displacement angle at the structural
weak positions shall meet the requirements of A11icle 3. 7 .5 of this specification.

3.11.4 Structural elasto-plastic computational analysis shall not only meet the requirements of
Article 5.5. 1 of this specification, but also meet the following requirements:

1 As for the tall building less than 150111 high, static elasto-plastic analysis method may be
adopted; as for the tall building greater than 200m high, elasto-plastic time-history analysis method
shal l be adopted ; as for the tall building l 50m~200m high, static elasto-plastic method or elasto-
plastic time history analyzing method may be selected according to the structural autooscillation
characteristics and degree of irregularity; as for the tall building greater than 300m high, two indentedent
calculation shall be used for checking.

2 Construction simulation analysis shal l be carried out for the complex structure, using the
internal force (after the overall process of construction is completed) as the initial state.

3 Elasto-plastic time-history analysis should adopt two-way or three-way eai1hquake input.

3.12 Requirement for Preventing Structural Progressive Collapse

3.12.1 Tall building structure of Grade I safety class shal l meet the requirements for the progressive-
collapse-resistant conceptual design; if there are special requirements, progressive-collapse-resistant
design may be carried out by adopting member dismantlement method.

3.12.2 Progressive-collapse-resistant conceptual design shall meet the following requirements:

25
 1 ecessary structural connection measures shall be taken to strengthen the structural integrity.

2 Hyperstatic structure of multi-span rule should be adopted for the major structure.

3 Structural member shall have appropriate ductility to avoid the shear fai lure, crush failure,
anchoring failure and node fai lure prior to the member failure.

4 Structural member shall have centain reverse bearing capacity.

5 Column spacing of peripheral and side span frame should not be too large.

6 Transfer structure shall have integral multiple gravity load tranfer ways .

7 Beam & column of reinforced concrete structure should adopt rigid connection; reinforcement
at the top/bottom of beam plate should be penetrated continuously at the support according to the
tension requirements.

8 Beam & column of structural steel frame should adotp rigid connection.

9 Straining beam connection shou ld be adopted between the individual foundations.

3.12.3 Progressive-collapse-resistant member dismantlement method shall meet the following

requ irements:

1 Important members shall be dismantled one by one such as peripheral column, internal
column at the bottom story and transer truss web member.

2 Internal force and deformation of the residual structures may be analyzed by the elastic static
force method.

3 Bearing capacity of the residual structural member shall meet the requirements of the
following Formula:

(3.12.3)

Where S~Design value of effect of the residual structural member, may be calculated accordi ng
to the requirements of Article 3 .12.4 of this specification;

Rd - -Design value of bearing capacity of the residual structural member, may be calculated
according to the requ irements of A11icle 3.12.5 of this specification;

(J- -Effect reduction coefficient, take 0.67 for middle horizontal members and 1.0 for
other members.

3.12.4 Durign the structural progressive-collapse-resistant design, the design vaiue of the load
combination effect may be determined according to the following Formula:

(3.12.4)

Where SGk--Effect produced by the standard value of permanent load;

SQ,, k - -Effect produced by the standard value of the i" vertical variable load;
Swk--Effect produced by the standard value of w ind load;

"'1q--Coefficient of quasi-permanent value of variable load ;

1

26
 'l'w---Coefficient of wind load combination value, take 0.2;

1'/ct- -Dynamic magnification coefficient of vertical load, take 2.0 where the members
are directly connected with the dismantled vertical members, and take 1.0 for other
members.

3.12.5 During the bearing capacity calculation of member section, the concrete strength may take
the standard value; steel intensity may take 1.25 times of the standard value during the checking
calculation for the bearing capacity of normal section, and take the standard value during the checking
calculation for the shear bearing capacity.

3.12.6 Where some member dismantlement cannot meet the structural progressive-collapse-resistant
design requirements, 80kN/m2 lateral accidental action design value shall be added on the surface of
the member; on this occasion, the bearing capacity shall meet the requirements of the following
Formula:

(3 .12.6-1)

(3. 12.6-2)

Where Rct--Design value of member bearing capacity, adopted according to Article 3 .8.1 of this
specification;

Sct- -Design value of action combination effect;

SGk--The effect of standard value of permanent load;

SQk--Effect of standard value of live load;

SAct- -Effect of design value of lateral accidental action.

27
 4 Loads and Seismic Action

4.1 Vertical Load

4.1.1 The deadweight load of tall building, the live load of floor (root) and the snow load of roof
shall be adopted according to the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Load Code
for the Des ign of Building Structures" GB 50009.

4.1.2 Where hoisting machinery or other construction equipment that may influence the structural
load-carrying such as wall attaching tower and c limbing tower are adopted during the construction,
the construction loads produced to the structure shall be determined accord ing to the specific conditions.

4.1.3 Revolving restaurant rail and deadweight of driving equipment shal l be determined according
to the actual situation.

4.1.4 The deadweight and applyi ng position of cleaning equipment such as w indow-cleaning
machine shall be determined according to the actual cond itions.

4.1.5 Live loads of helicopter platform shall adopt one of the follow ing loads w hich can make the
platform produce the maxi mum internal force:

1 Local load caused by the total we ight of helicopter shall be determined acco rding to the
standard val ue of local load determined by the actual maximum takeoff weight multiplying by the
dynamic coefficient. As for the helicopter with hydraulic pressure type undercarriage, the dynamic
coefficient may take 1.4; where there is no technical information of model, standard value of local
load and its action area may be adopted according to the hel icopter type from Table 4.1.5.

Tab le 4.1.5 Standa rd Val ue of Local Load and its Action Area

Helicopter type Standard value of local load (kN) Action area (m 2)

Light duty 20.0 0.20x0.20

Medium duty 40.0 0.25x0.25

Heavy duty 60.0 0.30x0.30

2 Equivalent uniformly-distributed live load is 5kN/m 2•

4.2 Wind Load

4.2.1 D uring the calculation of major structure, w ind load act ion area shall take the maximum
projected area vertical to the wi nd direction; standard val ue per unit area of w ind load vertical to the
building surface shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

Wk=f3-z1..1~JI zWo (4.2. 1)

Where wk-- Standard value of w ind load (kN/m2) ;

w0- - Basic wi nd pressure (kN/m2) , shall be adopted according to the requirements of

A11icle 4.2.2 of this specification ;

Pz--Variation coefficient of wind pressure height, shall be adopted according to the

28
 relevant requirements of the current national standard "Load Code for the Design of
Building Strnctures" GB 50009;

Jt 5- - Shape coefficient of wind load, shall be adopted according to the requirements of

Article 4.2.3 of this specification:

/J,--Wind fluttering coefficient at z height, shall be adopted according to the relevant

requirements of the current national standard "Load Code for the Design of Building
Structures" GB 50009.

4.2.2 Basic wind pressure shall be adopted according to the requirements of the current national
standard "Load Code for the Design of Building Structures" GB 50009. As for the tall building
sensitive to the wind load, wind load shall be adopted according to 1.1 times of the basic wind
pressure during the bearing capacity design.

4.2.3 Where the wind load effect of major structure is calculated, shape coefficient of wind load Ps
may be adopted according to the following requirements:

1 It shall take 0.8 for the round plane;

2 In the regular polygon and chamfering triangle plane building, it shall be calculated according
to the following Formula:

µ 5 = 0.8+1.2 /..Jn (4.2.3)

Where n--Side number of polygon.

3 It shall take 1.3 for the rectangular, square and cruciform plane buildings with height-width
ratio HIB not greater than 4;

4 It shall take 1.4 for the following buildings:

1) V-shaped, Y-shaped, camber, double crisscross and well-shaped plane buildings;

2) L-shaped and grooved-shaped buildings, and cruciform plane buildings with height-
width ratio HIB greater than 4;

3) Rectangular and drum plane buildings with height-width ratio HIB greater than 4 and
length-width ratio LIB not greater than 1.5.

5 In the situation where more meticulous wind load calculation shall be carried out, shape
coefficient of wind load may be adopted accord ing to Appendix B of th is specification, pr determined
by the wind tunnel test.

4.2.4 Where severai or clustered tall buildings are close to each other, interactive population effect
of wind force should be considered. Generally the shape coefficient Ps of s ingle building may be
multiplied by the enhancement coefficient of mutual interference, which may be determined by
reference to the test data of similar conditions, and should be determined thruogh wind tunnel test if
necessary.

4.2.5 As for the tall buildings with obvious crosswind vibration effect or torsion wind vibration
e ffect, the influence of crosswind v ibration or torsion w ind vibration shal l be considered. T he
calcu latio n scope and method of crosswind vibration or torsion wind vibration as well as the
29
combination method of downwind and crosswind effects shall meet the relevant requirements of the
current national standard "Load Code for the Design of Building Structures" GB 50009.

4.2.6 Where the influence of crosswind vibration or torsion wind vibration is considered, structural
downwind and crosswind lateral displacement shall respectively meet the requirements of Article
3.7 .3 of this specification.

4.2.7 Where the building height is greater than 200m, or the building has any one of the following
conditions, wind tunnel test should be carried out to determine the wi nd load of buildings :

1 Complex plane or vertical plane shape;

2 Vertical plane opening or connected building;

3 Complex surrounding topography and environment.

4.2.8 A s for the horizontal members such as cornice, rain cover, sunshad ing board and balcony,
where the partial floating upward wind loads are calculated, the shape coefficient of wind load µs
should not be less than 2.0.

4.2.9 Where the curtain wall construction of tall building is designed, the wind load shall be adopted
accord ing to the relevant requirements of the national current standard "Load Code for the Design of
Bu ilding Structu res" GB 50009, "Technical Code for Glass Curtain Wall Engineering" JGJ 102 and
"Technical Code for Metal and Stone Cmtain Walls Engineering" JGJ 133.

4.3 Seismic Action

4.3.1 T he seismic action of tall buildings of various seismic precautionary categories shall meet
the following requirements:

1 Category A building: shall be determined according to approved seismic safety evaluation

results and greater than the local seismic precautionary intensity requirements ;

2 Category B and Category C buildings: shall be calculated according to the local seismic
precautionary intensity.

4.3.2 Seismic action calculation of tall building structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 Typically, horizontal seismic action shall be calculated respectively at least along two
principal axis directions of the structure; as for the structure with oblique lateral-force-resisting
member, where the intersection a ngle is greater than 15°, the horizontal seismic action shall be
respectively calculated along each lateral-force-resisting member direction.

2 As for the structures having obvious asymmetric mass and rigidity distribution, the
torsion influence under the two-way horizontal seismic actions shall be calculated; for other
structures, the torsion influence under the one-way horizontal seismic actions shall be calculated.

3 Vertical seismic action shall be counted in for the seismic design of large-span, long-
cantilevered structure, Intensity 7 (O.l Sg) and Intensity 8 in tall buildings.

4 Vertical seismic action shall be calculated for the Intensity 9 seismic design.

4.3.3 The influence of occasional eccentrici ty shall be considered when calcu lating the one-way
30
seismic action. Deviant of each story of mass center along the direction ve1iical to the seismic action
may be adopted according to the following Formula:

e,=±0.05L, (4.3.3)

Where e, --Deviant of the / h story of mass center (m); the offset direction of each story of mass
center is the same;

L,--Total length of building on the zth story vertical to the seismic action direction (m).
4.3.4 Tall building structures shall respect ively adopt the following seismic action calculation
methods according to different conditions:

1 Mode-decomposition response spectrum method should be adopted for tall building structures;
mode-decomposition response spectrum method in consideration of tors ion coupling vibration influence
shall be adopted for the structures with unsymmetrical and uneven mass and rigidity, and tall building
structures greater than 1OOm high.

2 For structures, w hich are not higher than 40m, mainly have shear deformation and a rather
uniform distribution of mass and rigidity a long the height direction, base shear method may be
adopted .

3 As for the Intensity 7-9 seismic precautionary tall buildings, supplemental calculation under
the frequent earthquakes shall be carried out by elastic time-history analysis method under the
following conditions:

1) Category A tall building structure;

2) Category Band Category C tall building structures listed in Table 4.3.4;

3) Tall building structures failing to conform to the requirements of Articles 3.5.2-3.5.6 of

this specification;

4) Complex tall building structures specified in Chapter 10 of this specification.

Table 4.3.4 Tall Building Structures Adopting Time-history Analysis Method

Precautionary intensity and site category Building height scope

Intensity 8 Category I and II site and Intensity 7 >IOOm

Intensity 8 Category Ill and IV site >80111

Intensity 9 >60111

Note: Site categories shall be adopted according to the requirements of the current national standard "Code for .Seismic Design of
Buildings .. GB 50011.

4.3.5 Where the structural time-history analysis is carried out, the following requirements shall be
met:

1 T he actual earthquake records and the aiiificially simulated acceleration time-history curve
shal l be selected according to the building site category and the design earthquake group, thereinto, at
least 2/3 of earthquake records shall be provided, the average seismic influence coefficient curve of
several groups of time-history curves shall be in conformity w ith the seismic influence coefficient
curve adopted for mode-decomposition response spectrum method in the level of statistics. When
analyzing with elastic time history, the structure base shear force calculated with each time-history
31
curve shall not be less than 65% of the calculation result of mode-decomposition response spectrum
method, and the mean value of bottom shear force from several time-history curves shall not be less
than 80% of the calculation result of the response spectrum method.

2 Duration time of seismic wave should not be less than 5 times of basic natural vibration
period of building structure and 15 seconds; the time interval of se ismic wave may take 0.01 s or
0.02s.

3 The maximum value of input ea11hquake acceleration may be adopted according to Table
4.3 .5.

Table 4.3.5 Maximum Va lue of Input Earthquake Acceleration During the T ime-history Analysis (cm/s2)

Precautionary intensity Intensity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9

Frequent earthquake 18 35 (55 ) 70 (110) 140

Precautionary earthquake 50 100(150) 200 (300) 400

Rare earthquake 125 220 (3 10) 400 (510) 620

Note: The values in the brackets under Intensity 7 and 8 are respectively used for the zones where the design basic seismic
acceleration is 0. I 5g and 0.30g, g thereof is gravity acceleration.

4 Where three groups of time history curves are adopted for calculation, structural seismic
action effect should take the enveloping value of time-history method calculation results and the larger
value of mode-decomposition response spectrum method calculation results; where seven grou ps or
more time history curves are adopted for calcu lation, structural seismic action effect may take the
mean value of time-history method calculation results and the larger value of mode-decomposition
response spectrum method calculation results.

4.3.6 When the seismic action is calculated, the representative value of gravity load of building
structure shall take the sum of permanent load standard value and variable load combination value.
The combination value coefficient of variable loads shall be adopted according to the following
requ irements:

1 Snow load takes 0.5;

2 Live load of floor takes 1.0 when calculated according to the actual conditions; Jive loads of
library, file store and storehouse take 0.8 and live loads of general civil buildings take 0.5 when
calculated according to the uniformly-distributed equivalent live loads.

4.3.7 Seismic influence coefficient of building structure shall be determined according to the
intensity, site category, design earthquake groups, structural natural vibration period and damping
ratio. The maximum val ue of the horizontal seism ic influence coefficient a ax shall be adopted 111

according to those specified in Table 4.3.7-1 ; the characteristic period shall be adopted according to
those specified in Table 4.3.7-2 based on the site category and design earthquake groups; when the
rare seismic action is calculated, the characteristic period shall increase by 0.05s.

Note: For the tall building structures with period larger than 6.0s, the seismic influence coefficiem to be adopted shall be studied
especially.

4.3.8 The damping adjustment and the form parameters of the seismic influence coefficient curve
(F igure 4.3.8) of tall building structure shall meet the following requirements:

32
 1 Unless otherwise specified, the damping ratio of reinforced concrete tall building structure
shall take 0.05, the damping adjustment coefficient '72 shall take 1.0 and the form parameter shall meet
the following requirements:

Table 4.3.7-1 M ax imum Value of Horizontal Seismic Influence C oefficient am,.

Earthquake mfluence Intensity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9

Frequent earthquake 0.04 0.08 (0. 12) 0.16 (0.24) 0.32

Precautionary earthquake 0.12 0.23 (0.34) 0.45 (0.68) 0.90

Rare earthquake 0.28 0.50 (0.72) 0.90 (1.20) 1.40

Note: The values in the brackets under Intensity 7 and 8 are respectively used for the zones where the design basic seismic

acceleration is O. I 5g and 0.30g.

Table 4.3. 7-2 Chara cteristic Period Val ue Tg (s)

Site category Design earthquake group lo 11 II III IV

Group I 0.20 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65

Group II 0.25 0.30 0.40 0.55 0.75

Group III 0.30 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.90

a.=[77 ,0.2 -77 1(T-5 7~)]a,,."

1

1 T(s)

0 0 T, ST, 6.0

Figure 4.3.8 Seismic Influence Coefficient Curve

a- Seismic influence coefficient a,,L" -Ma>:i mmn value of seismic influence coefficient; T-Structural natural vibration period;

T8--Characteristic period; y-Damped exponential; t/ 1-Descending slope adj ustment coefficient oflinear descending section:

t/ 2-Damping adjustment coefficient

1) Linear ascending section, whose period is less than 0.1 s;

2) Horizontal section, whose period is from 0.1 s to characteristic period, where se1sm1c
influence coefficient shall take the maximum value (a111 ax);

3) Curvilinear descending section, whose period is from the characteristic period to 5 times
of the characteristic period, the damped exponential y shall take 0.9;

4) Linear descending section, whose period is from 5 times of the characteristic period to
6.0s, the adjustment coefficient 'I t for descending slope shall take 0.02.

2 If the damping ratio of building structure is not equal to 0.05 , section conditions of seismic
influence coefficient curve is the same as Item 1 of this A1iicle, the damping adjustment coefficient '72
and form parameter shall meet the fo llowing requirements :

1) The damped exponential of curvilinear descending section shall be detennined according

33
 to the following Formula:

o.o5-s
r =09. + --~ (4.3.8-1)
o.3+6s

Where y--The damped exponential of curvilinear descending section;

(--The damping ratio.

2) The adjustment coefficient for descending slope of linear descending section shall be
determined according to the following Formula:

= 0.02 + o.o5-s (4.3 .8-2)

r;, 4+32s

Where 77 1- - The adjustment coefficient for descending slope of linear descending section, which
shall take 0 if it is less than 0.

3) The damping adjustment coefficient shall be determined according to the following

Formula:

o.o5-s
r;J = 1+ - - - - - (4.3.8-3)
- o.08+1.6s

Where 172--The damping adjustment coefficient, which shall take 0.55if172 is less than 0.55 .

4.3.9 When the mode-decomposition response spectrum method is adopted, the structures without
regard to torsion coupling vibration effect shall be calculated for the seismic action and action effect
according to the following requirements:

1 The standard value of horizontal seismic action of the / 11 story w ith the / 1
vibration mode
shall be determined according to the fo llowing Formulae:

(4.3.9-1)

IXJIGI
YJ = 1
=
n
1
(i=l 2 ... n · 1·=1 2·.. m)
' ' ' ' '
(4.3 .9-2)
Ix},G,
i=I

Where G,--Representative value of gravity load of the /h story, which shall be determined
according to the requirements of Article 4.3 .6 of this specification;

F,,--Standard value of the horizontal seismic action of the /h story with the /" vibration
mode;

a1--The seismic influence coefficient corresponding to the natural vibration period of

the /h vibration mode, which shall be determined according to Articles 4.3.7 and
4.3 .8 of this specification;
34
 ~,--Hori zontal relative displacement of the i 1h story with the/' vibration mode;

y,- -Participation coefficient if the /11 vibration mode;

n--Total structural calcuiation stories; each story of bartizan should be used as a mass
point for the calculation;

m- -Structural calculation vibration mode number, which may take 3 for the regular
structures ; which may take 5~6 where the building is higher and the structure is
uneven along the vertical rigidity

2 Provided that the period ratio of adjacent vibration modes is less than 0.85, the horizontal
seismic action effects may be calculated according to the following Formula:

Ill

S= I s~ (4.3 .9-3)
j =I

Where S--The effect of the standard value of horizontal seismic action;

~--The effects of the standard value of horizontal seism ic action of the/ vibration mode
(including bending moment, shear force, axial force and displacement).

4.3.10 Where the planes and ve1tical irregular structures in consider of the torsion influence are
calculated by the torsion coupling modal decomposition method, each story may take three freedom
degree including two 01ihogonal horizontal displacement and one corner displacement, as well as the
se ismic action and action effect shall be calculated accord ing to the fo llowing requirements. If there is
basis, the seismic action may be determined by the simplified calculation method.

1 The standard value of horizontal seismic action of the i" story with the / hvibration mode
shall be determined according to the following Formulae:

(4.3 .10- 1)

Where FXJ,, Fyp, F t/1- -Standard values of seismic actions in the x direction, y direction and rotating
direction respectively of the /" story w ith the /' vibration mode;

J<i;, r;,--Horizontal relative displacement of mass centre of the i 1h story with the/
vibration mode respectively in the x and y directions;

rpJ1- -Re lative torsion angle of the/" story with the/ vibration mode;

r ,- - Radius of rotation of the i 1h story, which may be the square root of the rotation
inertia around the mass center of the /h story divided by the mass of this
story;

a, - -Seism ic influence coefficient corresponding to the natural vibration period

I'j of the l' vibration mode, wh ich shall be determined according to Articles
4.3.7 and 4.3.8 of this specification;
35
 Y1J- -Pa11icipation coefficient of the/' vibration mode considering the torsion
effect, which may be determined according to Formula (4.3.10-2)~(4.3.10-4)
of this specification;

n--Total structural calculation mass point number; each story of bartizan should
be used as a mass point for the calculation;

m--Structural calculation vibration mode number; typically, it may take 9~ 15 ;

the vibration mode number of each tower in the multi-tower structure with
a common podium should not be less than 9.

When only the seismic action in x direction is considered:

n n

y lj = "'L..,
°"' X JI G.[ I "'°"'
L.., (X2JI + y2
JI
+ rp.Jl2 r l 2 )G
I (4.3.10-2)
I= ! I=!

When only the seismic action in y direction is considered:

n n
2 2 2 2
y1j = 'L.., X ji G"[ l "°"'
L.., (X j i + YJI + rp j ir, )G I (4.3. 10-3)
I =! I=!

When the seismic action whose included angle with x direction is ()is considered:

(4.3.10-4)

Where y,1, yy1--Vibration mode pat1icipation coefficients calculated according to Fonnula (4.3.10-2)
and Formula (4.3.10-3) respectively.

2 Under the one-way horizontal seismic action, seismic action effect in consideration of torsion
coupling shall be determined according to the following Formulae:

m m
s = IIP1ksjsk (4.3.10-5)
J= I k=I

(4.3 .10-6)

Where S--Effect of the standard value of seismic action in consideration oftorsiqn;

~' Sk--Effects of the standard values of the seismic action with the /1' and k
1
h vibration modes
respectively;

p1k-Cou p1ing coefficient of the/' and k111 vibration modes;

),~Natural vibration period ratio of the k1h vibration mode to the the /11 vi bration mode;

'1, (k-- Damping ratio of of the/' and k 1

" vibration modes respectively.

3 Torsion seismic action effect under the two-way horizontal seismic actions, which shall be
determined according to the larger value in the following Formulae:
36
 (4.3 .10-7)

Or (4.3.10-8)

Where Sx--Seismic action effect only in considertion of the horizontal seismic action m x
direction, which shall be calculated according to Formula (4.3 .10-5);

Sy--Seismic action effect only in conside11ion of the horizontal seismic action m y

direction, which shall be calculated according to Formula (4.3 .10-5).

4.3.11 Where the structural horizontal seismic action is calculated by the base shear method, it may
be implemented according to Appendix C of this specification.

4.3.12 During the horizontal seismic action calculation for the frequent earthquake, the shear
force of each story corresponding to the standard value of seismic action shall meet the
requirements of the following Formula:

II

VEid ~ 2IGj (4.3.12)

j =i

Where VEk --Shear force of the /h story corresponding to the standard value of horizontal
1

seismic action;

}.-Shear coefficient of horizontal earthquake, which shall not be less than the
values specified in Table 4.3.12 and shall multiply by an enhancement coefficient
of 1.15 for the weak stories of vertical irregular structures;

G;--Representative value of gravity load on the /h story;

n-- Total structural calculation story numbers.

Table 4.3.12 Minimum Seismic Shear force Coefficient Value of a Story

Category Intensity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9

Structures with obvious torsion effect or

0.008 0.016 (0.024) 0.032 (O.o48) 0.064
fundamental period less than 3.Ss

Structures with fundamental period greater

0.006 0.012 (0.018) 0.024 (0.036) 0.048
than 5.0s

Note: 1 For the structures with fundamental period between 3.Ss and Ss, interpolation method shall be available;

2 The values in the brackets under Intensity 7 a nd 8 are respectively used for the zones where the design basic seismic

acceleration is O.ISg and 0.30g.

4.3.13 Standard values of the structural ve11ical seismic action may be calculated by time-history
analysis method or modal decomposition response spectrum method, or calculated according to the
following requirements (Figure 4.3.13):

1 Standard value of the total vertical seismic action of a structure may be calculated according
to the follow ing Formulae:

(4.3.13-1 )
37
 (4.3.13-2)

GVJnax=0.65amax (4.3.13-3)

Where F Evk--Standard value of the total ve1tical seismic action of a structure;

aV1Tlax- - Maximum value of the structural vertical seismic influence coefficient;

G.q--Representative value for equivalent total gravity load of structures;

GE--When the vertical seismic action is calculated, the representative value of total
structural gravity load shall take the sum of representative values of gravity load
on each mass point.

2 Standard value of ve1tical seismic action of structural mass point may be calculated
according to following Formula:

(4.3 .1 3-4)

Where Fv1- - Standard value of vertical seismic action of mass point i;

G;, G1--Representative values of the gravity loads respective ly concentrated on the mass
points i andj, which shall be calculated according to Altic le 4.3.6 of this specification;

H,, ~--Calculated height of mass po ints i andj respectively.

3 Vertical seismic action effect of each story member may be distributed according to the
gravity load representative value proportion on each member, and should multi ply by the enhancement
coefficient 1.5.

(j I1:.,

C,

77T
F igure 4.3.13 Structural Vertical Seismic Action Calculation Sketch

4.3.14 As for the floor structure with span greater than 24m, transfer structure and towers linked
w ith connective structure (s) w ith span greater than 12m, and cantilever structure with cantilevered
length greater than Sm. the standard values of structural vertical seismic action effect hereof should be
calculated by time-history analysis method or modal decomposition response spectrum method.
During the time-hi story analysis calculation, the maximum value of input earthquake acceleration
may be adopted according to 65% of the maximum val ue of specified horizontal input; in the response
spectrum analysis, the maximum value of structural ve1tical seismic influence coefficient may be
adopted according to 65% of the maximum value of horizontal seismic influence coefficient, but the
38
design earthquake group may be adopted according to Group I.

4.3.15 ln tall buildings, standard values of vertical seismic action of long span structure, cantilever
structure, transfer structure and towers linked w ith connective structure sh.o uld not be less than the
value of representative value of gravity load on structure or member multiplied by the vertical seismic
action coefficient specified in Table 4.3.15.

Table 4.3.15 Vertical Seismic Action Coefficient

Precautionary intensit} Intensity 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9

Design basic seismic acceleration 0.15g 0.20g 0.30g 0 .40g

Vertical seismic action coefficient 0 .08 0.10 0.15 0.20

Note: g is gravity acceleration.

4.3.16 Structural natural vibration period adopted for calculating the seismic influence
coefficient of each vibration mode shall be reduced in consideration of the rigidity influence of
non bearing wall.

4.3.17 Where the nonbearing wall is masonry wall, the natural vibration period calculation reduction
coefficient of tall building structure may be adopted according to the following requirements:

1 It may take 0.6-0.7 for the frame structure;

2 It may take 0.7- 0.8 for the frame-shearwall structure;

3 It may take 0.8-0.9 for the frame-corewall structure;

4 It may take 0.8-1.0 for the shearwall structure.

As for other structural systems or other nonbearing walls, period reduction coefficient may be
determined according to the project conditions.

39
 5 Structural Analysis

5.1 General Requirement

5.1.1 Load and seismic action of tall building structure shall be calculated according to the relevant
requirements of Chapter 4 of this specification.

5.1.2 The computational analysis for the tall buildings of complex structure and composite structure
shall not only meet the requirements of this chapter, but also meet the relevant requirements of
Chapter I 0 and Chapter 11 of this specification.

5.1.3 Deformation and internal force of tall building structure may be calculated by the elastic
method. As for such mem bers as frame beam and connection beam, the internal force redistribution
caused by plastic deformation may be considered.

5.1.4 Analysis model of tall bui lding structure sha ll be determined according to the structural actual
conditions. The analysis models selected shall be able to accurately reflect the actual stress conditions
of each member in the structure.

In the analysis for the tall building structures, such calculation models may be adopted as space
cooperation of plane structure, space frame structure, space frame-thin wall frame structure, space
frame-wall board element and finite element of other combination.

5.1.5 Duri ng the internal force and displacement calculation for the tall bui ldings, it may be
assumed that the floor slab has infinite rigid ity in its own plane, and corresponding measures shall be
taken during the design to ensure the integral rigidity in the slab p lane.

Where the floor slab may produce obvious in-plane deformation, the in-plane deformation
influence of floor slab shall be considered in the calculation, or the calculation results shall be
adjusted properly for the floor slab adopting in-plane infinite rigidity assum ption calculation method.

5.1.6 Where the computational analysis is carried out for the tall building structure according to the
spacial integral work, the fo llowing deformation shall be considered:

1 Bending, shearing and torsional deformation of beam, axial deformation if necessary;

2 Bend ing, shearing, axial deformation and torsional deformation of column;

3 Bending, shearing, axial deformation and tors ional deformation of wall.

5.1. 7 Gravity load, wind load and (or) seismic action effect analysis shall be carried out for the tall
building structures according to the actual conditions; load effect and action effect shall be calculated
according to the requirements of Section 5 .6 of this specification.

5.1.8 During the internal force calculation for the tall building structure, where the live load of floor
is greater than 4kN/n/, structural internal force increase caused by the adverse layout for live load of
floor shall be considered; where the adverse layout for live load of floor is not considered in the
integral calculation, calculated bend ing moment of floor beam shall be increased properly.

5.1.9 During the gravity load action effect analysis for the tall build ing structure, proper calculation
models should be adopted in consideration of the influence during the construction process for the
40
axial defomrntion of such members as column, wall and diagonal bracing; the influence of construction
process shall be considered for the complex ta ll buildings and other tall building structures with
bu ilding height greater than l 50m.

5.1.10 During the wind action effect calculation for the tall building structures, wind action effects
on the positive and negative directions should be adopted according to the larger val ues calculated
along two direction; as for the tall buildings with complex shapes, the adverse effect of wind angle.
shall be considered.

5.1.11 During the calculation for the structural integral internal force and displacement, section steel
concrete and steel pipe concrete members should directly participate in the calculation according to
the actual conditions, and in the section design according to the relevant requirements of Chapter 11
of this specification.

5.1. 12 As for the tall bu ilding structures of complex shape and structural layout or in Grade B height,
111tegral calculation shall be carried out by at least two different mechanical model structural analysis
software.

5.1.13 During the seismic design, tall building structure in Grade B height, composite structure and
complex tall building structure specified in Chapter 10 of this specification sha ll also meet the
fo llowing requirements:

1 The torsion effect of torsion coupling calculation structure should be considered and the
vibration mode number shall not be less than 15 ; vibration mode number of multi-tower structure with
a com mon podium shall not be less tha n 9 times of the tower number; calcu lation vibration mode
number shall make the participating mass of each vibration mode not less than 90% of the total mass;

2 Supplemental calculation shall be carried out by elastic time-history ana lysis method;

3 Supplemental calculation should be carried out by elasto-plastic static force or dynamic

analysis method.

5.1.14 Multi-tower structure with a common podium should be respectively calculated according to
the integral model and separate model, and structure design shall be carried out by the adverse results.
Where the podiums around the towe r are greater than two spans, separate tower model should be
attached at least two spans of podium structure.

5.1.15 As for the structural member of complex load carrying, the reinforcement design should be
checked according to the stress analysis results.

5.1.16 The calculation results of structural analysis software shall be can-ied out analytic;al judgement,
and may be used as the project design basis after approved reasonable and effective.

5.2 Analysis Parameters

5.2.1 During the calculation for the seism ic action effect of tall building structure, rigid ity of
shearwall connection beam may be reduced and the reduction coefficient should not be less than 0.5.

5.2.2 During the calcu lation for the structural internal force and d isplacement, the beam rigidity
shall be increased in consideration of the flange action in the cast-in-place floor and assembled
monolithic floor. In the approximate consideration, enhancement coefficient of floor beam rigidity
41
may take 1.3-2.0 according to the flange conditions.

As for the assembly floor without cast-in-place surface course, the increase of fl oor beam rigidity
should not be considered.

5.2.3 Under the action of vertical load, amplitude modulation may be carried by the negative
moment of plastic deformation internal force redistribution at the end of frame beam on the beam end
multiplying by the amplitude modulation coefficient in accordance with the followi ng requirements:

1 Amplitude modulation coefficient of negative moment at the end of assembled integral frame
beam may take 0.7-0.8; amplitude modulation coefficient of negative moment at the end of cast-in-
place frame beam may take 0.8-0.9;

2 After the amplitude modulation of negative moment at the end of frame beam, beam midspan
bending moment shall be increased correspondingly according to the equilibrium conditions;

3 Bending moment of frame beam under the action of ve1tical loads shall be carried out
amplitude modulation, and then combined with the bending moment of frame beam produced by the
horizontal action;

4 During the section design, the design value of positive bending moment of the frame beam
mid-span section shall not be less than 50% of the design value of mid-span bending moment under
the action of vertical load calculated according to the simple-supported beam.

5.2.4 During the torsion calcu lation for the floor beam of tall building structure, the restraint action
of cast-i n-place floor tO the beam shall be considered. Where the restraint action of cast-in-place floor
to the beam torsion is not considered during the calculation, the calculation torque of beam may be
reduced. The reduction coefficiem of beam torque shall be determined according to the restraint
conditions of the floors around the beam.

5.3 Analysis Modeling

5.3.1 In the analytical calculation for the tall building structures, mechanical simplification treaanem
should be carried out for the structures, so as to reflect the structural mechanical performance and
adapt to the mechanical model of selected computational analysis software.

5.3.2 Eccentricity between floor beam and ve rtical member or between upper and lower vertical
members should be counted in the structural integral calcultion accordi ng to the actual cond itions.
Where the above-mentioned eccentricity is not considered in the structural integral calculation, it shall
be approximately considered by attaching bending moment at the column and wall end.

5.3.3 In the structural integral calculation, multi-ribbed plate floor should be calculated accord ing to
the actual conditions. Where calculation according to the actual conditions is not available, multi-
ribbed beam shall be simplified properly according to the equal rigidity principle and then calculated.

As for the slab beamless floor, the outer-plane rigidity influence of slab shall be considered
during the calculation, the rigidity thereof may be calculated according to the finite element method or
by approximately transforming the column strip to the frame beam.

5.3.4 During the structural integral calculation, the rigid zone (Figure 5.3.4) influence in the frame/
wall frame beam/column node zone should be considered: sectiona l bending moment at the beam end

42
may take the calculated value of bending moment in the end section of rigid zone. Length of rigid
zone may be calculated according to the following Formula:

Figure 5.3.4 Rigid Zone

(5.3 .4- 1)

(5.3.4-2)

(5.3.4-3)

(5 .3 .4-4)

Where the length of calculated rigid zone is negative, it shall take zero.

5.3.5 During the structural integral calculation, transfer story structure, story with outriggers and/or
belt members, towers linked wi th connective structure, ve1tical setback structure (including multi-
tower structure with a common podium) shall be analyzed w ith appropriate calculation models. Where
si mplified treatment is carried out for the transfer story, story with outriggers and/or belt members and
connector during the integral calculation, more meticulous supplemental computational analysis
should be carried out for their partial positions.

5.3.6 The shearwall structure of complex plane and vertical plane shall be analyzed by appropriate
calculation models. Where finite element model is adopted, units shal l be selected and classified
reasonably at the variable positions of section; where the frame model is adopted for the calculation,
proper modelization treatment may be taken for the wall w ith split-level hole and folded wall with
split-level hole, and more meticulous supplemental computational analysis shall be carried out for the
structural pa1tial positions on the basis of integral calculation.

5.3.7 During the integral calculation for the tall building structures, where the roof deck of basement
is used as the build-in position of the superstructure, the lateral rigidity ratio of first underground story
to the ground floor should not be less than 2.

5.4 Second-Order Effects and Structural Stability

5.4.1 Where the tall building structure meet the following requirements, the adverse effect of gravity
second-order effect may not be considered during the elastic computational analysis.

1 Shearwall structure, frame-shearwall structure, slab column shearwall structure and tube
structure:

II

EJd ~2.7H LG,

2
(5.4.1-1)
i=l

43
 2 Frame structure:

II

D, ;::: 20LG , I h, (i=l, 2, ... , n) (5.4.1-2)

/=I

Where Efct- - Elastic equivalent lateral stiffness of structure on one principal axis direction; the
structural lateral stiffness may be converted to the equivalent lateral stiffness of
vertical cantilever flexural member according to the principle of equal structural
top displacement under the action of inverted triangle distributed load;

H--Building height;

G,, G1--Design values o gravity loads on the/h and/" stories respectively, which shall take
the combination value of 1.2 times of permanent load standard value and 1.4 times
of floor variable load standard value;

h,--Story height of the / " story;

D,- -Elastic equivalent lateral stiffness of the i 1" story, which may take the ratio of the
shear force on thi s story to the inter-story displacement;

n- -Total structural calculation story numbers.

5.4.2 Where the tall building structure does not meet the requirements of Atticle 5.4.1 of this
specification, the adverse effect of gravity second-order effect to the structural internal force and
displacement under the action of horizontal force shall be considered during the calculation for the
structural elasticity.

5.4.3 Gravity second-order effect of tall bui lding structure may be calculated by the finite element
method, or approximately considered by the calculation result without regard to the gravity second-
order effect multiplying by the enhancement coefficient. During the approximate consideration,
structural displacement enhancement coefficient Fi/F1, and structural member bending moment and
shear force enhancement coefficient F2/F2, may be respectively calculated according to the following
requirements; displacement calculation results shall meet the requirements of Atticle 3.7.3 of this
specification.

As for the frame structure, they may be calculated according to the following Fonnulae:

F;, = II (i=l, 2; •• , n) (5 .4.3- 1)

1- IGJ/(D,h;)
)=I

Fi, = ___ 1 II_ _ _ __

(i=l 2 · · · n) (5.4.3-2)
' ' '
1-2Ia1 l(Dihi )
/ =I

As for the shearwall structure, frame-shearwall structure and tube structure, they may be
calcu lated according to the following Formulae:

44
 F; = n (5.4.3-3)
1-0. 14H 2
I G; l(EJd)
1= ]

F2 =---------- 11
(5.4.3-4)
1-o.2sH 2 l(EJd) I G;
i=l

5.4.4 Integral stability of tall building structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 Sheanvall structure, frame-sheanvall structure and tube structure shall meet the req-
uirements of the following Formula:

n
EJd;::: l.4H
2
IG,
l= l
(5.4.4-1)

2 Frame structure shall meet the requirements of the following Formula:

n
D; ;:::ioI G1 1h, (i=l , 2, .. ·, n) (5.4.4-2)
/ =I

5.5 Elasto-Plastic Analysis and Check of Story Drift of Weak and/or Soft Stories

5.5.1 Where the elasto-plastic computational analysis is carried out for the concrete structures of tall
building, static or dynamic force time-history analysis method may be adopted according to the actual
project conditions in accordance with the following requirements:

1 Where performance-based seismic design of structure is adopted, the structural se1sm1c

performance objective shall be predetermined according to the relevant requirements of Article 3. 11
of this specification;

2 Structural members such as beam, column, diagonal bracing, shearwall and floor slab shall
adopt appropriate simplified model according to the actual conditions and analytic precision requirements;

3 Geometric dimension of member, reinforcement and section steel of the concrete members as
well as the steel members of composite structure shall participate in the calculation according to the
actual conditions;

4 Mechanical performance index and constitutive relation shall be reasonably selected for the
reinforcement, steels and concrete materials according to the predetermined seismic performance
objectives of structure. The constitutive relation of reinforcement and concrete materials may be
adopted according to the relevant requirements of the current national standard " Code for Design of
Concrete Structures" GB 500 I O;

5 Geometrical non linearity influence shall be considered;

6 During the dynamic elasto-plastic calculation, the acceleration time history of ground motion,
peak acceleration values for rare seismic action estimation, as well as the calculation results shall be
45
selected according to the requirements of Article 4.3 .5 of this specification;

7 The rationality of calculation results shall be analyzed and judged.

5.5.2 Under the action of estimated rare ea1thquake, elasto-plastic deformation calculation at the
weak story (part) of tall building structure may adopt the following methods:

1 The frame structure not greater than 12 stories and without mutant lateral rigidity may adopt
the simplified calculation method specified in Article 5.5.3 of this specification;

2 Building structures other than those specified in Item 1 all may adopt the elasto-plastic static
or dynamic force analysis method.

5.5.3 The simplified calculation for the elasto-plastic inter-story displacement of structure at the
weak story (part) should meet the following requirements:

1 Structural weak story (part) position may be determined according to the following conditions:

1) As for the structure with story yield strength coefficient uniformly distributed along the
height, the bottom story may be adopted;

2) As for the structures with story yield strength coefficient unevenly distributed along the
height, the story (part) with minimum/relatively small yield strength coefficient may be
taken, generally not greater than 2-3 positions.

2 Elasto-plastic inter-story displacement may be calculated according to the following Formulae:

(5.5.3- 1)

Or (5 .5.3-2)

Where !).up- -Elasto-plastic inter-story displacement (mm);

!).uy--lnter-story yield displacement (mm);

µ- -Ductility coefficient of story;

/).ue - -Inter-story d isp lacement according to the elastic analysis under the rare seismic
action (m m). During the calculation, the maximum value of horizontal seismic
infl uence coefficient shall be adopted according to those specified in Table 4.3.7- 1
of this specification;

l]p-- Elasto-plastic displacement enhancement coefficient, which may be adopted

according to Table 5 .5 .3 if the yield strength coefficient at the weak story (pait) is
not less than 0.8 of the mean value of this coefficient at its adjacent story (pa1t);
may be adopted according to 1.5 times of the corresponding values listed in the
table if this yield strength coefficient is not greater than 0.5 of the above-mentioned
mean value; may be adopted according to the interpolation method as for other
conditions;

( y- -Yield strength coefficient of story.

46
 Table 5.5.3 Structural Elasto-plastic Displacement Enhancement Coefficient 1/p

0.5 0.4 0.3

l/ p 1.8 2.0 2.2

5.6 Effects of Combinations of Loads and/or Seismic Actions

5.6.1 Under the durable design conditions and temporary design conditions, where the loads
and load effect are considered according to the linear relationship, the design effect of load
fundamental combination effect shall be determined according to the following Formula:

(S.6.1)

Where Sd- -Design value of load combination effect;

}'c--Partial coefficient of the permanent load;

}'Q--Partial coefficient of the floor live load;

Yw--Partial coefficient of the wind load ;

}'L- -Load adjustment coefficient in consideration of structure design service life,

which shall take 1.0 if the design life is 50 years and take 1.1 if the design life is
100 years;

Sck--Standard value of permanent load effect;

SQk----Standard value of floor live load effect;

Swk--Standard value of wind load effect;

lf/Q, lf/w- -Respectively combination value coefficient of floor live load and combination
value coefficient of wind load, which shall respectively take 0. 7 and 0.0 where
the permanent load effect performs the control action; shall respectively take
1.0 and 0.6 or 0.7 and 1.0 where the variable load effect performs the control
action.

Note: In the stack room, file store, storeroom, ventilation room and elevator machine room, the floor live load combination

value coefficient shall take 0.9 on the situation where it s hall take 0.7.

5.6.2 Under the durable design conditions and temporary design conditions, the partial coefficients
of load fundamental combination shall be adopted according to the following requirements:

1 Partial coefficients Ye of permanent load: where its effects are adverse to the structural
bearing capacity, it shall take 1.2 for the combination controlled by the variable load effect, and
take 1.35 for the combination controlled by the permanent load effect; where its effects are
favorable to the structural bearing capacity, it shall take 1.0.

2 Partial coefficients }'Q of floor live load: shall take 1.4 generally.

3 Partial coefficients Yw of wind load shall take 1.4.

5.6.3 Under the seismic design conditions, where the action and action effect are considered
according to the linear relationship, the design values of load and seismic action fundamental
47
combination effect shall be determined according to the following Formula:

(5.6.3)

Where Sd--Design value of load and seismic action combination effect;

ScE-- Effect of gravity load representative value;

SEhk-- Effect of the standard value of horizontal seismic action, which shall also
multiply by the corresponding enhancement coefficient or adjustment coefficient;

SE"k--Effect of the standard value of vertical seismic action, which shall also multiply
by the corresponding enhancement coefficient or adjustment coefficient;

}'c--Partial coefficient of gravity load ;

Yw--Partial coefficient of wind load;

YEh--Partial coefficient of the horizontal seismic action;

)'Ev- -Partial coefficient of the vertical seismic action;

l/fw--Combination value coefficient of wind load, which shall take 0.2.

5.6.4 Under the seismic design conditions, partial coefficients of load and seismic action
fundamental combination shall be adopted according to Table 5.6.4. Where the gravity load
effects are favorable to the structural bearing capacity, Ye in Table 5.6.4 shall not be greater
than 1.0.

Table 5.6.4 Partial C oefficients of Loads and Actions Under the Seismic Design Co ndition s

Loads a nd actions participating

7G 7£h 7t • 7., Discription
in t he combination

Gravity load and horizontal

1.2 1.3 - - All shall be considered for the tall building structure of seismic design
seismic action

Shall be considered du ri ng the Intensity 9 seismic design; shall be

Gravity load a nd vertical
1.2 - 1.3 - considered for the Intensity 7 (0.15g), Intensity 8 and Intensity 9 seismic
seismic action
desig n of horizontal long cantilever and long span structure

Gravity load, horizontal Shall be considered during the Intensity 9 seismic design: shall be

earthquake and vertical 1.2 1.3 0.5 - considered for the Intensity 7 (0.15g). Intensity 8 and Intensity 9 seismic

seismic action design of horizontal long cantilever a nd long span structure

Gravity load. horizontal seismic

1.2 1.3 - 1A Shall be considered for the tall building above 60m
ac tion and wind load

Shall be considered for t he tall building above 60rn during t he

Intensity 9 seismic design; shall be considered for the Intensity 7 (0.ISg),

Gravity load, horizontal seis mic 1.2 1.3 0.5 IA
Intensity 8 a nd Intensity 9 seismic design of horizontal long cantilever
action, vertical seismic action
and long span stru cture
a nd wind load
Shall be co nsidered for the Intensity 7 (0.15g), Intensity 8 and Intensity 9
1.2 0.5 1.3 1A
seismic d esign of horizontal long cantilever and long span structure

:\ote: I g is gravity acceleration;

2 "-" represents that this load or action effect is not considered in the combination.

48
5.6.5 During the non-seismic design, effect calculation of load combination shall be carried out
according to the requirements of A1ticle 5.6.1 of this specification. During the seismic design, the
effect calculation of load and seismic action combination shall be carried out according to the
requirements of Article 5 .6.1 and Article 5 .6.3 of this specification; design value .of combined internal
force calculated according to Article 5 .6.3 of this specification shall also be adjusted according to the
relevant requirements of this specification.

49
 6 Design of Frame Structure

6.1 General Requirement

6.1.1 Frame structure shall be designed to the two-way beam & column lateral resistant system.
Major structure shall not adopt hinged connection except individual positions.

6.1.2 Frame structure of seismic design shall not adopt single span frame.

6.1.3 Filler wall and partition wall of frame structure should adopt light-weight wall. During the
seismic design, the layo ut of frame structure, if adopting masonry filler wall, shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Avoiding forming excessive upper and lower rigidity variation;

2 Avoiding forming short column;

3 Reducing the structural torsion cause by lateral rigidity eccentricity.

6.1.4 During the seismic des ign, staircase of frame structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 Staircase layout shall reduce the structural plane irregularly caused by it.

2 Cast-in-place reinforced concrete stairs shou ld be adopted, and the stair structure shall have
sufficient collapse-resistant capacity.

3 Measures shall be adopted to reduce the influence of stairs to the major structure.

4 Where the reinforced concrete stairs are connected w ith the integral major structure, the
influence of stairs to the seismic action and its effect shall be considered, and seismic capacity
checking shall be carried out for the stair members.

6.1.5 During the seismic design, masonry filler wall and paitition wall shall have self-stab ility and
shall meet the following requi rements:

1 Mo1tar strength grade of masonry shall not be less than MS; when bricks and concrete blocks
are adopted, the strength grade of masonry blocks shall not be less than MUS; when the light-weight
masonry blocks are adopted, the strength grade of masonry blocks shall not be less than MU2.5. Wall
crown shall be tightly connected with the frame beam or floor slab.

2 Two tie bars of 6mm diameter shall be installed on the masonry filler wall about every other
SOOmm along the total frame column height: and the tie bar should penetrate along the full length of
the wall in Intensity 6, and shall penetrate along the full length of the wall in Intensity 7, 8 and 9.

3 Where the wall length is greater than Sm, the wall crown and the beam (slab) should be tied
with reinforcement; where the wall length is greater than 8m or is 2 times of the story height, reinforced
concrete construction column should be installed in not greater than 4m spacing; where the wall
height exceeds 4m, horizontal reinforced concrete tie beam connected with column and penetrating
along full length of the wall should be installed at the half height of wall (door opening outer skin).

4 Where masonry filler walls are adopted in the staircase, re inforced concrete construction
columns with spacing not greater than the story height and 4m shall be a rranged and strengthened by

50
steel mesh mortar surface course.

6.1.6 Where the frame structure is designed according to the seismic requirements, mixed type
of masonry wall bearing shall not be adopted. As for the building, elevator room, elevator
machine room partly protruding the roof, staircase and water tank room in the frame structure,
frame bearing shall be adopted instead of masonry wall bearing.

~f "·
-1 I'--~~

-r
b, x
I l h,. l l
1 1 l 1

Figure 6.1.7 Horizontal Ha unched Beam

I-Horizontal haunch of beam

6.1.7 Frame beam should superpose with the center line of column . Where the center lines of beam
& column do not superpose, the adverse effect of eccentricity to the load carrying and construction in
the beam-column node core zone shall be considered in the calculation, so shall the eccentricity effect
of beam load to the column .

Eccentricity between center-lines of beam and column shall not be greater than 114 of the width
of column section in this direction during Intens ity 9 se ismic design; it should not be greater than 1/4
of the width of column section in this direction during the non-seism ic design and Intensity 6-8
se ismic design; if the eccentricity is greater than 114 of the column w idth in this direction, measures
such as adding the horizontal haunch of beam (Figure 6.1.7) may be adopted. After arranging the
horizontal haunch, the adverse effect of beam & column eccentricity must be considered.

1 Horizontal haunch thickness of beam may take the beam section height, and its horizontal
dimension should meet the foll owing requirements:

(6.1.7- 1)

(6.1.7-2)

(6.1.7-3)

Where bx- - Horizontal haunch width of beam (mm);

lx--Horizontal haunch length of beam (mm);

bb --Width of beam section (mm);

bc---Co lumn section w idth along the eccentric direction (mm);

x - -Distance from the side beam side without haunch to the column s ide (mm).

2 Where beam adopts horizontal haunch, effective width b1 of frame node should meet the
requirements of the following Formula:
51
 1) When x=O, b1 shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

(6 .1. 7-4)

2) When xjO. b1 shall take the larger value of (6.1.7-5) and (6.1.7-6) and shall meet the
requirements of Formula (6.1.7-7):

(6.1.7-5)

(6.1.7-6)

(6.1.7-7)

Where hc--Column section height (mm).

6.1.8 The secondary beams not connected with the frame column may be designed accordi ng to the
non-seismic requirements.

6.2 Strength Design

6.2.1 During the seismic design, the design values of column end bending moment in consideration
of seismic action combination at the frame beam and column node, except those with less than 0.15
top story and axial compression ratio of column or the frame-supported beam column node, shall meet
the following requirements:

1 Grade I frame structure and frame at Intensity 9:

(6.2.1 - 1)

2 Other conditions:

(6.2.1 -2)

Where l,Mc--The sum of design values of the combined clockwise or counterclockwise bending
moment on the upper and lower column end sections at one node; the design value
of the bending moment at the upper and lower column end may be distributed
according to the bending moment proportion for elastic analysis;

l,Mb--The sum of design values of the combined clockw ise or counterclockwise bending
moment on the left and right column end sections at o ne node; if the beam ends on
right and left sides of the node are negative moment 111 se1sm1c Grade I, the
bending moment of smaller absolute value shall take O;

l,Mbua--The sum of counterclockwise or clockwise bending moment values on the sections

of beam ends on right and left sides of a node, corresponding to the actual seismic
bending capacity of normal section, which may be calculated accordi ng to the
actual reinforcement area (including the floor slab reinforcement within the scope
of compression reinforcement and beam effective flange w idth) and the standard
value of material strength, w ith the seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing
capacity;

'7c- -Enhancement coefficient of column end bending moment; as for the frame
structures of Grade II and III, the enhancement coefficient take 1.5 and 1.3

52
 respectively; as for the frames in other types of structures, it may take 1.4, 1.2, 1.1
and 11.1 for Grade I, II, JlI and IV respectively.

6.2.2 During the seismic design. the design value of section bending moment at the column bottom
in the bottom story in Grade I, II and Ill frame structures shall respectively adopt the product of
bend ing moment values in consideration of seismic action comb ination and enhancement coefficient
1.7, 1.5 and 1.3 . Longitudinal reinforcement of frame column on the bottom story shall be arranged
according to the adverse conditions of upper and lower ends.

6.2.3 Design value of shear force on the end section of frame column and frame-suppo1ted column
during the seismic design shall be calculated accordi ng to the fo llowing Formula in Grade I, II, III and
IV:

1 Grade I frame structure and frame at Intensity 9:

(6.2.3-1 )

2 Other conditions:

(6.2.3-2)

Whe re M~, M:--Design val ues of bending moments of clockwise or counterclockwise section
combination on the upper and lower column ends respectively, which shall
meet the req uirements of Articles 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 in this spec ification;

M~ 0., M !,. - - Respectively the bending moment values corresponding to the actual seismic
bend bearing capacity of nonnal section in the clockwise or counterclockwise
direction at the upper and lower ends of column respectively, wh ich may be
calculated according to the actual reinforcement area, the standard value of
material strength and the design value of axial compress ive force produced by
the representative value of gravity load, in consideration of seismic adjustment
coefficient of bearing capacity;

H 0 - - Clear height of column;

1/vc--The en hancement coefficient for shear fo rce of column e nd; as for the frame
structures of Grade If and III, the e nhanceme nt coefficient may take 1.3 and
1.2; as fo r the frames in other types of structures, it may take I A for Grade I,
1.2 for Grade II and I .1 for Grade III and IV.

6.2.4 During the seismic design, bearing capacity design of normal section shall be carried out for
the frame corner column according to the two-way eccentric tension members. As fo r the Grade I, II,
III and IV frame corner co lumns, the design val ues of bending moment and shear force adj usted
according to A1ticles 6.2.1 - 6.2.3 of this specification shall multiply by an enhancement coefficient
not less than 1. 1.

6.2.5 During the seismic des ign, the design value of shear force of section com bination at the end of
frame beam shall be calculated according to the fo llowing Formula for Grade I, II and III; it may
directly take the calculated value of shear force in considertion of seismic action combination for
53
Grade IV.

1 Grade I frame structure and frame at Intensity 9 :

( 6.2.5 -1 )

2 Other conditions:

(6 .2.5-2)

Where 1\1~, M~ --Design values of bending moment of counterclockwise or clockwise section

combination on the right and left sides of the beam respectively. If the beam
ends on right and left sides of the beam are negative moment in seismic Grade
I. the bending moment on the end w ith smaller absolute value shall take O;

M~ua, M~ua --Bending moment values corresponding to the seismic bend bearing capacity of
normal section arranged in the counterclockwise or clockwise direction on the
left and right sides of a beam, which may be calculated according to the actual
reinforcement area (including the floor slab reinforcement within the scope of
compression reinforcement and effective flange width) and the standard value
of material strength, with the seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity;

ln---Clear span of beam;

VGb--Design value of shear force on the beam end section under the action of the
representative value of its gravity load (includ ing the standard value of ve rtical
seismic action in Intensity 9), which is analyzed according to simple-supported
beam;

1/vb--Enhancement coefficient of beam shear force, which shall take 1.3, 1.2 and 1. l
respectively for Grade I, II and III.

6.2.6 Frame beam, column and their shear sections shall meet the following requireme nts:

1 Durable and temporary design conditions

VS.0.25/JJcbho (6 .2.6- 1)

2 Seismic design conditions

Beam w ith span-height ratio greater than 2.5 and column with shear span ratio greater than 2:

1
V ~ - (0.2/JJcbho) (6.2.6-2)
YRE

Beam with span-height ratio not greater than 2.5 and column with shear span ratio not greater
than 2:

1
V ~ - (0. 15/]Jcbho) (6.2.6-3)
YRE

54
 Shear span ratio of frame column may be calculated according to following Fonnula:

(6.2.6-4)

Where V---Design value of shear force for the calculated section of beam and column;

2--Shear span ratio of frame column; as for the frame column with inflection point in
the middle of column height, it may take the ratio of column clear height and 2 times
of column section effective height in the calculation direction;

M--Calculated value of combined bending moment at the column end section not adjusted
according to Articles 6.2. 1, 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 of this specification, which may take the
larger value of upper and lower column ends;

V'--Calculated value of combined shear force corresponding to the calculated value of

column end section and combined bending moment;

f3c--Concrete strength influence coefficient; it shall take 1.0 where the concrete strength
grade is not greater than CSO; it shall take 0.8 where the concrete strength grade is
C80; it may be taken in accordance with linear interpolation when the concrete
strength grade is between CSO and C80;

b--Width of rectangular section; web width ofT-section and I-section;

h0--Effective height of beam and column section in the calculation direction

6.2.7 During the seismic design, seismic checking shall be carried out in the node core zones of
Grade I, II and III frames; seismic checking may not be carried out for the Grade IV frame node. The
frame node of each seismic grade shall meet the requirements of constructional measures.

6.2.8 As for the eccentric compression frame column of rectangular section, its shear bearing
capacity of inclined section shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

1 Durable and temporary design conditions

V ~ 1. J;bh0 + fyv ~v h0 + 0.07 N

75
(6 .2.8-1)
A..+1 s

2 Seismic design conditions

V ~ - - ( l .0 J; bh0 + f yv Asv h0 + 0.056 N)

1 5
(6.2 .8-2)
YRE A +1 s

Where ),--Shear span ratio of frame column; when 2<1, 2=1; when )>3, ).=3;

N--Design value for the axial compressive force of frame column in consideration of
wind load or seismic action combination; when N>0.3fcAc, N=0.3fcA-c·

6.2.9 Where the rectangular sectional frame column has tension on it, its shear bearing capacity of
inclined section shal l be calcu lated according to the following Formula:

1 Durable and temporary design conditions

55
 V ~ l.? J;bh0 + f yv ~v h0 -0.2 N
5
(6.2.9- 1)
.A+ l s

2 Seismic design conditions

V~-1-( l.0 5 J;bh0 +~v ~" h0 -0.2N) (6.2.9-2)

YRE .A+l s

Where N--Design value of axial tension corresponding to the des ign value of shear force V,
taking the absolute value;

},- - Shear span ratio of frame column.

When the calculated value on the right of Formula (6.2.9- 1) or the calculated value in the bracket

on the right of Fonnula (6 .2.9-2) is less than /yv ~v h0 , },= ~v ~v h0 , and /yv ~v h0 shall not be
s s s
less than 0.36f.bh0 .

6.2.10 Checking calculation for the other bearing capacity of frame beam, column, frame-supported
beam and column section not specified in this chapter shall be implemented according to the relevant
requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of Concrete Structures" GB 50010.

6.3 Requirement for Detailing of Frame bea ms

6.3.1 Main beam section height of frame structure may be determined according to 1/10-1118 of the
calculated span; the ratio of beam clear span to section height should not be less than 4. Section width
of beam should not be less than 1/4 of section height of beam and should not be less than 200mm.

Where the beam height is smaller or flat beam is adopted, not only the bearing capacity and shear
section requirements shall be checking calcu lated, but also the requirements related to rigid ity and
crack shall be met. Where the beam deflection is calculated, the reaso nable camber value of beam
may be deducted ; as for the cast-in-place beam slab structure, the favorable influence of beam
compression flange should be considered .

6.3.2 Frame beam design shall meet the following requirements:

1 The ratio between the height and effective height of the concrete compressive area of
beam end counted into the compression reinforcement shall not be larger than 0:2s for Grade I
and shall not be larger than 0.35 for Grade II and III.

2 Minimum reinforcement percentage Pmin (%) of longitudinal tensile reinforcement shall

not be less than the larger value among 0.2 and 45j;/.f.,. during the non-seismic design; shall not
be less than the values specified in Table 6.3.2-1 during the seismic design.

3 In addition to being determined through calculation, the ratio between sectional areas
of longitudinal reinforcements at the bottom and top of beam end section still shall not be less
than 0.5 for Grade I seismic design and not be less than 0.3 for Grade II and III.

4 During the seismic design, the length of the stirrup d ensified area at the beam end, the
56
maximum spacing between stirrups and the minimum diameter of stirrup shall meet the
req uirements of Table 6.3.2-2; if the reinforcement ratio of longitudinal reinforcement at the
beam end is greater than 2%, the minimum diameter of stirrup in this Table shall increase by
2mm.

Table 6.3.2-1 Minimum Reinforcement Percentage of Longitudinal Tensile Reinforcement of Beam Pm in(%)

Position
Seismic grade
Support (the larger value) Midspan (the larger value)

Grade I 0.40 and 80/./f, 0.30 and 65/./f,

Grade II 0.30 and 65/./f, 0.25 and 55/./f,

Grade III and IV 0.25 and 55/./f,· 0.20 and 45/./f,

Table 6.3.2-2 Length of the Stirrup Densified Area at the Beam End, the Maximum Spacing Between Stirrups and
the Minimum Diameter of Stirrup

Length of the stirrup densified l\laximum spacing between stirrups (the Minimum diameter of
Seismic grade
area (the larger value) (mm) minimum vaiue) (mm) stirrup (mm)

I 2.0h,,, 500 '11/ 4, 6d, 100 10

II 1.5hb. 500 h,/ 4, Sd, 100 8

III l.5'11>, 500 h,/ 4, 8d, 150 8

IV l.Sh .., 500 h t/4, 8d, 150 6

Note: I dis the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement; h,. is the section height of beam ;

2 As for the frame beams of Seismic Grade I and II, when the diameter of the stirrup is greater than 12mm, the

quantity of leg number shall not be less than 4 and the limb spacing shall not be greater than 150mm, the maximum

spacing of stirrup densified area may be broadened properly but shall not be greater than ISOmm.

6.3.3 Longitudinai reinforcement arrangement of beam shall also meet the following requirements:

1 During the seismic design, the reinforcement ratio of longitudinal tensile reinforcement at the
beam end should not be greater than 2.5% and shall not be greater than 2.75%; where the reinforcement
ratio of tensile reinforcement at the beam end is greater than 2.5%, the reinforcement ratio of
compression reinforcement shall not be less than half of the tensile reinforcement.

2 At least two sticks of longitudinal reinforcements shall be arranged at the top surface and
bottom surface along the full length of beam respectively; for Seismic Grade I and II design, the
reinforcement diameter shall not be less than l 4mm and shall not be less than 1/4 of relatively large
sectional area in the longitudinal reinforcement at the top surface and bottom surface of beams
respectively; for Seismic Grade III and IV design and non-seismic design, the reinforcement diameter
shall not be less than 12mm.

3 The diameter of each longitudinal reinforcement penetrating the centrai column in the frame
beam of Seismic Grade I, II and III, should not be greater than 1/20 of the section dimension of the
column in this direction for the rectangular section column; should not be greater than 1/20 of the
chord length of the column section in the position of longitudinal reinforcement for the circular
section column.

6.3.4 During the non-seismic design, reinforcement construction of frame beam stirrup shall meet
the following requirements:
57
 1 Stirrups shall be arranged along the full length of the beam, and the first stirrup shall be
arranged 50mm away from the support edge.

2 The diameter of stirrup should not be less than 8mm for such beam with section height
greater than 800mm and shall not be less than 6mm for such beam of other section height. Within the
scope of overlapping length of stressed reinforcement, the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 1/4
of the maximum diameter of overlapping reinforcement.

3 Stirrup spacing shall not be greater than the requirements of Table 6.3 .4; w ithin the scope of
overlapping length of longitudinal tensile reinforcement, the stirrup spacing sha ll also not be greater
than 5 times of the smal ler diameter of overlapping reinforcement and shall not be greater than
I OOmm; within the scope of overlapping length of longitudinal compression reinforcement, the stirrup
spacing shall also not be greater than I 0 times of the smaller diameter of overlapping rei nforcement
and shall not be greater than 200mm .

4 As for the beam bearing the bending moment and shear force, when the design value of beam
shear force is greater than 0.7j;bh0 • the area re inforcement ratio of stirrup shall meet the requirements
of the following Formula:

Ps..2:.0 .24j;/fyv (6.3.4- 1)

5 As for the beam bearing bending moment, shear force and torque, the area reinforcement
ratio of stirrup and longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall respectively meet the requirements of
Formula (6.3.4-2) and (6.3.4-3):

Ps2::.0.28j;/f,.v (6.3.4-2)

Pt1 ?. 0.6 /T J; I~..

~Vb
(6.3.4-3)

When Tl(Vb)>2.0 , it shall take 2.0.

Where T, V--Design values of torque and shear force respectively;

p,1, b -- Area reinforcement ratio and beam width of longitudinal torsion reinforcement
respectively.

Table 6.3.4 Maximum Spaci ng of Beam Stirrup of Non-se ismic Des ign (mm)

~ )
~>0.7J.bho 1'50. 7J.bho

I
h,,5300 150 200
300<hi;5500 200 300
SOO<hi,5800 250 350
hvSOo 300 400

6 Where the longitudinal compression reinforcement req uired for calculation is arranged in the
beam, the stirrup arrangement shall also meet the following requirements:

1) Sti rrup diameter shall not be less than 1/4 of the maximum d iameter of longitudinal
compression reinforcement;
58
 2) Stirrup shall be made into closed type;

3) Stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 15d and 400mm; where there are more than 5
compression reinforcement in one same story and the diameter is greater than l 8mm, the
stirrup spacing shail not be greater than IOd (dis the minimum diameter of longitudinal
compression reinforcement) ;

4) If the section width of beam is greater than 400mm and there are more than three
longitudinal compression reinforcement in one same story or if the section width of
beam is not greater than 400mm and there are more than four longitudinal compression
reinforcements in one same story, the compound stirrup shall be arranged.

6.3.S During the seismic design, stirrup of frame beam shall also meet the following construction
requirements

1 Area reinforcement ratio of stirrup along the full length of the beam shall meet the following
requirements:

Grade I (6.3.5- 1)

Grade II (6.3.5-2)

Grade III and IV (6.3.5-3)

Where Psv - -Area reinforcement ratio of stirrup along the full length of the frame beam.

2 The spacing of stirrup legs within the scope of stirrup densified area: for Grade I, should not
be greater than the larger one of 200mm and 20 times of the stirrup diameter; for Grade II and III, it
should not be greater than the larger one of 250mm and 20 times of the stirrup diameter; for Grade IV,
it should not be greater than 300mm.

3 Stirrups shall have 135° hook whose straight reach length at the end socket shall not be less
than the larger value of 10 times of stirrup diameter and 75mm.

4 Stirrup spacing within the scope of longitudinal reinforcement overlapping length, shall not
be greater than 5 times of the smaller diameter of overlapping reinforcement and 1OOmm under the
tensile state; shall not be greater than 10 times of the smaller diameter of overlapping reinforcement
and shall not be greater than 200mm under the compression state.

5 Maximum spacing of stirrups in the non-densified area of frame beam should not be greater
than 2 times of the stirrup spacing in the densified area.

6.3.6 Longitudinal reinforcement of frame beam shall not be welded with stirrup, tie bar and
embedded parts.

6.3.7 Where openings are made on the frame beam, the opening shou ld be located within 1/3 section
of the beam mid-span, and opening height shall not be greater than 40% of the beam height; where the
openings are relatively large, bearing capacity checking calculation shall be carried out. Additional
longitudinal reinforcement and stirrup shall be arranged around the opening on the beam (Figure 6.3. 7)
and shall meet the calculation and construction requirements.

59
 I '.?
\\
~I

~tl
3 ? !
L:!__

Figure 6.3.7 Construction Sketch of Reinforcement Around the Openings on the Beam
I-Additional longitudinal reinforcement above and below the opening; 2- Additional stirrup above and below the opcnmg:
3-Additional sti rrup at both sides of the opening: 4- Longitudinal reinforcement of beam; /, -Anchorage length of tensile reinforcement

6.4 Requirement for Detailing of Frame Columns

6.4.1 Sectional dimension of column should meet the following requirements:

1 Side length of rectangular section column should not be less than 250mm during the non-
seismic design, which should not be less than 300mm for Grade IV seismic design, and should not be
less than 400mm for Grade I, II and III seismic design. Diameter of circular column should not be less
than 350mm for non-seismic design and Grade IV seismic design, and should not be less than 450mm
for Grade I, II and III seismic design.

2 The shear span ratio of column should be greater than 2.

3 T he height-width ratio of column section should not be greater than 3.

6.4.2 The axial compression ratio of reinforced concrete column should not be greater than those
specified in Table 6.4 .2 during the seismic design; as for the tall buildings built on Category IV site.
the axial compression ratio limit shall be reduced properly.

Table 6.4.2 Axial Compression Ratio Limit of Column

Seismic grade
Structure type
I II lil IV

Frame structure 0.65 0.75 0.85 -

Slab-column shearwall, framc-shearwall,

0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95
frame-corewall, tube in tube structure

Partial frame-supported shearwall structure 0.60 0.70 -

Note: I Axial compression ratio refers to the ratio between the design value of axial compressive fo rce under the seismic action
combination of column and the product of the total section area of column and the design value .of axial compressive
strength of concrete:

2 Values in the table arc applicable to the columns with concrete strength grade n01 greater than C60. When the concrete
strength grade is C65-C70, the axial compression ratio limit shall be reduced by 0.05 according to those values specified in
this table; when the concrete strength grade is C75-C80, the axial compression ratio limit shall be reduced by 0.10
according to those values specified in this table;

3 The limits listed in the above table are applicable to the columns with shear span ratio greater than 2; as for the columns
with shear span ratio not greater than 2 but not less than 1.5, the axial compression ratio limit shall be reduced by 0.05: as
for the columns with shear span ratio less than 1.5, the ax ial compression ratio limit shall be studied especially and special
construction measures shall be taken:
60
 4 Axial compression rat io limit may be increased by 0. 10, on the condition that cross compound stirrup 1s adopted along the

full height of column, and stirrup spacing is not greater than I OOmm, spacing of stirrup legs is not greater than 200mm,
diameter is not less than l 2mm, or compound spiral stirrup is adopted along the full height of column, and thread pitch is

not greater than I OOmm, spacing of stirrup legs is not greater than 200mm, diameter is not less than 12mm; or continuous

compound spiral stirrup is adopted along the full height of column, and thread pitch is not greater than 80mm, spacing of

stirrup legs is not greater than 200mm, diameter is not less than I Omm;

5 Where core columns formed by additional longitudinal reinforcement are arranged in the middle of column section, and the

sectional area of additional longitudinal reinforcement are not less than 0.8% of the column section area, axial compression

ratio limit of column may increase by 0.05 . Where the measure in this item is adopted together with the measure in note 4,

axial compression ratio limit of column may increase 0.15 than the values specified in the table, but the stirrup characteristic

value may be determined according to the requirements for the axial compression ratio increasing 0.1 O:

6 Adjusted axial compression ratio limit of column shall not be greater than 1.05.

6.4.3 Arrangement of column longitudinal reinforcement and stirrup shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Reinforcement ratio of all longitudinal reinforcement of column shall not be less than
the values specified in Table 6.4.3-1 and on each side of column section shall not be less than
0.2%; during the seismic design, as for the tall building on Category IV site, the values in the
table shall increase 0.1.

Table 6.4.3- 1 Minimum Reinforcement Percentage of Longitudinal Tensile Reinforcement of Column(%)

Seismic grade
C olumn ty pe Non-seismic
Grade I Grade II Grade Ill Gracie IV

Central column and side column 0.9 (1.0) 0.7 (0.8) 0.6 (0.7) 0.5 (0.6) 0.5

Corner column 1.1 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.5

Frame-supported column 1.1 0.9 - - 0.7

'Joie: 1 The values in the bracket of this Table are applicable to the frame structure;

2 When 335MPa level and 400;\lPa level longitudinal stressed reinforcements are adopted, the values in the table shall

be respectively adopted by increasing 0.1 a nd 0.05;

3 When the concrete strength grade is higher than C60, above values shall be adopted by increasing 0.1.

2 Column stirrups shall be densified within the specified scope during the seismic design,
the spacing and diameter of stirrups in the densified area shall meet the following requirements:

1) The maximum spacing and the minimum diameter of stirrups shall be adopted
according to Table 6.4.3-2;

Table 6.4.3-2 Construction Requirements of Stirrup Densified Area at then Column End

Seismic grade l\laximum spacing of stirrups(mm) l\linimum diameter of stirrups (mm)

Grade I The smaller value between 6d and 100 10

Grade II The smaller value between 8d a nd 100 8

Gracie III The smaller value between 8d a nd 150 (JOO at column root) 8

Grade IV The sma ller value between 8d and 150 (100 at column root) 6 (8 at column root)

61
 '.'lote: I d is the diameter of colu mn long itudinal reinfo rcement (mm);

2 Column root r efers to the build-in position at th e bottom of frame column.

2) If the diameter of stirrup for Grade I frame column is greater than 12mm and the
spacing of stirrup legs is not greater than lSOmm as well as the diameter of stirrup
fo r Grade II frame column not less than lOmm and the spacing of stirrup legs is not
greater than 200mm, except for the column root, the maximum spacing of stirrups
may adopt l SOmm; if the sectional dimension of Grade III frame column is not
greater than 400mm, the minimum diameter of stirrup may adopt 6mm; if the
shear span ratio of Grade IV frame column is not greater than 2 or the reinforcement
ratio of all longitudinal reinforcement in the column is greater than 3 %, the
diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 8mm;

3) As for the column with shear spa n ratio not greater than 2, the stirrup spacing shall
not be greater tha n lOOmm .

6.4.4 Arrangement of longitud inal reinforce ments for columns shall also meet the following
requi rements:

1 During the seismic design, symmetric rei nforcement should be adopted.

2 As for the column with section di mension greater than 400mm, the spaci ng of longitudinal
reinforcement should not be greater than 200mm for Grade I, II and Ill seismic design; the spacing of
long itudinal reinforcement shou ld not be greater than 300mm for Grade IV seismic design and
non-seismic design ; the clear d istance of column longitudinal reinforcement all shall not be less than
50mm.

3 Rei nforcement ratio of all longitudi nal reinforcement should not be greater than 5% and shall
not be greater than 6% for non-seismic design; shall not be greater than 5% for seismic design.

4 As for the Grade I column with shear span ratio not greater than 2, the reinforcement ratio of
unilateral longitud inal tensi le reinforcement should not be greater than 1.2%.

5 When the side column, corner column and shearwall end column generate small eccentric
tension in consideration of seismic action combination, the gross sectional area of longitudinai
reinforcement in the column shall increase by 25% than the calculated value.

6.4.5 Long itudinal reinforcement of column shall not be welded w ith stirrup, tie bar and embedded
parts.

6.4.6 During the seismic design , the scope of column stirrup densified area shall meet the following
requirements:

1 At the upper end of columns at the bottom story and both ends of columns on other stories,
the scope shall take the maxim um value among the long side dimension of rectangular section column
(or diameter of circular section column), 1/6 of column clear height and 500mm;

2 The scope of 500mm above and below the rigid ground of columns on the bottom story;

3 T he scope of 1/3 column clear height above the root of column on the bottom story;

4 As for the columns with shear span ratio not greater than 2 and the columns formed by filler
62
wall with the ratio between net height and section height not greater than 4, the scope shall take the
total height of the column;

5 Total height scope of Grade I and II frame comer column ;

6 Total height scope of columns required to improve the deformability.

6.4.7 Volumetric stirrup ratio of stirrups within the scope of column densified area shall meet the
fo llowing requirements:

1 Volumetric stirrup ratio of stirrups 111 the column stirru p densified area shall meet the
requirements of the following Formula:

(6.4.7)

Where Pv--Vo lumetric stirrup ratio of column stirrup;

Av--Minimum stirrup characteristic value of column, which should be adtoped according

to Table 6.4.7;

fc--Design value of the axial compressive strength of concrete, which shall be calculated
according to C35 if the concrete strength grade of column is less than C35 ;

hv--Design value of tensile strength of column stirrup or tie bar.

Table 6.4.7 Minimum Stirrup Characteristic Value of Stirrup Densified Area at the Col umn End lv

Seismic Axial compression ratio of column

Stirrup type
grade ::;OJO 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.05

Ordinary stirrup, compound stirrup 0.10 0.1 1 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.23 - -
I Spiral stirrup, compound or continuous
0.08 0.09 0. 11 0.13 0.15 0. 18 0.21 - -
compound spiral stirrup

Ord inary stirrup, compound stirrup 0.08 0.09 0.1 1 0.13 0.15 0. 17 0. 19 0.22 0.24

II Spiral stirrup, compound or continuous

0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0. 17 0.20 0.22
compound spiral stirrup

Ordinary stirrup. compound stirrup 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0. 15 0.17 0.20 0.22
I

lil Spiral stirrup, compound or continuous

0.05 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0. 13 0.15 0.18 0.20
compound spiral stirrup

Note: The ordinary stirrup refers to a s111gle rectangular stirrup or a single round stirrup; spiral stirrup refers to a single continuous
spiral stirrup; compound stirrup refers to the stirrup composed of rectangular, polygon, round stirrup or tie bar; compound spiral
stirrup refers to the stirrup composed of spiral stirrup and rectangular, polygon, round stirrup or tie bar: continuous compound
spiral stirrup refers to the stirrup in which all the spiral stirrups are processed by the same reinforcement.

2 As for Grade I, II, Ill and IV frame columns, the volumetric stirrup ratio of stirrups within
the scope of stirrup densified area sha ll not be less than 0.8%, 0.6%, 0.4% and 0.4% respectively.

3 The columns w ith shear span ratio not greater than 2 should adopt compound spiral stirrups
or cross compound stirrups; the volumetric stirrup ratio shall not be less than 1.2% and shall not be
less than 1.5% at Intensity 9.

4 Where the vol umetric stirrup ratio of compound stirrup is calcu lated, the stirrup volume of
overlap section may not be deducted ; where the volumetric sti rrup ratio of compound spiral stirrup is
63
calculated, the non-spi ral stirrup volume shall multiply by the conversion coefficient 0.8.

6.4.8 During the seismic design, column stim1p arrangement shall also meet the following requ irements:

1 Stirrups shall be closed type, and end shall be made into 135° hook w hose straight reach
length at the end shall not be less than 10 times of stirrup diameter and 75 mm.

2 Spacing of stirrup legs in the stirrup densified area should not be greater than 200mm for
Grade I; should not be greater than the larger one of 250mm and 20 times of the stirrup diameter for
Grade II and III; should not be greater than 300mm for Grade IV. Stirrups should be restrained a long
two directions every other longitudinal reinforcement; where tie bar compound stirrups are adopted,
tie bars should abut against the longitudinal reinforcement and hook the closed stirrups.

3 As fo r the stirrups in the non-densified area of column. the volumetric stirrup ratio should not
be less than half of that in the densified area; the stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 2 times of
that in the densified area, and shall not be greater than 10 times of longitudinal reinforcement
diameter for Grade I and II, or shall not be greater than 15 t imes of longitud inal reinforcement
diameter for Grade III and IV.

6.4.9 During the non-seismic design. stirrups in the column shall meet the following requirements:

1 Peripheral stirrups shall be made into closed type;

2 Stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 400mm, and 15 times of short side dimens ion of
member section and min imum long itud inal stressed reinforcement member;

3 Stirrup diameter shall not be less than 1/4 of the maximum longitudinal reinforcement
diameter and 6mm;

4 Where the reinforcement ratio of all longitudinal stressed reinforcements in the column are
greater than 3%, stirrup diameter shall not be less than 8mm, stirrup spacing shall not be greate r than
10 times of the minimum longitudinal reinforcement diameter and 200mm, and the stirrup end shall
be made into 135° hook whose straight reac h length at the end shall not be less than 10 times of the
stirrup d iameter;

5 Where the longitudinal reinforcements on each side of column are more than 3, compound
stirrups shall be arranged;

6 Where the longitudinal reinforcements in the column adopt overlapping method, stirrup
d iameter within the scope of overlapping length shall not be less than 114 of the larger diameter of
overlapping reinfo rcement; within the scope of overlapping length of longitudinal tensile reinforcement,
the stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 5 times of the smaller diameter of overlapping reinforcement
and 1OOmm; within the scope of overlapping length of longitudinal compression reinforcement, the
stirrup spacing shall not be greater than I 0 times of the smaller diameter of overlapping reinforcement
and 200mm.Where the compression re info rcement diameter is greater than 25mm , two sticks of
stirrups shall be arranged respect ively within the scope of 1OOrnm outside of the overlapping joint end
face.

6.4.10 Hori zontal stirrups shall be arranged in the core zone of frame node in accordance with the
fo llowing requirements:

1 During the non-seismic design, stirrup arrangement shall meet the relevant requirements of
64
Article 6.4.9 of this specification, but the stirrup spacing should not be greater than 250mm; as for the
nodes with beams connected with them on four sides, rectangular stirrups may be only arranged along
the node periphery.

2 During the seismic design, the maximum spacing and minimum diameter of stirrups should
meet the requirements of column stirrup in Ati icle 6.4.3 of this specification. Stirrup characteristic
values in the core zones of Grade I, II and III node frames should not be less than 0.12, 0.10 and 0.08
respectively, and volumetric stirrup ratio should not be less than 0.6%, 0.5% and 0.4% respectively.
Volumetric stirrup ratio for the core zone of frame node with column shear span ratio not greater than
2 should not be less than the larger value of volumetric stirrup ratio at the upper and lower column
ends in the core zone.

6.4.11 As for the reinforcement types of column stirrups, the process requirements for placing
concrete shall be considered, and the pipe space shall be reserved for placing the concrete in the
midd le of column section.

6.5 Requirement for Splices and Anchorages of Reinforcement

6.5.1 Connecting joints of stressed reinforcement shall meet the following requirements:

1 Connecting joints of stressed reinforcement should be arranged in the positions with smaller
member load carrying; during the seismic design, wh ich should be kept clear from the stirrup
densified area at the end of beam and column.Reinforcement connection may adopt mechanical
connection, binding and splicing or welding.

2 Where the longitudinal stressed reinforcements adopt overlapping method, stirrups shall be
arranged within the scope of reinforcement overlapping length, and stirrup diameter shall not be less
than 1/4 of the larger diameter of overlapping reinforcement. Under the tensile state, the stirrup
spacing shall not be greater than 5 times of the smaller diameter of overlapping reinforcement and
1OOmm; under the compression state, the stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 10 times of the
smaller diameter of overlappi ng rei nforcement and 200mm. Where the compression reinforcement
diameter is greater than 25mm, two sticks of stirrups shall be arranged respectively within the scope
of IOOmm outside of the overlapping joint end face.

6.5.2 During the non-seismic design, the minimum anchorage length of tensile reinforcement shall
take la. The overlapping length of binding and splicing of tensile reinforcement shall be calculated
based on the section area percentage of overlapping reinforcement in the same connecting section
according to the following Formula and shall not be less than 300mm.

(6.5.2)

Where /r---Overlapping length of tensile reinforcement (mm);

la-- Anchorage length of tensile reinforcement (mm),which shall be adopted in accordance

with the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of
Concrete Structures" GB 5001 O;

(---Correction coefficient of tens ile reinforcement overlapping length, which shall be

adopted according to Table 6.5.2

65
 Table 6.5.2 Correction Coefficient of Longitudinal Tensile Reinforcement Overlapping Length (

Section area percentage of overlapping reinforcement in the same connecting section(%) S25 50 100

Correction coefficient of longitudinal tensile reinforcement overlapping length ( 1.2 1.4 1.6

Note: Section area percentage of overlapping reinforcement in the same connecting section shall take tl1e ratio of stressed reinforcement
with overlappingJOmt to all the stressed reinforcement m the same connecting section.

6.5.3 During the seismic design, anchorage and connection for the longitudinal stressed reinforcements
of reinforced concrete structure member shall meet the following requi rements:

1 Minimum anchorage length laE of longitudinal tensi le reinforcement shall be adopted 111

accordance with the following requirements:

Seismic Grade I and II (6.5.3-1)

Seismic Grade III (6.5 .3-2)

Seismic Grade IV (6.5.3-3)

2 Where binding and splicing method is adopted, the overlapping length of joints shall not be
less than the calculated values specified in the following Formula:

(6.5.3-4)

Where 11E-Overlapping length of tensile reinforcement during the seismic design.

3 Binding and splicing method should not be adopted where the tensile reinforcement diameter
is greater than 25mm and compression reinforcement diameter is greater than 28mm;

4 Connection method of cast-in-place reinforced concrete frame beam and column longitudinal
stressed steel reinforcements shall meet the following requirements:

1) Frame co lumn : should adopt mechan ical connection joints and may also adopt binding
and splicing or welded joints at Seismic Grade I and II and at the bottom story of
Seismic Grade III~ may adopt binding and splicing or welded joints at other positions of
Seismic Grade Ill and Seismic Grade IV;

2) Frame-supported beam and frame-supported column: should adopt mechanical connection

joints;

3) Frame beam: should adopt mechanical connection joints at Grade I; may adopt binding
and splicing or welded joints at Grade II, III and IV.

5 Joint area percentage of tensile reinforcements located in the same connecting section should
not exceed 50%;

6 Where the joints cannot be kept clear from the stirrup densified area at the end of beam and
column, mechanical connection joints meeting the equal strenthe requirements shall be adopted and
the reinforcement joint area percentage should not be greater than 50%;

7 Mechanical connection. binding and splicing and weld ing of reinforcement shall also meet
the requirements of the current standards of the nation.

6.5.4 During the non-seismic design, the anchorage and overlapping (Figure 6.5.4) for the longitudinal

66
reinforcement of frame beams and frame columns in the frame node zone shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Longitudinal reinforcement of intennediate node column and inner longitudinal reinforcement

of side node column in the top story shall be extended to the column top; where the linear anchorage
length calculated from the beam bottom side is not less than /3 , anchorage segment may not be bent
horizontally; otherwise it shall be horizontally bent toward the column, beam and slab; where the
tensile strength of column longitudinal reinforcement is taken full advanted of, the vertical projection
length of anchorage segment before bent shall not be less than O.Slab, and the horizontal projection
length of anchorage segment after bent should not be less than 12 times of column longitudinal
reinforcement diameter. lab thereof is the basic anchorage length of reinforcement, which shall meet
the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of Concrete Structures"
GB 50010.

_....:_
I
--~ /,
1
--l /"
I 1
~/,. - °T/"
./_'1.__:::5:._:_/,_t::=::;:-----r >201 2 Longitudinal ~~ ------.-
+1.
)

I r I 'di { 150 { tic rod } 15() µ; 12d

f---i
- H i
- - -- -~ -,....
II ~
-,,.,
0

~ ~ ,, '

-
'1 1.-l/,,, 1 ~'
I
"T'· ~2012 Longitudinal 3
I
1
•
J_I
-l "
I
-+-' /, I
'T /,,

~ ~
l
tie rod
I A I
I

II
I l ~d
~ 1
~t
/,,

I I
Figure 6.5.4 Anchorage Sketch of Frame Beam and Column Longitudinal Reinforcement in the Node Zone During
the Non-seismic Design

2 At the end node in the top story, outer longitudinal reinforcement of column within the scope
of beam width may be overlapped with the upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam, and the
overlapping length shall not be less than I .Sia; outer longitudinal reinforcement of column outside of
the scope of beam width may be stretched into the cast-in-place slab, and the stretch length is the
same as the length stretched into the beam. Where the reinforcement ratio of outer longitudinal
reinforcement of column is greater than 1.2%, column longitudinal reinforcement stretched into the
beam should be cut off in two batches; the distance between the cut points should not be less than 20
times of the diameter of column longitudinal reinforcement.

3 T he anchorage length of upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam stretched into the end
67
node shall not be less than la in the linear anchorage, and the length stretched across the column center
line should not be less than 5 times of the longitudinal reinforcement diameter of beam; where the
sectional dimension of column is deficient, the upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam shall be
stretched to the opposite side of node and bent downward; the projected length of bent horizontal
segment shall not be less than 0.4/ab and the bent vertical projection length shall not be less than 15
times of the longitudinal reinforcement diameter.

4 Where the lower longitudinal reinforcement strength of beam is not utilized in the calculation,
the anchorage length stretched into the node shall take not less than 12 times of longitudinal reinforcement
diameter of beam. Where the tensile strength of beam lower reinforcement is fully utilized in the
calculation, the lower longitudinal reinforcement of beam may be anchored into the node by linear
mode or 90° upward bending mode; in the linear anchorage, the anchorage length shall not be less
than /3 ; in the bending anchorage, the projected length of bent horizontal segment shall not be less
than 0.4/ab and bent vertical projection length shall not be less than 15 times of the longitudinal
reinforcement diameter.

5 Where anchorage plate anchoring measures are adopted, the anchorage structure of reinforcement
shall meet the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of Concrete
Structures" GB 50010.

6.5.5 During the seismic design, the anchorage and overlapping (Figure 6.5.5) for the longitudinal
reinforcement of frame beams and frame columns in the frame node zone shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Longitudinal reinforcement of intermediate node column and inner longitudinal reinforcement

of side node column in the top story shall be extended to the column top; where the linear anchorage
length calculated from the beam bottom s ide is not less than laE, anchorage segment may not be bent
horizontally, otherwise shall be horizontally bent toward the column, beam and slab; the vertical
projection length of anchorage segment before bent shall not be less than 0.5/abE, and the horizontal
projection length of anchorage segment after bent should not be less than 12 times of column
longitudinal reinforcement diameter. labE thereof is the basic anchorage length of reinforcement in the
seismic design, w hich shall take 1.15/ab for Grade I and II, and respectively take 1.05/ab and l .OOlab for
Grade III and IV.

2 At the end node in the top story, outer longitudinal reinforcement of column may be
overlapped with the upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam, and the overlapping length shall not be
less than 1.5 laE, and the sectional area of outer longitudinal reinforcement of column stretched into
the beam should not be less than 65% of the sectional area of all outer longitudinal reinforcement:
outer longitudinal reinforcement of column outside of the scope of beam width may be stretched into
the cast-in-place slab. and the stretch length is the same as the length stretched into the beam. Where
the reinforcement ratio of outer longitudinal reinforcement of column is greater than 1.2%, column
longitudinal reinforcement stretched into the beam should be cut off in two batches; the distance
between the cut points should not be less than 20 times of the diameter of column longitudinal
reinforcement.

3 The anchorage length of upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam stretched into the end
node shall not be less than laE in the linear anchorage, and the length stretched across the column
center line should not be less than 5 times of the longitudinal reinforcement diameter of beam: where
the sectional dimension of column is deficient, the upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam shall be
68
stretched to the opposite side of node and bent downward; the horizontal projection length of anchorage
segment before bent shall not be less than 0.4/abE and the bent ve1tical projection length shall take 15
times of the longitudinal reinforcement diameter.
__ ,I SI.
(
.., ? /I
I
~ 1 -:!. d
r-----1 /
4 1 ;- H Ib
-r
j I~
'\,
.)
I

,...-
-.:.-:
I/)

/\'.
}---
.-~o -ii,,,, t :Li
~
d

/I
Z1
~I
II
I I

i I
I I

I
I
I
:?:O ..lJ_,,,,
~ ,___....._ I

I
I
1 II § ?. I

Ii-
?:-0 4/,., ~ I

~I
)

I
l

Figure 6.5.5 Anchorage Sketch of Frame Beam and Column Longitudinal Reinforcement in the Node Zone During
the Seismic Design
1--Duter longitudinal reinforcement of column; 2- Upper longitudinal reinforcement of beam;

3--Duter longitudinal reinforcement of column stretched into the beam ;

4--Duter longitudinal reinforcement of column stretched into the slab not into the beam

4 Anchorage of the lower longitudinal reinforcement beam is the same as that of the upper
longitudinal reinforcement. However, the ve1tical segment shall bent upward into the node, where 90°
bending anchorage mode is adopted.

69
 7 Design of Shearwall Structure

7.1 General Requirement

7.1.1 Shearwall structure shall be with appropriate lateral rigidity, and the layout shal l meet the
following requirements:

1 The plane layout should be simple and regular; it shall be bi-directional arranged along the
two main axises direction or other or other directions, and the lateral rigidity on the two directions
should not be with huge difference. Single-d irection walled structural layout shall not be adopted in
seismic design.

2 It shall be arranged continuously from bottom to top to avoid rigid ity mutation.

3 The openings of door and window should be lined up and arranged in row, forming specific
wall column and connection beam; opening layout causing huge diffenrence of wall column width
should be avoided; in seismic design, wall with split-level hole shall not be adopted for the bottom
reinforced pa11 of Grade I, II, and Ill shearwall; fold ing wall with split-level hole with pa1tial lapped
opening should not be adopted for the overall height.

7.1.2 Shearwall should not be overlong; connection beam with larger span-height ratio shall be
arranged for longer shearwall to d ivide it into several even wall sections, and tbe ratio of the height
and length of each wall section should not be less than 3; wall section length should not be larger than
8111.

7.1.3 Connection beam with a span-height ratio less than 5 shall be designed according to the
relevant requirements of this chapter, and for those not, should be designed according to frame beam.

7.1.4 T he range of bottom reinforced pa1t of shearwall in seismic design shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The height of the bottom reinforced pa11 shall be calculated from the top slab of basement.

2 The height of bottom reinforced part may be taken as the larger value of two stories from
ground floors and the 1110 of wall total height; the height of bottom rei nforced pa11 of partial frame-
support shearwall structure shall meet the requirements of Article 10.2.2 of this specification.

3 When the calculated fixing end of the structure is located on or bellow the soleplate of
underground story, the bottom reinforced part still shall be extended to the calculation fixing end.

7.1.5 Floor beam should not be supported on the connection beam of shearwall or core tube.

7. 1.6 When shearwall or core-tube wall column and the crossing floor beam outside the plane are in
rigid connection, shearwall and support-wall column connecting with beam may be arranged along
the axial d irection of floor beam, or hidden column may be arranged in wall:

1 The wall thickness should not be less than the width of beam section when arranging
shearwall connecting with beam along the axial d irection of floor beam;

2 When arranging support-wall column, the section width shall not be less than the beam width,
and the section height may be counted in wall thickness.

70
 3 When -arranging hidden column in wall, the section height of hidden column may be taken as
the wall thickness, and the sectional width may take beam width plus 2 times of wall thickness.

4 The longitudinal reinforcement (or model steel) of hidden column or support-wall column
shall be determined according to calculation, and the total reinforcement ratio of longitudinal
reinforcement shou ld not be less than those specified in Table 7 .1.6.

Table 7.1.6 Constructional Reinforcement Ratio for Longitudinal Reinforcement of Hidden Column and
Support-wall Column

Seismic design
Design condition Non-seismic des ign
Grade I Grade II GradelII Grade IV

Reinforcement ratio (%) 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.5

Note: When adopting Grade 400MPa and 335MPa reinforcement, the values in this table should plus 0.05 and 0.1 0 respectively.

5 The horizontal steel reinforcement of floor beam shall stretch into shearwall or support-wall
column, and the stretching length shall meet the requirements of reinforcement anchorage. The
horizontal projection length of reinforcement anchoring section should not be less than 0.4lab in non-
se ismic design, and not be less than 0.4labE when it is not; floor beam may be extend wall suface to
from a beam head when the horizontal projection length of the anchoring section doesn't meet the
requirements; and the longitudinal reinforcement of beam buckling anchorage after stretching into
beam head (Figure 7 .1.6); other reliable anchoring measures may also be adopted.

Figure 7.1.6 Floor Beam Extending Wall Suface to Form Beam Head
I-Floor beam: 2- Shcarwall ; 3- Horizontal projection length of flooring reinforcement anchorage

6 Stirrup shall be installed on hidden column or support-wall column, and the diameter of
stirrup shall not be less than 8mm when it is Grade I, II and III, and shall not be less than 6 when it is
Grade IV and non-seismic, and all shall not be less than 114 of longitudinal reinforcement diameter;
the stirrup spacing shall not be larger than l 50mm when it is Grade I, II and III, and shan not be larger
than 200mm when it is Grade IV and non-seismic.

7.1. 7 When the ratio of the section height and thickness of wall column is not larger than 4, the
section design shall be carried out according to frame column .

7.1.8 Short column shearwall shall not be adopted for all tall buildings in seismic design; short
column shearwall should not be arranged for Grade B height high-rise buildings and Grade A height
high-rise buildings whose seismic precautionary intensity is 9; shearwall structure with more short
column shearwalls shall not be adopted. When adopting shearwall structure w ith more short-column
shearwalls, the following requirements shall be met:

71
 1 Under specified horizontal earthquake action, the bottom overtuurn ing moment sho1t column
shearwall bearing should not be larger than 50% of the total earthquake ove1tuurning moment of the
structure bottom.

2 The applicable building height shall be properly lower than the maximum applicable height
of shearwall structure specified in Table 3.3.1- 1 of this specification, when it is Intensity 7, Intensity 8
(0.2g) and Intensity 8 (0.3g); it shall not be larger than 1OOm, 80m and 60m respectively.

Note: Shon column shearwall refers 10 shcarwall whose section thickness ts not larger than 300mm, and the maximum ratio of section

he ight and thickness of each column is larger than 4 but no larger than 8.

2 Shearwall structure with more short-column shearwalls refers to shearwall strncture that under
specified horizontal earthquake action, the bottom overtuurning moment shon column shearwall
bearing is not less than 30% of the total earthquake overtuurning moment of the structure bottom.

7.1.9 Shearwall shall be calculated the inclined section shear capacity, eccentric compression or
eccentric tension in plane, and axis compression load-bearing capacity out of plane. Under the action
of concentrated load, partial load-carrying capacity shall be calculated when there is no hidden column
in wall.

7.2 Section Design and Detailing

7.2.1 T he section thickness of shearwall shall meet the following requirements:

1 Shall meet the calculation requirements of wall stability of Appendix Din this specification.

2 Grade I and II shearwall: the bottom reinforced part shall not be less than 200mm, and other
pans shall not be less than I 60mm: the bottom reinforced pa1t of single-chisel-shaped independent
shearwall shall not be less than 220mm, and other pan s shall not be less than 180mm.

3 Grade Ill and lV shearwall: shall not be less than 160mm, the bottom reinforced patt of
single-chisel-shaped independent shearwall shall also not be less than J 80mm.

4 Shall not be less than l 60mm in non-seismic design.

In the axe case of shearwall, the section thickness of wall column separating lift wells or pipe
5
axes may be reduced properly, but should not be less than l 60mm .

7.2.2 The design of short column shearwall in seismic design shall meet the following requirements:

1 In addition to the section thickness of short column shearwall shall meet the requ irements of
Article 7 .2.1 in this specification, the bottom reinforced part shall also not be less than 200mm, and
other parts shall not be less than I 80mm.

2 T he axial compression ratio of Grade I, II and III short column shearwall should not be larger
than 0.45, 0.50, 0.55 respectively; the axial compression ratio limit of sh01t column shearwall of
single-chisel-shaped section shall be reduced 0.1 correspondingly.

3 The bottom reinforced pait of short column shearwall shall adjust the shear force design
value according to the Article 7.2.6 of this section; the design value of shear force shall be multiplied
by enhancement coefficient 1.4, 1.2 and 1.1 respectively when other storys are Grade I, I I and III.

4 The layout of boundary members for sho1t column shearwall shall meet the requirements of
72
Attic le 7 .2.14 in this specification.

5 As for the reinforcement ratio of all vertical steel reinforcement for short column shearwall,
bottom reinforced part Grade I and II should not be less than 1.2%, and Grade III and IV should not be
less than 1.0%; other patts Grade I and II shou ld not be less than 1.0%, and Grade III and N should
not be less than 0, 8%.

6 Single-chisel-shaped short column shearwall should not be adopted, and single-side floor
beam crossing it out of plane shall not be arranged on single-chisel-shaped short column shearwall.

7.2.3 Vetticaly and horizontally distributed steel reinforcement of high-rise shearwall structure shall
not be configured in s ingle row. Double-row reinforcement may be adopted when the section thickness
of shearwall is not larger than 400mm, and triplex-row reinforcement should be adopted when it is
larger than 400mm and not larger than 700mm; four-row reinforcement should be adopted when it is
larger than 700mm. The spacing of tie bars between distributed steei bars of each row shall not be
larger than 600mm, and the diameter shall not be less than 6.

7.2.4 As for seismic designed double-column shearwall, the wall columns should be free small
eccentric tension; if any one wall column suffers the eccentric tension, the design values of bending
moment and the shear force of the other wall column shall be multiplied by an enhancement
coefficient of 1.25 .

7.2.5 At the positions above the bottom reinforced paii of Grade I shearwall, the design value of
composite bending moment for wall columns and of composite shear force shall be multiplied by an
enhancement coefficient, and the enhancement coefficient of bending moment may be taken as 1.2,
and the enhancement coefficient of shear force may be taken as 1.3.

7.2.6 The shear force design value of shearwall section of bottom reinforced part shall be adjusted
accord ing to Formula (7.2.6- 1) when it is GradeI,II and III, and Intensity 9 Grade I shearwall shall be
adjusted according to Formula (7.2.6-2); other Grade II and III parts and Grade IV may not be
adjusted.

(7.2.6- 1)

(7.2.6-2)

Where V--Design value of section shear force of shearwall of bottom reinforced part;

Vv--Shear force calculated value (considering earthquake action combination) of shearwall

of bottom reinforced part;

M..vua--The seismic bend bearing capacity of shear wall normal section, wh ich shall consider
the seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity YRE, and adopt actual arranged
longitudinal reinforcement area, material strength standard value and combined
design value of axial force for calculation; if there is flange wall, the longitudinal
reinforcement within the range of one times of the flange wall thickness on both
sides of wall shall be counted in;

M..v--Composite calculated value of sectional bending moment of shearwall bottom for

bottom reinforced pa1t;
73
 'lw·- -Enhancement coefficient of shear force; it shall take 1.6 for Grade I, 1.4 for Grade II,
1.2 for Grade Ill.

7.2.7 The design value of section shear force of the wall columns of shearwal l shall meet the
followi ng requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary design conditions

(7.2.7- 1)

2 Seismic design conditions

Where the shear span ratio }. is larger than 2.5

(7.2.7-2)

Where the shear span ratio }. is not larger than 2.5

(7.2.7-3)

Shear span ratio may be calculated according to following Formula:

(7.2.7-4)

Where V--Shear force design value of wall column section of shearwall;

h"-0- -Effective height of the shearwall section;

/Jc--The influence coefficient of concrete strength, which shall be taken in accordance

with those specified in Article 6.2.6 of this specification;

2- -Shear span ratio. therein M , VC shall take the calculated values of sectional bending
moment and shear force of wall column in the same combination, and without
adjusting in accordance with relevant provisions of this specification, and the larger
value of calcu lated shear span ratio of the upper and lower end sections of wall
column shall be taken .

7.2.8 The compression load-bearing capacity of nomrnl section of wall column (Figure 7.2 .8) for
rectangular, T-shape, I-shape eccentric compression shearwall shall meet the relevant requirements of
current national standard "Code for Design of Concrete Structures" GB 50010. it also shall be
calculated according to the following requirements:

1 Durable, temporary design conditions

(7.2.8- 1)

(7.2.8-2)

When x > h~
74
 '
b,

t I r

Figure 7.2.8 Section and Dimension

(7.2 .8-3 )

Mc - +
al} cbwx (h
wO -~)
2 +
+ al} c ( b' -b )h'(h - h;)
f w f 2 wO (7.2.8-4)

(7.2.8-5)

(7.2 .8-6)

(7.2.8-7)

(7.2.8-8)

(7.2.8-9)

(J'
s
=
~b
~·0. 8 (_!_
- h"-o
-fJ J c
(7.2.8-10)

(7.2.8-11)

(7.2.8- 12)

(7.2.8-13)

75
Where a:--Distance between the force concurrence point of end bar of shearwall compressive
area and the compressive area edge;

b;--Width of flange of T-shaped and I-shaped sections in compressive area;

ea- -Eccentricity, ea=MIN;

fy , / ; --Design value of tensile and compressive reinforcement strength on shearwa\l end

shearwall respectively;

/ Y'v--Design value of strength of vertically distributed reinforcementof shearwall ;

fc--Design value of axial compressive strength of concrete;

h; - -Height of flange ofT-shaped and I-shaped sections in compressive area;

hwa--Effective height of shearwall section, hwa = hw - a; ;

Pw--Reinforcement ratio of vertically distributed reinforcement in shearwall;

~b--He ight of relative compressive area of boundary;

a 1--Ratio of design value of stress and concrete axial compression strength for concrete
rectangular stress diagram in compressive area, 1.0 shall be taken when the concrete
strength grade is not less than or equal to C50; 0.94 shall be taken when the concrete
strength grade is C80; it shall be taken in accordance with linear interpolation when
the concrete strength grade is between C50 and C80;

/Jc--Influence coefficient of concrete strength, which shall be taken in accordance with

those specified in A1ticle 6.2.6 of th is specification;

C:cu--Ultimate compression strain of concrete, which shall be adopted in accordance with

the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of
Concrete Structures" GB 50010.

2 Seismic design conditions, the right hand member of Formula (7.2.8- 1), (7 .2.8-2) all shal! be
divided by the seismic adjustment coefficient YRE of bearing capacity, and taken as 0.85.

7.2.9 The tensile capacity of normal section of eccentric tensioned shearwall on rectangular section
shall meet the following requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary design conditions

1
N~----- (7.2 .9-1)
1 ea
-- + - -
Nau Mwu

2 Seismic design conditions

(7.2.9.2)

76
 Nou and M,~1 may be calculated according to the fol lowing Formula respectively:

(7.2.9-3)

M
,~1 = AslI'y (hwO -as' ) + AswlI'yw (hwo -a~) (7.2.9-4)
2
Where Asw- -Sectional area of ve11ically distributed steei reinforcement of shearwall.

7.2.10 Theshear inclined section bearing capacity of eccentric compressed shearwall shall meet the
following requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary design conditions

V ::;; l
A--0.)
~ (o.5 J;bwhwo + O.l 3N A_v)
A
+ ~·h Ash hwo
s
(7.2.10- 1)

2 Seismic design conditions

(7.2 .10-2)

Where N--Design value of axial compressive force of shearwall section, which shall be taken as
0.2 fcbwhw when N is larger than 0.2fcbwhw;

A--Total sectional area of shearwall;

Aw- - Area of T-shaped, I-shaped section shearwall web; w hen it is rectangular section, A
shall be taken;

),- -Shear span ratio of calculated section; when ), is less than 1.5, 1.5 shall be taken;
when ), is larger than 2.2, 2.2 shall be taken; when the distance between calculated
section and wall bottom is less than 0.5h,v0, ), shall be calculated according to the
bending moment value and shear force value 0.5h,v0 which are away from the wall
bottom;

s--Spacing between horizontally distributed steel reinforcements of shearwall.

7.2.11 The shear inclined section bearing capacity of eccentric tensioned shearwall shall meet the
following requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary des ign conditions

(7 .2.11- 1)

Where the calculated value on the right side of the Fonnula above is less than fyh ~" hwo• it shall
s
be equa It+
0 J yh -
As1ihwO .
s

2 Seismic des ign conditions

77
 1
Vs-- [
1
YRE A, -0.5
(o.4J;b"'h"' 0 -0.lN~")+0.8J;,
A
1i ~"s hwo] (7.2.11-2)

Where the calculated value in the bracket on the right s ide of the Formula above is less than

0.8 JI'yh -Ash hwO, lt

. S11al1 be taken as 0.8 JI'yh -Ash hwO .
s s
7.2.12 As for seismic Grade I shearwall, the sliding resistance of horizontal construction joint shall
meet the requirements of the following Formula:

1
V"_v; S -(0.6 f,,As + 0.8N) (7.2. 12)
hE .

Where Vw1- -Shear force design value of horizontal construction joint of shearwall;

As- -Total area (excluding flange walls on both side) of vertical steel reinforcement in
the vertically distributed steel reinforcement and boundary members inside the
shearwall web plate on the horizontal construction joints, and the area of additional
vertical steel dowel w ith sufficient anchorage length in wall;

h - -The shear strength design value of vertical steel reinforcement;

N--Composite design value (considering earthquake action) of axial force on the horizontal
construction joint; pressure shall be takenpositive value, and tension shall be taken
negative value.

7.2.13 Under the action of the representative value of gravity load, the axial compression ratio of the
wall columns of Grade I. II and III shearwall should not exceed the limit values in Table 7 .2.13.

Table 7.2.13 Axial Compression Ratio Limit Value of Wall Column of Shearwall

Seismic grade Grade I (Intensity 9) Grade I (Intensity 6 and 7) Grade II and Ill

Axial compression ratio limit value 0.4 0.5 0.6

Note: The axial compression ratio of wall column refers to the ratio of the design value of wall axial pressure under the action of the

representative value of the gravity load to the product of the total sectional area of the wall column and the design val ue of axial
compressive strength of concrete.

7.2.14 Boundary members shall be arranged at both ends of the shearwall and both sides of the
opening and shall meet the fo llowing requirements:

1 When the axial compression ratio of the column bottom section on the base wall of Grade I,
II and III shearwall is larger than those specified in Table 7 .2.14, and those of the shearwall of pa1tial
frame-supported shearwall structure, constrained boundary members shall be arranged on the bottom
reinforced part and the adjacent upper story, constrained boundary members shall meet the
requirements of A1ticle 7 .2 .15 of this specification;

2 In addition to those positions listed in the Item 1 of this A1ticle, shearwall shall be arranged
w ith structural boundary members according to Article 7.2.16 of this specification;

3 The shearwall of Grade B height tall buildings should be arranged with 1-2 storys of
intermediate story on the constrained boundary member story and structural boundary member story,
78
the configuration requirements of the stirrup of boundary members on the intennediate story may be
below the requ iements of constrained boundary member, but shall be above the requirements of
structural boundary member.

Table 7.2. 14 Max imum A xial Compression Ratio ofShearwalls May N ot be Arranged with Constrained Boun dary

Members

Grade or intensity Grade I (Intensity 9 ) Grade I (Intensity 6 and 7 ) Grade II and lil

Axial compression ratio 0.1 0.2 0.3

7.2.15 Tconstrained boundary members of shearwall may include hidden column, column end and
flange walls (Figure 7 .2. 15), and they shall meet the following requi rements:

1 The length le of constrained boundary members along wall column and the stump characteristic
value Av of stirrup shall meet the requirements specified in Table 7.2.15, and the volumetric stirrup
ratio Pv shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

Pv =A_.£_
v t
(7.2 .1 5)
j yv

Where Pv--Volumetric stirrup ratio of stirrup. It may be counted in stirrup, tie bar and horizontally
distributed steel reinforcementmeet the structure requirements, and the volumetric
stirrup ratio of horizontally distributed steel reinforcement counted in shall not be
30% greater than the stirrup ratio of the total volume;

Av--Stirrup characteristic value of constrained boundary member;

fc--Design value of the ax ial compressive strength of concrete; the design value of C35
axial compressive strength of concrete shall be taken if the concrete strength grade is
lower than C35 ;

/ yv--Design value of tensile strength of stirrup,tie bar or horizontally and vertically

distri buted reinforcement.

Table 7.2. 15 Length of le of Constrained Boundary Member Along Wall Col umn a nd Its St irrup Characteristic

Value

Grade I (Intensity 9 ) Grade I (Intensity 6, 7, 8) Grade II and lil

Item
JIN'5;0.2 JIN>0.2 f/N'5;0.3 f/N>0.3 f/N'5;0.4 /IN>0.4

Hidden column 0.20h,. 0.25h,. 0.15h,. 0.20hw O. l 5hw 0.20hw

lc(flange wall or end column) O.l5h,. 0.20h,. O. lOh,. 0.15h,. O.l Oh,. O.l 5h,.

},,. 0. 12 0.20 0.12 0.20 0.12 0.20

Note: 1 /IN is the axi al compression ratio of wall column under the action of the representative value of gravity load ; hw is the length
of wall column;

2 If the length of flange wall for seismic wall is less than 3 times of the fl ange wall thi ckness or the length of the section of

end col umn is less than 2 times of the wall thickness, they shall be looked up according to the condition of no flange wall or

end column ;

3 I, is the length (Figure 7.2. 15) along the wall column of the constrained boundary members. as for as for, it shall notbe less

79
 than the wall thickness and 400mm: if fl ange wall or end column is arranged, it shall not be less than the thickness of fl ange
wall or the height of section of end column along the wall column plus 300mm.

Stirrup or tie bar )!,.=).) 2

Stirrup )" Stirrup or tie bar ).\=J./2 0
,------ I .::;,- 0
M

~~~:4??l~~'~]~]==~+::J:
r- 1 /\I

. ""'
.::;,- "O

~ -<::
I
h. I ~ 0
0

iand2:~00 t I. .::;,-
<" I
-0
M
/\I
"O
""'
(a) Hidden column b, L b,. L
J 1
le and 2:300 i
Stirrup)., (b) With flange wall

(c) With column end

(d) Conner wall (L wall)

Figure 7.2.15 Constrained Boundary Members of Shearwall

2 As for the ve1tical steel reinforcement of the shaded area (Figure 7 .2.15) of constrained
boundary member for shearwall, in addition to the requirements of the calculationof compression
load-bearing capacity of normal section, its reinforcement ratio shall not be less than 1.2%, 1.0% and
1.0% respectively when it is Grade I, II and JTI, and shall not be less than the 8016, 6016 and 60 14
reinforcement (0 represents rei nforce mentd iameter);

3 As for the spacing of stirrup or t ie bar along verticle direction in constrained boundary
members, Gradel should not be larger than l 00111111, and Grade II and III should not be larger than
150mm; the spacing of stirrup leg of stirrup and tie bar along horizontal direction should not be larger
than 300mm, ans shall not be larger than 2 times of vertical steel reinforcement spacing.

7.2.16 The range of structural boundary members of shearwall should be adopted according to the
shaded area of Figure 7.2.16, and its minimum reinforcement shal l meet the requirements of Table
7.2.16, and shall meet the following requirements:

1 Ve1tical reinforcement shall meet the requirements of compression (tension) bearing capacity
of normal section;

2 When the end column is beared concentrated load, the vertical steel reinforcement, stirrup
diameter and spacing shall meet corresponding requirements of frame column;

3 The spacing of stirrup legs of stirrup, tie bar along horizontal direction should not be larger
than 300mm, ans shall not be larger than 2 times of vertical steel reinforcement spacing;

4 In the seismic design, as for shearwall (tube) w ith towers linked with connective structure (s),
split-level structure and Grade B height tall building, the minimum reinforcement structural boundary
members shall meet the following requirements:
80
 1) The mm1mum of vertical steel reinforcement shall be adopted with an increase of
0.00 lAc comparing to the values in Table 7 .2.16;

2) The reinforcement scope of st irrup should take the shaded area m Figure 7.2.16, the
stirrup characteristic value Av should not be less than 0.1.

5 As for non-seismic designed shearwall, the wall column end shall be arranged with longitudinal
reinforcement which is not less than 4012, and the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 6mm, the
spacing should not be larger than 250mm .

Table 7.2.16 Minimum Reinforcement Requirements of Structural Boundary Members fo r Shearwall

Bottom reinforced part

Seismic grade Minimum of vertical steel reinforcement (taking Stirrup

the larger value) Mini mum diameter (mm) Maximum vertical spacing (mm)

[ O.OIOA,,6016 8 100

ll O.OOSA,.6014 8 150

III 0.006A,.6ol 2 6 150

IV 0.005A,,4ol2 6 200

Other parts

Seismic grade Minimum of vertical steel reinforcement (taking Tie bar

the larger value) Minimum diameter (mm) Maxi mum vertical spacing (mm)

I 0.008A,,6ol4 8 150

11 o.006iJ,,6012 8 200

Ill 0.005A,,4ol2 6 200

IV 0.004A,,4ol2 6 250

Note: l A, is the sectional area of structural boundary member, that is Figure 7.2.16 the shaded area of shearwall sect ion;

2 0 represents reinforcement diameter.

3 Stirrup should be adopted at the corner of other parts.

Figure 7.2.16 Scope of Structural Boundary Members of Shearwall

7.2.17 The reinforcement ratio of vertically and horizontally distributed steel reinforcement of
sheanvall shall not be lee than 0.25% when it is Grade I, II and III.

7.2.18 The spacing of vertically and horizontally distributed steel reinforcement of shearwall all
should not be larger than 300mm, and the diameter shall not be less than 8. The diameter of vertically
horizontally distributed steel reinforcement should not be larger than 1/10 of the wall thickness.

7.2.19 The reinforcement ratio of horizontally and ve11ically distributed steel reinforcement of garret

81
shearwall, shearwall of staircase and elevator hoistway in long rectangular plane building,longitudinal
shearwall of end bay and end gable wall all shall not be less than 0.25%, and spacing all shall not be
larger than 200mm.

7.2.20 The anchorage and connection of reinforcement of shearwall shall meet the following
requirements:

1 In non-seismic design, the minimum anchorage length of longitudinal reinforcement of

shearwall shall be taken as la; in seismic design, the minimum anchorage length of longitudinal
reinforcement of shearwall shall be taken as laE· The value of l., laE shall meet relevant requirements of
Section 6.5 of this specification.

2 When overlapping connection is adopted for vertically and horizontally distributed steel
reinforcement of shearwall (Figure 7 .2.2), the lapping position of the bottom reinforced part of Grade
I and II shearwall shall be staggered; the quantity of reinforcement connected on the same section
should not exceed 50%of the total quantity, and the staggered clear distance should not be less than
500mm; other reinforcements of shearwall may be connected on the same section. The overlapping
length of distributed steel reinforcement shall not be less than l .2la in non-seismic des ign, and shall
not be less than 1.2/aE inseismic design .

.,

f f :: · ·oo l? 1 11_,
1

Figure 7.2.20 Overlapping Connection of Distributed Steel Reinforcement of Shearwall

I-Vertically distributed steel reinforcement:

2-Horizomally distributed steel reinforcement: /,E in the figure shall be taken as I, in non-seismic design

3 The requirements of connection and anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement in hidden column

and end column should be the same with those of frame column, should meet relevant requirements of
Section 6.5 of this specification.

7 .2.21 The design value of shear force V of the sections on the both end of connection beam shal 1 be
determined according to the following requirements:

1 The connection beam of non-seismic designed and Grade IV shearwall shall take the design
value of conbined shear force considering horizontal wind load and horizontal earthquake action.

2 As for the connection beam of Grade I, 11 , and III shearwall, the design value of conbined
shear force shall be determined according to Formula (7.2.21), the connection beam of Grade I
shearwall when it is Intensity 9 shall be determined according to Formu la (7.2.21 -2).

(7.2.21 -1 )

(7.2 .21-2)

82
Where M~ , M~ - -Respectively the design value of clockwise or counterclockwise bending
moment on the right and left end section of connection beam ;

M~ua, M~ua --Respectively the bending moment value corresponding to actual arranged
flexural load-bearing capacity in clockwise or counterclockwise direction at
left and right end of connecting beam, which shall be calculated according to
actual arranged area of steel reinforcement (including compression steel
reinforcements) and the standard value for material strength and in consideration
of seismic adjustment coefficient of load-bearing capacity;

ln---Clear span of connection beam;

VGb--Design value of the axial force of the beam end under the action of the gravity
load representative value according to simple-supported beam;

lfvb--Enhancement coefficient of shear forceof connection beam; it shall take 1.3

for Grade I, 1.2 for Grade II, 1.1 for Grade III.

7.2.22 Thedesign value of section shear force of connection beam shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary design condition

(7.2 .22-1)

2 Seismic design conditions

Connection beam with a span-height ratio larger than 2.5

(7.2.22-2)

Connection beam with a span-height ratio not larger than 2.5

(7.2.22-3)

Where V--Design value of section shear force of connection beam adjusted according to Article
7.2.21 of this specification;

bb-- Section width of connection beam;

hbo - -Effective depth of connecting beam section;

/3c--Inf1uence coefficient of concrete strength; see Article 6.2.6 of this specification.

7.2.23 The inclined section shear bearing capacity of connection beam shal l meet the following
requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary design condition

(7.2.23- 1)

83
 2 Seismic design conditions

Connection beam with a span-height ratio larger than 2.5

(7.2.23 -2)

Connection beam with a span-height ratio not larger than 2.5

(7.2.23 -3)

Where V--Design value of section shear force of connection beam adjusted according to Article
7.2.21 of this specification.

7.2.24 As for connection beam w ith a span-height ratio (//hb) not larger than 1.5, the minimum ratio
of re inforcement of its longitudinal reinforcement may be taken as 0.2% in non-seismic design, and
the mi nimum ratio of reinforcement of its longitudinal rei nforcement should meet the requi rements of
Table 7 .2 .24; as for connection beam with a span-height ratio larger than l.5, the m inimum ratio of
reinforcement of its longitudinal reinforcement may be adopted according to the requ irements of
frame beam.

Ta ble 7.2.24 M in imum Ratio of Reinfo rcement of Longitudinal Reinforcement of Conn ect ion Beam with a
Spa n-heig ht Ratio not Larger Tha n 1.5 (%)

Span-height rauo Minimum ratio of reinforcement (taktng the larger value)

1/11,,S0.5 0 20. 45/, lj;

0.5</lh,,SI .5 0.25. 55/,!j;

7.2.25 In the connection beam of shearwall structure, the maxim um rei nforcement ratio of the
s ingle-side longitudinal reinforcement of top surface a nd bottom surface should not be larger than
2.5% in non-seismic design; the maximum reinforcement ratio of single-side lo ngitudinal re inforcement
of top s urface bottom surface sho uld meet the requi rements of Table 7.2.25. If dissatisfied, the strong
shear weak bending calculation of connection beam shall be carried o ut according to the actual
arranged reinforcement.

Table 7.2.25 Maximum Reinforcement Ratio of Lo ngitudin a l Reinforcement of Co nnection Beam(%)

Span-height ratio Maximum reinforcement ratto

/lh,,S 1.0 0.6

1.0</lh,,sl.O 1.2

2 O<llhS.5 1.5

7.2.26 When the connection beam of shear wall cannot meet th e requirements of A rticle 7.2.22 of
th is specification, the fo llowing measures m ay be taken:

1 Reduce the section height of connection beam or or adopt other measure measu res red ucing
the rigidity of connection beam.

2 The plasticity amplitude modulation of bending moment of connection beam for seismic
84
designed shear wall ; as for connection beam whose rigidity has already been reduced in internal force
calculation according to the requirements of Article 5.2. l of this specification, its bending moment
value should not be modulated again, or restricted the amplitude modulation range. On this occasion,
the corresponding design value of shear force after amplitude modulation of bending moment shall be
taken to check if it meets the requirements of Article 7 .2.22 of this specification; the design value of
bending moment of other connection beams and wall columns in shearwall should be increased
according to the quanity of moduiated connection beams.

3 When the destruction of connection beam has no effect on the bearing of vertical load,
second time analysis of internai force under frequent earthquake action may be carried out according
to the calculation diagrams of independent wall column, the wall column section shall calculate
reinforcement according to the the larger value of the twice calcu lations.

7.2.27 The reinforcement detailing (Figure 7.2.27) of connection beam shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The length of longitudinal horizontal reinforcement which is on the top surface and bottom
surface of connection beam, stretching into wall column shall not be Jess than laE in the seismic design,
and shall not be less than la in non-seismic design, and both of them shall not be less than 600mm .
Top floor

1111111 1111111
~ 15 0?--.f
?-l..1 ?-/,r
?- 600 :;:? 600

Figure 7.2.27 The Schematic Diagram of Reinforcement Structure for Connection Beam
Note: /,E in the fi gure shall be taken as I, in non-seismic design

2 ln seismic design the structure of full -length stirrup along connection beam shall meet the
construction requirements of stirrup in the stirrup densified area on the beam end of frame beam in
Article 6.3 .2 of this specification; in non-seismic design, the diameter of full-length stirrup along
connection beam shall not be less than 6mm, and the spacing shall not be greater than l 50mm.

3 As for top floor connection beam within the length range of longitudinal horizontal reinforcement
stretch ing into wall column, stirrups with spacing not being greater than 200mm shall be arranged; in
addition, the diameter shall be the same w ith connection beam stirrup one.

4 The horizontally distributed steel reinforcementof wall co lumn within the altitude range of
connection beam shall be pulled through in the connection beam as the waist reinforcement of
connection beam. Where the section height of connection beam is larger than 700mm, the diameter of
85
waist reinforcement on the both sides shall not be less than 8mm, and the spacing shall not be greater
than 200mm; for connection beam with a span-height ratio not larger than 2.5, the rei nforcement ratio
of total area of the waist reinforcements on the both side shall not be less than 0.3%.

7.2.28 The open ing of shear wall and connection beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 Where the shear wall has area a small opening not less than 800mm in length, and the
influence is not taken account into the holistic calculation of the structure, strengthening steel
reinforcement shall be arranged the the upper and lower, right and left side of the opening; the
diameter of strengthening steel reinforcement shall not be less than 12mm, and the sectional area shall
not be less than the area of intercepted horizontally distributed steel reinforcement and ve11ically
distributed steel reinforcement (Figure 7.2.28 a).

2 Piping crossing connection beam should be buried with sleeve. and the effective depth of
section on the up and down side of the opening should not be less than 1/3 of beam height, and should
not be less than 200mm: the section impaired by the openi ng shall be carried out with bearing-
capacity checking calcu lation; strengthening longitudinal reinforcement and stirrup shall be arranged
on he opening (Figure 7.2.28 b); the diameter of strengthening longitudinal reinforcement shall not be
less than I 2mm.

\ ..

I o;;:
I L
..:::

i .:-;: I i ·~ 8CK) I ? {,, l

(a) Opening of shearwall (b) Opening of conection beam

F igure 7.2.28 The schematic diagram of strengthening reinforcement on the opening

I-Strengthening reinforcement around the wall opening;

2-Strengthemng longitudinal stirrup on the up and down side of the opening of connection beam;

3-Strengthening stirrup on the opening of connection beam; laE in the fi gure shall be taken as/" in non-seismic design

86
 8 Design of Frame-shear Wall Structure

8.1 General Requirement

8.1.1 In addition to those specified in this chapter, the structural layout, computational analysis,
section design and construction requirements of frame-shearwall structure and slab-column shearwall
structure shall also meet the relevant requirements of Chapters 3, 5, 6 and 7 of this specification.

8.1.2 Frame-shearwall structure may adoptthe following types :

1 Separately arrange the frame and shear wall (single wall, linked pier wall or smaller axe) be
arranged;

2 Embed shear wall (shear wall with frame) in several spans of the frame structure;

3 Continously and respectively arrange frame and shear wall in single sheet lateral-force-
resisting structure;

4 The mixture of the above-mentioned two or three form s.

8.1.3 The corresponding design method for seismic-designed frame-shearwall structure shall be
determined according to the ratio of the seismic overturning moment the structure bottom frame
bearing and the total seismic overtuurning moment of the structure, and the followi ng requirements
shall be met:

1 When the seismic ove1tuurning moment the frame bearing is not larger than 10% of the total
seismic overtuurning moment of structure, it shall be designed according to shearwall structure, and
the frame shall be designed according to the frame of frame-shearwall structure;

2 When the seismic overtuurning moment the frame bearing is larger than 10%, but not larger
than 50% of the total seismic overtuurn ing moment of structure, it shall be designed according to
frame-shearwall structure:

3 When the seismic overtuurning moment the frame bearing is larger than 50%, but not larger
than 80% of the total seismic ove11uurning moment of structure, it shall be designed according to
frame-shearwall structure; the maximum applicable height may be appropriate ly added compared with
frame structure, and the seismic grade and axial compression ratio limit of frame should be adopted
according to the requirements of frame structure;

4 When the seismic overtuurn ing moment the frame bearing is larger than 80% of the total
seismic ove1tuurning moment of structure, it shall be designed according to frame-shearwall structure,
but the maximum applicable height shall be adopted according to frame structure, and the seismic
grade and axial compression ratio limit of frame should be adopted according to the requi rements of
frame structure. W hen the inter-story drift angle of structure cannot meet the requirements of frame-
shearwall structure, the seismic performance of the structure shall be analyzed and demonstrated
according to the relevant requirements of Section 3.11 of this specification.

8.1.4 In seismic design, the total shear force of frame on each story of frame-shearwall structure
corresponding to the standard value of earthquake action shall meet the fo llowing requirements:

1 For the story meet the requirements of Formula (8.1.4), the total shear force of frame does
87
not need adjustment, wh ile fo r those don't, the total shear force of frame shall be adopted according to
the smaller value of between 0.2 Vo and 1.5 Vr, max;

Vi2:0.2 Vo (8 .1.4)

Where Vo--For the structure whose frame column quantity is basically constant from down to
up, the total shear force of the structure corresponding to the standard value of seismic
action shall be adopted; for structure whose frame column quantity changing
regularly section by section, the total shear force of the substmcture of each section
corresponding to the standard value of seismic action shall be adopted;

Vi-The unjusted total seismic shear force corresponding to the standard value of
earthquake action on the frame of each story (or each story w ithin a certain section);

Vr. max--For the structure whose frame column quantity is basically constant from down to
up, the maximum total shear force of the structure corresponding to the standard
value of seismic action and beared by the unjustified frameof each story shall be
adopted; for structure whose frame co lumn quantity changing regularly segment by
segment,the maximum total shear force of the structure corresponding to the
standard value of seismic action and beared by the unjustified frame of each story
shall be adopted.

2 After the total seism ic shear force the frames of each story bearing being adjusted according
to Item 1 of this A1tic le, the shear fo rce and end standard value of bending moment of each frame
column and the frame beams connected with them shall be adjusted according to the ratio of the total
shear force before and after the adjustment; the standard value of axial force of frame column may not
be adjusted;

3 When calculating seismic action according to mode-decomposition response spectrum method,

the adjustment specified in Item I of this A rticle may be carried out after modal combination, and
under the premise of meeting the requirement about the minimum seismic shear coeffic ient in Atticle
4.3 .12 of this specification.

8.1.5 Frame-sheanvall structure shall be designed to be bidirectional lateral resistant system;

shear wall shall be arranged on the two main axes of structure in seismic design.

8.1.6 In frame-shearwall structure, hinged connection shall not be adotpted between major structure
members except some specific joints; the center line of beam and column or column and shear wall
should be coincident; where frame beam and the column center line is deviate from each other, the
relevant requirements of Article 6.1 .7 of this specification shall be met.

8.1. 7 The layout of shearwall in frame-shearwall structure should meet the following requirements:

1 Shear wall should be uniformly arranged near the constructions, staircase, elevator hoistway.
posit ions with larger planeform changes and permanent load; the shear wall spacing should not be too
large;

2 Where the unevenness of planeform is relatively big, shear wall should be arranged near the
end of the projecting po1tion;

3 Longitudinal and horizontal shearwall should be L-shaped, T-shape and [-shaped etc.;

88
 4 The horizontal shear force the single shear wall bottom bearing shall not exceed 30% of the
total horizontal shear fo rce of the structure bottom;

5 Shear wall should penetrate the total height of construction, and rigidity mutation should be
avoided; the opening should be vertically aligned ;

6 Ve1tical axes in staircase or elevator hoistway should be arranged in combination with the
near lateral-force-resisting structure;

7 In the seismic design, the layout of shearwall should make the lateral rigidity on the direction
of each main axe of the structure approximate.

8.1.8 For the structure with long rectangular plane or the plane with a long part, the layout of shear
wall should also meet the following requirements:

1 The spacing of horizontal shear wall along the long direction should meet the requirements of
Table 8. 1.8; if there are relatively big openings on the floor between these shear walls, the spacing of
shear wall shall be reduced properly.

2 Longitudinal shear walls should not be arranged in concentration at the ends of building.

Table 8.1.8 Shear Wall Spacing (m)

Seismic precautionary intensity

Non·seismic design
floor type Intensity 6, intensity 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9
(take the smaller value)
(take the smaller value) (take the smaller value) (take the smaller value)

Cast-m-situ 5.08. 60 4.08, 50 3.08, 40 2.08, 30

Asscmble-monolith1c 3.58, 50 3.08, 40 2.58, 30 -

Note: I 8 in Table B is the floor width of between shear walls (m);

2 The east-in-situ story of assembled monolithic floor shall meet the relevant requirements of Article 3.6.2 of this speci fication;

3 Folding ftoorslab whose cast-in-situ story with a thickness larger than 60mm may be considered as cast-in-situ slab;

4 Where the end of building is not arranged with shear wall, the distance between the first shear wal l and building end should
not be larger than 112 of the shear wall spacing in this Table.

8.1.9 The layout of slab-column shearwall structure shall meet the following requirements :

1 Shear wall of tube or on the direction oftwo main axe shall be arranged to fonn bi-directional
lateral resistant system, and eccentricity of structural rigidity shal l be avoided, thereinto shear wall or
tube shall respectively meet the relevant requirements of Chapter 7 and Chapter 9 of this specification,
and concealed beams shall be arranged on each story of the corresponding shear wall or tube.

2 In the seism ic design, the periphery of building shall be arranged with boundary beam to
form perimeter frame, and beam and slab structure should be adopted for the top of building and the
top plate of basement.

3 Where there is big opening such as staircase or elevator hoistway, frame beams or edge
beams should be arranged surround the opening.

4 Flat slab floor may adopt slab without column cap (column bracket) or s lab with column cap
(column bracket) according to the requirements of bearing capacity and deformation. The length and

89
thickness of column bracket slab shall be determined according to calculation; the length on each
direction should not be less than I16 of the slab span, and the thickness should not be less than I/4 of
the slab thickness. Slab with column bracket should be adopted under Intensity 7, and slab with
column bracket shall be adopted under Intensity 8; in this case, the length of each bracket slab
direction should not be less than the sum of width and 4 times slab thickness of the column section on
the same direction.

5 The ratio of the thickness and the long span of bi-directional flat slab floor should not be less
than those specified in Table 8.1.9.

Table 8.1.9 The Minimum Ratio of the Thickness and Long Span of Bi-directional Flat Slab Floor

Non- prcstrcss floorslab Prestress floorslab

Slab without column bracket Slab with column bracket Slab without column bracket Slab with column bracket

1/30 1/35 1/40 1/45

8.1.10 In wind resistance design, tube or shear wall of each story in slab-column shearwall structure
shall be able to bear the shear force not less than 80% of that the story bearing in the corresponding
direction under the action of wind load; in the seimic design, it shal l be able to bear the seismic shear
force the story bearing in all the corresponding directions of each story, wh ile the slab column of each
story shall also be able to bear a seismic shear force not less than 20% of that the story bearing in the
corresponding directions, and the relevant seismic construction requirements shall be met.

8.2 Strength Design and Detailing

8.2.1 For frame-shear wall structure and slab-column sheanvall structure, the reinforcement
ratio of vertical and horizontally distributed steel reinforcement in shear wall shall not be less
than 0.25% in the seismic design, and not be less than 0.20% in non-seismic design, and shall be
arranded in double row at least. Tie bars shall be arranged between each row of distributing bar,
and the diameter of tie bar shall not be less than 6mm, and the spacing shall not be greater than
600mm.

8.2.2 The structure of shear wall with frame shall meet the following requirements:

1 The section thickness of shear wall with frame shall meet the requirements of stability
calculation of wall in Appendix D of this specification, and shall meet the following requirements:

1) In the seismic design, the bottom reinforced pati of Grade I and II shear wall shall not be
less than 200mm;

2) It shall not be less than 160mm in other situations except that in 1) of this Item.

2 The horizontal steel reinforcement of shear wall shall be all anchored into frame column, and
the anchorage length shall not be less than la (non-seismic design) or /aF. (seismic design);

3 Frame beam coi ncident with shear wall may either be reserved or made into concealed beam
with the same width and wall thickness; the section height of concealed beam may either be taken as 2
times of wall thickness or be the same height with the frame beam section; the reinforcement of
concealed beam may be arranged according to the structure, and shall meet the requirements of
minimum reinforcement of the corresponding seismic grade of ordinary frame beams;

90
 4 The section of shear wall should be designed as I-shape, and the longitudinal bearing force
reinforcement of the end shal I be arranged in the column section of the frame ;

5 The column section of frame the same with the sections of other columns of the frame which
shall meet the relevant requirements of constructional reinforcement of frame column in Chapter 6 of
this specification; the stirrups of frame column of bottom reinforced part of shear wall should be
<lensed along overall height; where the opening on the shear wall with frame is near the frame column,
the stirrups of frame column should be <lensed along overall height.

8.2.3 The design of slab-column shearwall structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 Regular slab-column structure in structural analysis may adopt equal-substitute frame method,
and the width of equal-substitute beam should be 1/4 respectively away from the columns on both
sides vertical to the equal-substitute frame ; contiunum finite element spatial model should be adopted
to carry out more accurate computational analysis.

2 The punching stress of floorslab on the peripheral critical section of column should not
exceed 0. 7j;, punching resistant steel reinforcement or shear resistant stud shall be arranged when it
does; when seimsic action leads to reverse sign of bending moment of support for column strip, the
reverse direction shall also be rechecked. The punching bearing capacity of slab-column joint may be
calculated according to the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of
Concrete Structures" GB 50010, and the shear force effect produced by the action of unbalanced
bend ing moment of joints shall be considered.

3 The continuous steel reinforcements at slab bottom shall be arranged through the column
section along the directions of two major axes, and the gross sectional area of the reinforcements shall
meet requirements of the following Formula:

(8.2.3)

Where A5- -The gross cross-sectional area of continuous steel reinforcements at slab bottom
through the column section;

NG--The design value of axial compressive force on the column under the action of the
representative value of the gravity load on the floor slab of this story, which should
be counted into ve1iical seismic effect under Intensity 8;

J;.--The design value of tensile strength of continuous steel reinforcements at slab

bottom through the column section.

8.2.4 In slab-column shearwall structure, structure design of slab shall meet the following.requirements:

1 In the seismic design, structure concealed beams shall be arranged in the column strip, and
the width of concealed beams shall take the sum of column width and 1.5 times of slab thickness on
both sides, the sectional area of steel reinforcement in the upper part of concealed beam support
should not be less than 50% of the sectional area of column strip reinforcement, and the steel
reinforcement shall be pulled in full span; the reinforcement at the bottom of concealed beam shall not
be less than 1/2 of the upper steel reinforcement. For the layout of the stirrups of concealed beam,
when calculation is not required, the diameter shall not be less than 8mm, the spacing should not be
larger than 3h0/4, the spacing of stirrup legs should not be larger than 2ho; when calculation is
required, it shall be determined according to calculation, and the diameter shall not be less than 1Omm,
91
the spacing should not be larger than h0/2, two the spacing of stirrup legs should not be larger than
l.5h0 .

2 In the arrangement of column bracket slab, the bracket slab bottom shall be arranged with
constructional reinforcement in non-seismic design; the reinforcement at the bottom of bracket slab
shall be determined according to calculation, and shall meet the requirements of seismic anchoring.
When calculating the support reinforcement of column strip, favourable effect of the thickness of
constructional steel reinforcement may be considered.

3 When opening partial opening for beamless floor slab, the bearing capacity and rigidity shall
be calculated. If no adhocanalysis is carried out, the size of a single hole opened in different positions
of the slab shall meet the requirements of Figure 8.2.4. When opening several holes in the same
position, the sum of width of each hole on the same section shall not be greater than the allowable
width of a single hole on this position. All the hole edges shall be arranged with strengthening steel
reinforcement.

Column stnp Column stnp Column strip

I ..: . .~ ,

~
r ___
' ' I

-;--t+--r t
I ----~-
_J_ - -,
·~ I

i~ ! ::::
~
....;
I 1 I I :
~ I :-{Li] : I t
-
f"l

§ - I I I ~ I i I ....;
....;

8 I I I '. I

!
~ ~
J rr!! ~tfr[) l !
I a I
-r
7.
....;

Gl-. L_+- __L ____ _i __ L_ _ ,

l '~ L ,' "_

Figure 8.2.4 Opening Requirements for Beam less Floor Slab

Note: Hole I: a5.aJ4 and a5tl2, b5ohcl4 and b912. among which, a is the dimension of the short side of the open mg, b is the dimension
of the long side of the opening, a, is the column width corresponding to the short side direction of the opening, b, is the column
width corresponding to the long side direction of the opening, and t is the slab thickness. Hole 2: a91il4 and b<;B 1/4: llole 3:
a91i/4 and bS.B214.

92
 9 Design of Tube Structure

9.1 General Requirement

9.1.1 This chapter is applicable to reinforced-concrete frame core tube structure and tube- in-tube
structure, and may be reference for other types of tube structure. In addition to the requirements of
this Chapter, the section design and constructional measures of various members of tube structure
shall meet the relevant requirements of Chapters 6-8 of this specification.

9.1.2 The height of tube-in-tube structure should not be less than 80m, and the height-width ratio
should not be less than 3. Frame-corewall structure whose height is not less than or equal to 60m may
be designed according to frame-shear wall structure.

9.1.3 Where the column of the adjacent storys is not penetrating, members such as transfer beam
shall be installed. The structure design of transfer members shall meet the relevant requirements of
Chapter I 0 of this specification.

9.1.4 The floor exterior angle of tube structure should be arranged with double-layer-double-
direction reinforcement (Figure 9.1.4), si ngle-story unidirectional reinforcement ratio should not be
less than 0.3%; the reinforcement diameter shall not be less than 8mm; the spacing shall not be greater
than l SOmm ; the reinforcement scope should not be less than 1/3 of the distance between outside
frame (or outer tube) and the middle distance of external wal l of inner tube and 3m .

•
II
I
I· ->:-.-

•
,I I

I · I 5!Jmm
..:..

.
ll
-~· -1
;-;,
-+++++++++++++-+
-+++++++++-+++-+-+ -
_....,_,r,
!
~ .llif:it:t:+1f:;:+:l+t=l+l-~~-.....
_ ~~~~~---i---1 ----{..
·· / ' i
1
o ' 3ll0 ll 111 1

Figure 9. 1.4 Schematic Diagram of Reinforcement fo r Slab Corner

9.1.5 The midd le distance between the external wall and outer frame column of core tube or inner
tube shall not be larger than I Sm in non-seismic design, and measures such as adding inner column
should be adopted where the seismic des ign is larger than l 2m.

9.1.6 The section shape of shear force wall in core tube or inner tube shou ld be simple; the wal ls
w ith complex section shapes may be checked the section des ign according to the stress.

9.1.7 The design of the core tube or inner tube of tube structure shall meet the fo llowing requirements:
93
 1 Wall columns should be in uniform and symmetrical layout;

2 The tube corner nearby should not carry out opening, when it is inevitable, the distance
between the internal wall of tube corner and the opening shall not be Jess than 500mm and the larger
value of the section thickness of the opened wall;

3 For tube wall, the wall stability shall be calculated according to Appendix D of this
specification; the external wall thickness shall not be less than 200mm, and the internal wall thickness
shall not be less than 160mm; support-wall column or supporting wall may be arranged if necessary;

4 The horizontal and vertical reinforcement of tube wall shall not be less than two rows, and
the minimum reinforcement ratio shall meet the requirements of A1ticle 7.2.17 of this specification;

5 In the seismic design. the connection beam of core tube and inner tube should be arranged
with diagonal reinforcement or intersecting concealed bracing;

6 The height of reinforced pa1t of tube wall, axial compression ratio limit, boundary member
arrangement and section design shall meet the relevant req uirements of Chapter 7 of this specification.

9.1.8 The external wall of core tube or inner tube shou ld not be carry out opening continuously in
horizontal direction, and the section height of wall columns between holes should not be less than
l .2m; where the ratio of section height and thickness of wall columns between holes is less than 4.
section design should be carried out according to frame columns.

9.1.9 In the seismic design, the axial compression ratio limit of frame tube column and frame
column may be adopted according to the requirements of frame-shear wall structure.

9.1.10 Floor main beam should not be placed on the connection beam of core tube or inner tube.

9.1.11 In the seismic design, for the frame of tube structure, the standard value of story seismic
shear force distributed according to lateral rigidity shall meet the following requirements:

1 The maximum standard value of story seismic shear force distribbuted to frame should not be
less than 10% of the total standard value of seismic shear force of the structure bottom.

2 When the maximum standard value of seismic shear force distribbuted to frame is less than
10% of the total standard val ue of se ismic shear force of the structure bottom, the standard value of
seismic shear force on the frames on each story shall be raised to 15% of the total standard value of
seismic shear force of the structure bottom; in this case, the standard value of seismic shear force of
core-tube wall on each story should be multiplied by enhancement coefficient l.l , but may not be
larger than the total standard value of seismic shear force of the structure bottom ; the seismic
structural measures of wall shall be adopted by increasing one grade; the Special Grade I may not be
increased.

3 When the standard value of seismic shear force distribbuted to frame is less than 20% of the
total standard value of seism ic shear force of the structure bottom, but the maximum not is less than
10% of the total standard val ue of seismic shear force of the structure bottom, it shall be adjusted
according to the smaller val ue between 20% of the standard value of seismic shear force and 1.5 times
of the maximum standard value of seismic shear force of the structure bottom.

After adjusting the seismic shear force of frame column according to Item 2 or Item 3 of this
Article, the bending moment at the frame column end and the bending moment at the frame beam end
94
connected with it and the shear force shall be adjusted correspondingly.

Where there is story with outriggers and/or belt members, the maximum standard value of
standard value of seismic shear force distribbuted to frame shall not include the frame shear force of
reinforcement layer and its upper-and-lower layers.

9.2 Frame-corewall Structure

9.2.1 Core tube should penetrate the overall height of building. The width of core tube should not be
less than 1/12 of the total height of tube; where tube structure is arranged with corner tube, shear wall
or members reinforcing the integral rigidity of structure, the width of core tube may be reduced properly.

9.2.2 The design of core-tube wall in seismic design shall meet the following requirements:

1 The reinforcement ratio of horizontally and ve1tically distributed steel reinforcement for the
main wall of bottom reinforced part should not be Jess than 0.30%;

2 The length of restraining boundary structure of bottom reinforced part along wall column
should be taken 1/4 of the section height of wall column; stirrups shall be mainly adopted in the scope
of restraining boundary structure;

3 Restraining boundary members should be arranged on the positions above bottom the
reinforced part according to Article 7 .2.15 of this specification.

9.2.3 Frame beams must be arranged between the peripheral columns of frame-corewall
structure.

9.2.4 The sheared section of connection beam of core tube shall meet the requirements of A1ticle
9.3.6 of this specification, and the structure design shall meet the relevant requirements of Articles
9.3.9 and 9.3.8.

9.2.5 For frame-corewall structure off centered in inner tube, the structure shall be controlled under
the action of the specified seismic force in the consideration of occasional eccentricity influence; the
maximum horizontal displacement of story and inter-story displacement shall not be greater than 1.4
times of the story mean value; the ratio of first natural vibration period Ti based on structure torsion
and the first period T1 based on translation shall not be greater than 0.85, and the torsion component
r,
of should not be larger than 30%.

9.2.6 When the inner tube is offsetting and the length-width ratio is larger than 2, frame-double-tube
structure should be adopted.

9.2.7 When opening for the floorslab between the double tubes of frame-double-tube structure, the
effective floors lab w idth should not be less than 50% of the floors lab typical width; the floorslab near
openings shall be thickened, and adopted with doub le-layer-double-direction rei nforcement, the
unidirectional reinforcement ratio of each layer shall not be less than 0.25%; the floorslabs between
double tubes should be analyzed according to elastic slab.

9.3 Tube in Tube Structure

9.3.1 The plane shape of tube-in-tube structure shall be round, regular po lygon, elliptical or
rectangular etc .. The inner tube should be centered.
95
9.3.2 The height-width ratio of the rectangular plane should not be larger than 2.

9.3.3 The width of inner tube may be l /12-1/15 of the height, if there are other corner tubes or shear
walls, the plan size of inner tube may properly be reduced. Inner tubes shall penetrate the overall
height of build in, and the vertical rigidity should change uniformly.

9.3.4 Triangle plane should be cut corner. and the cutting corner length should not be less than 118
of the correspond ing side length, and the corner may be arranged with larger corner column or corner
tube; the cutting corner length of the inner tube should not be less than 1/10 of the corresponding side
length, and the tube wall at the cutting corner should be thickened properly.

9.3.5 The outer frame tube shall meet the following requirements:

1 The column space should not be larger than 4m, and the section long side of columns of
frame tube shall be arranged along tube wall; T-section may be adopted if necessary:

2 The area of opening shou ld not be larger than 60% of the wall suface area; the height-width
ratio of opening shou ld be similar to the ratio of story height and column space;

3 The section height of tube beam of outer frame may be taken as 1/4 of the clear distance of
column:

4 The sectional area of corner column may be taken as 1-2 times of the center column.

9.3.6 The section dimension of tube beam of outer frame and the connection beam of in ner tube
shall meet the follow ing requirements:

1 Permanent, temporary design condition

(9.3.6- 1)

2 Seismic design conditions

1) Where the span-height ratio is larger than 2.5

(9.3 .6-2)

2) Where the span-height ratio is not larger than 2.5

(9.3.6-3)

Where Vb- -The design value of shear force of outer frame tube beam or inner tube connection
beam;

bb--The section width of tube beam of outer frame tube beam or the connection beam of
inner h1be;

hb0--The section effective depth of tube beam of outer frame tube beam or connection
beam of inner tube;

fJc- -lntluence coefficient of concrete strength, which shall be taken in accordance with
96
 those specified in A11icle 6.2.6 of this specification.

9.3.7 The constructional reinforcement of outer frame tube beam and the inner tube connection
beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 In non-seismic design, the diameter of stirrups shall not be less than 8mm, and in the
seismic design, the diameter ofdiameter of stirrups shall not be less than lOmm.

2 In non-seismic design, the stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 150mm; in seismic
design, the stirrup spacing is constant along beam length, and shall not be greater than IOOmm;
when intersecting concealed bracing is arranged in beam, the stirrup spacing shall not be
greater than 200mm.

3 The diameter of upper and lower longitudinal reinforcement of frame tube shall not be
less than 16mm. The diameter of waist reinforcement shall not be less than lOmm; the waist
reinforcement spacing shall not be greater than 200mm.

9.3.8 Frame tube beam and inner tube connection beam whose span-height ratio is not larger than 2
should be arranged with diagonal reinforcement. Intersecting concealed bracing (Figure 9 .3 .8) shall be
adopted for frame tube beam and inner tube connection beam whose span-height ratio is not larger
than I , and shall meet the following requirements:

1 The sectional width of beam should not be less than 400mm;

.l

--'----~---

Figure 9.3.8 Reinforceme nt of Intersectin g Co ncealed Bracing in Beam

2 All the shear force shall be born by concealed bracing, each concealed bracing shall be
consist of at least 4 longitudinal reinforcements w hose diameter shall not be less than J 4mm; the total
area As shall be calculated according to the followi ng Formula:

1) Permanent, temporary design condition

A > Vb (9 .3.8- 1)
' - 2/Ysin a

2) Seismic design conditions

(9.3 .8-2)

97
Where a--Intersection angle between the concealed bracing and the horizantal line;

3 Rectangular stirrup or spiral stirrup shall be adopted to bind the longitudinal reinforcement of
concealed bracing on the two directions; the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 8mm, and the
stirrup spacing shall not be greater than l 50mm;

4 The length of longitudinal reinforcement stretching into vertical member shall not be less
than la 1 which may be taken as la in non-seismic design and 1.15/a in theseismic design.

5 The arrangement of ordinary stirrup in beam shall meet the construction requirements of
Article 9.3.7 of this specification.

98
 10 Design of Complicated Tall Buildings

10.1 General Requirement

10.1.1 The requirements of complex tall building in this charpter is applicable to those structures
with story with outriggers and/or belt members structures, split-level structures, connected structures
and vertical backsetting and overhanging structures.

10.1.2 Structures with transfer story or story with outriggers and/or belt members, split-level
structures and towers linked with connective structure (s) shall not be adopted in Intensity 9
seismic design.

10.1.3 In Intensity 7 and Intensity 8 seismic design, the height of split-story tall building of shearwall
structure shou ld not be larger than 80mand 60m respectively; the height of split-story tall building of
frame-shear wall structure shall not be greater than 80mand 60mrespectively. In the seismic design,
towers linked with connective structure (s) shall not be adopted for tall buildings in height Grade B;
for height Grade B tube-in-tube structure with transfer story, if wall frame consisted by shear wall is
adopted for the frame-supported story above of outer tube, the maximum applicable height shall be
properly reduced compared with the values specified in Table 3 .3 .1-2 of this specification.

10.1.4 Tall buildings with Intensity 7 and Intensity 8 seismic design should not simultaneously
adopt more than two complex tall buildings specified in Article 10. 1. 1 of this specification.

10.1.5 The computational analys is of complex tall building shall meet the relevant requirements of
Chapter 5 of this specification. The load carrying complex positions in complex tall building should
also be carried out with stress analysis, and with checking of reinforcement des ign according to stress.

10.2 Structure with Transfer Story

10.2.1 At the bottom of tall building, where the vertical members (shear wall, frame column) on the
upper stories cannot continuously penetrate to the ground directly, structure transfer stories shall be
arranged to form tall building with transfer stories. The design of shearwall structure (Partial frame-
supponed shearwall structure) with carrying column transfer story and that of tube structure with
column transfer story are specified in this section.

10.2.2 For tall building with transfer story, the height of reinforced part at the bottom shall be
counted from the top plate of basement; it shall be taken the height to the two layers above transfer
story and should not be less than 1110 of the height of bui ldings.

10.2.3 The lateral rigidity changes of the upper structure and lower structure of transfer story shall
meet the requirements of Appendix E in this specification.

10.2.4 Structural transfer members may be transfer beam, truss, vierendeel truss, box structure,
diagonal bracing etc.; thick plates may be adopted in non-seismic design and Intensity 6 seismic
design; thick plates may be adopted for the structural transfer members in the basement in Intensity 7
and Intensity 8 seismic design. The internal force of horizontal earthquake action of Special Grade I
and II structural transfer members shall be multiplied by enhancement coefficient 1.9, 1.6 and 1.3
respectively; the vertical ea1thquake action shall be considered for structural transfer members according
99
to Article 4.3 .2 of this specification.

10.2.5 The arrangement position of transfer story forpartial frame-supported shearwall structure
above the ground surface should not exceed 3 stories under Intensity 8, and should not exceed 5
stories under Intensity 7; it may be increased properly under Intensity 6.

10.2.6 For tall buildings with transfer story, the seismic grades shall meet the requirements of
Section 3.9 of this specification; for tube structures with earring column transfer clolumn, the seismic
grades of transfer column and transfer beam shall be determined according to the frame-supported
frame in partial frame-supported shearwall structure; where the position of transfer story is arranged
on the third floor or above, the seismic grade of bottom reinforced part of frame-supported column
and shear wall should be adopted according to those specified in Tables 3.9.3 and 3.9.4 and increased
by one grade; those of Specia l Grade I may not be increased.

10.2.7 The design of transfer beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 The minimum reinforcement ratio of the upper and lower longitudinal steel reinforcement
of transfer beam shall not be less than 0.30% in non-seismic design, and in the seismic design,
Special Grade I, Grade I. and Grade II shall not be less than 0.60%, 0.50% and 0.40%
rcs pectively.

2 The beam stirrup within the range of 1.5 times of section height shall be densed, and the
stirrup diameter densified area shall not be less than lOmm, and the spacing shall not be greater
than lOOrnm. The minimal area reinforcement ratio of stirrups in densified area shall not be less
than 0.9/t/f..v in non-seismic design, and in seismic design, Special Grade I. Grade I and Grade II
shall not be less than l.3ft/y.,1.2ft/.fy,, and l.lft/.f.,.v respectively.

3 The longitudinal steel reinforcement on the upper part of the support of eccentric and
tensioned transfer beam shall have at least 50% penetrating along the full length of beam, the
lower longitudinal steel reinforcement shall be connected to the column directly; waist reinfor-
cements whose spacing is not larger than 200mm, and diameter is not be less than 16mm shall
be arranged along the height of the web plate.

10.2.8 The design of transfer beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 The section center line of transfer beam and transfer column should be coincident.

2 The section height of transfer beam should not be less than 1/8 of the calculated span . T he
section width of carrying column transfer beam shall not be less than the section width of the carried
in the beam width direction. The section width of frame-supported beam should not be_larger than the
section width of frame-supported column in the corresponding direction, and should not be less than
the larger value of 2 times the wall section thickness and 400mm.

3 The design value of assembly shear force of the transfer beam section shall meet the fo llowing
requirements:

Permanent, temporary design condition V~0.20f3Jcbho (1 0.2.8- 1)

1
Seismic design condition V ~- (O. l 5fJJcbh0) (I 0.2.8-2)
YRE

100
 4 The carrying column stransfer beam shall be arranged with waist reinforcement along the
height of web plate, and its diameter shall not be less than 12mm and spacing should not be larger
than 200mm.

5 The joints of longitudinal reinforcement of transfer beam should adopt mechanical connection;
the reinforcing steel area of joints in the same connection area should not exceed 50% of the total
sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement. The connecting positions shall avoid the opening
positions, the carrying column positions on the beam and the heavy load carrying positions.

6 Transfer beam should not have openings. If it is required, the distance between the opening
s ide and the support column side should not be less than the beam section height; the section reduced
by opening shall be carried out with load-bearing capacity calculation, and the upper and lower chord
formed by opening shall arrange with longitudinal reinforcement and shear resistant stirrup.

7 For the carrying column position of carrying column transfer beam and the opening position
of wall on the upper part of frame-supported beam, the stirrup of beam shall be <lensed, and the
densified area scope may take 1.5 times of transfer beam heightof the carryi ng column on the beam or
the both sides of wall side; the stirrup diameter, spacing and area reinforcement ratio shall meet the
requi rements of Item 2 in A11icle 10.2.7 of this specification.

8 The upper and lower longitudinal reinforcement and waist reinforcement of frame-supported
beam in frame-suppo11ed shearwall structure (Figure 10.2.8) shall be anchored reliably in node zone;
the horizontal segment shall extend to column side, and they shall not be less than 0.4/ab in non-seismic
design, and not Jess than 0.4/abE in seism ic design; the first row of longitudinal reinforcement on the
beam shall be anchored by buckling inward the column and extend to the beam bottom not less than la
(non-seismic design) or laE (seismic design). Where rnultirow longitudinal reinforcements are arranged
on the beam, the length of which the inner row reinforcement anchoring into column may be reduced
properly, but the sum of horizontal segment length and the bendding section length shall not be less
than the reinforcement anchorage length la (non-seismic design) or laE (seismic design).

9 The transfer beam of transfer column should be arranged with frame beam or floor beam in
011hogonal direction on the carrying column.

-I

Figure 10.2.8 Anchoring for Main Reinforcement and Waist Reinforcement of Frame-supported Beam
I- Longitudinal steel reinforcements on beam: 2-Bcam waist rein forcement: 3-Lower longitudinal steel reinforc ement of beam:

4-Upper shear wall ;

In seismic design,/, and /.,b in the figure arc tabken as /,E and labE res pectively

10.2.9 The ve11ical anti-lateral force member (wall, column) on the upper transfer story should
d irectly fall on the main transfer members of transfer story.
IOI
10.2.10 The design of transfer column shall meet the following requirements:

1 The reinforcement ratio of all longitudinal reinforcements in the column shall meet the
requirements of frame-supported column in Article 6.4.3 of this specification;

2 In seismic design, the stirrup of transfer column shall adopt compound spiral stirrup or
cross compound stirrup, and shall be densed along the overall height of column; the diameter of
stirrup shall not be less than, and the stirrup spacing shall not be greater than the smaller value
of lOOmm and 6 times diameter of longitudinal reinforcement;

3 In seismic design, the stirrup characteristic value of stirrup of transfer column shall be
0.02 more than the required value of ordinary frame columns, and the volumetric stirrup ratio
of stirrup shall not be less than 1.5% .

10.2.11 The design of transfer column shall meet the following requirements:

1 The column section width in non-seismic design should not be less than 400mm, and not be
less than 450mm in seismic design; the column section height should not be less than 1/15 of the
transfer beam span in non-seismic design, and not be less than 1112 of the transfer beam span in
seism ic design.

2 For Grade I and II transfer column, the axial force caused by seismic action shall be
respectively multiplied by amplified coefficient 1.5 and 1.2, but in calculation of axial compression
ratio, amplified coefficient may not be considered.

3 The bending moment combination value of section of the upper end of Grade I and II transfer
column and the lower end of the bottom column connected with transfer members shall be respectively
multipled by amplified coefficient 1.5 and 1.3; the design value of co lumn end bending moment of
transfer column in other stories shall meet the requirements of Article 6.2.1 of this specification.

4 The design value of shear force of Grade I and II column end section shall meet the
requirements of Article 6.2.3 of this specification.

5 The design value of bending moment and design value of shear force of transfer corner
column shall be respectively multiplied by amplified coefficient 1.1 based on Items 3, 4 of this Article.

6 The combination design value of shear force of column section shall meet the following
requirements:

Permanent, temporary design condition Vs 0.20/JJcbho (10.2.11- 1)

1
Seismic design condition V S- (O. l 5/JJ"cbh0 ) (10.2.11-2)
YRE

7 The spacing of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 80mm, and should not be
larger than 200mm in seismic design, and not be larger than 250111111 in non-seismic design; the
reinforcement ratio of longitudinal reinforcement should not be larger than 4.0% in seismic design.

8 In non-seismic design, transfer columns should adopt compound spiral stirrup or cross
compound stirrup, and the volumetric stirrup ratio of stirrup should not be less than 0.8%; the
diameter of stirrup should not be less than 1Omm, and the stirrup spacing should not be larger than
150mm.
102
 9 The longitudinal reinforcement w ithin range of the upper wall of frame-suppor1ed column in
partial frame-supported shearwall structure shall stretch into the upper wall not less than one story;
other column longitudinal reinforcements shall be anchored into the beam or slab of transfer story;
counting from column side, the reinforcement length anchoring into beam and slab shall not be less
than laE in seismic design, and not be less than la in non-seismic design.

10.2.12 In seismic design, the joint core zone of transfer beam/column shall be carried out with
seismic checking, and the joints shall meet the requirements of constructional measures. The joint
core zone of transfer beam/column shall be arranged with horizontal stirrups according to the
requi rements of Article 6.4. l 0 of this specification.

10.2.13 The thickness of upper and lower floorslab of box-type transfer structure should not be less
than 180mm; bi-directional diaphragm plate shall be ananged according to the requirements of
transfer column layout and bui lding functions; the rei nforcement design of the upper and lower slab
shall simultaneously consider the effect of local bending of slab and the whole bending of transfer
story; the diaphragm plate should be designed according to deep beam.

10.2.14 The design of thick plate shall meet the followi ng requirements:

1 The thickness of transfer thick plate may be determ ined according to the calculation of the
section of bending resistantance, shear resistantance and punching resistance.

2 Transfer thick plates may be partially made into thin plate; the junction of th in plate and thick
plate may be installed with haunch; the transfer th ick plate may be partially made into coreboard.

3 Transfer thick plate should be designed according to the design value of bending moment and
shear force of main grillage divided in the holistic computation, and carried out reinforcement checking
according to the analysis results of finite element method; the flexual longitudinal reinforcement may be
arranged in double-layer-double-d irection along the upper and lower of transfer slab; the total
reinforcement ratio of each direction should not be less than 0.6%; the reinforcement ratio of shear
resistant stirrup area of concealed beam in transfer slab should not be less than 0.45%.

4 The periphery of thick plate should be arranged w ith reinforcement skeleton.

5 The upper and lower shear wall of transfer thick plate and the longitud inal reinforcement of
column shall be reliably anchored in transfer thick plate.

6 The upper and lower floorslabs on the transfer thick plate shal l be reinforced properly, and
the floors lab thickness should not be Jess than l 50mm.

10.2.15 When adopting vierendeel truss transfer story, the v ierendeel truss should be arranged fu lly
on the fl oor, and shall be w ith suffic ient rigid ity. T he upper lower chord of vierendeel truss should
conside floorslab action, and the anchori ng connection construction of the upper, lower chord and
frame co lumn sha ll be reinforced; reinforcement design shall be carried out to ver1ical web member
according to the principle of shearing w hen strong and bending when weak, and the stirrup arrangement
and the measures of the construction connecting with the upper and lower chord sha ll be reinforced

10.2.16 The layout of Partial frame-supported shearwall shall meet the following requirements:

1 The wall of the shear wall linked w ith the ground and tube bottom shall be thickened;

2 The floorslabs surround the frame-supported columns shall not be arranged in a story-staggered
103
way;

3 The openings of the shear wall linked with the ground and tube shall be arranged in the
middle of wall;

4 Side door openings shall not be arranged in the wall on the upper story of frame-supported
beam, and door openings should not be arranged on the frame-supported central column;

5 The spacing of the shear wal l linked w ith the ground shall meet the fo llowing requirements:

1) In non-seismic design, I should not be larger than 3B and 36m;

2) In seismic design, where the number of frame-supported story at the bottom is I-2, I
should not be larger than 2B and 24m; where the number of frame-suppo11ed story at the
bottom is 3 and more, l should not be larger than I .SB and 20m, herein B is the average
width of floor between floor-type walls.

6 The distance between frame-supported column and the adjacent the shear wall linked with
the ground should not be larger than l 2m when the frame-suppot1ed story is 1- 2, and should not be
larger than 1Orn when it is 3 stories and more;

7 The seismic overtuurning moment absorbed by the frame-supported frame shall not be
greater than 50% the total seismic ove11uurning moment of the structure;

8 Where frame-supported beam bearing shear wall and the secondary transfer beam and the
shear wall on it, stress analysis shall be carried out; the reinforcement shall be checked according to
the stress; constructional measures shall be reinforced. The structure transfer story of tall build ing of
pa1tial frame-suppotted shearwall with Grade B height should not adopt frame-suppo1ted main and
secondary beams.

10.2.17 The standard value of horizontal seismic shear force the frame-suppo1ted column of pa1tial
frame-suppotted shearwall structure bearing shall be adopted according to the the following requirements:

1 Where the number of frame-supported column on each story is not more than I 0, and where
the number of frame-supported story at the bottom is 1-2, the shear force each column abosorbed
shall be taken as 2% of the structure base shear at least; where the number of frame-supported story at
the bottom is 3 and more, the shear force each column absorbed shall be taken as 3% of the structure
base shear at least.

2 Where the number of frame-suppo1ted column on each story is more than I 0, and where the
number of frame-supported story at the bottom is 1-2, the sum of shear force each column abosorbed
shall be taken as 20% of the structure base shear at least; where the number of frame-supported story
at the bottom is 3 and more, the shear force each column absorded shall be taken as 30% of the
structure base shear at least.

After adjusting the shear force of frame-supported column, the shear force of frame-suppotted
column and the shear force and bending moment of frame beam at the column end shall be adjusted
correspondingly, but the shear force, bending moment of frame-supported beam and the axial force of
frame-supported column may not be adjusted.

10.2.18 In partial frame-suppo1ted shearwall structure, the design value of bending moment of the
bottom reinforced part of Special Grade I, I. II and III the shear wall linked with the ground shall be

104
adopted according to the bending moment value at the wall bottom section with seimics action
multiplied by enhancement coefficient 1.8, 1.5, 1.3, 1.1; the design value of shear force shall be
adjusted according to the requirements of Articles 3.10.5 and 7.2.6 in this specification. The wall
column of the shear wall linked with the ground should be free from eccentric tension.

10.2.19 In partial frame-supported sheanvaJI structure, the minimum reinforcement ratio of

the horizontaJiy and vertically distributed steel reinforcement of wall on the bottom reinforced
part of shear wall shall not be less than 0.3% in seismic design, and shall not be less than 0.25%
in non-seismic design; the spacing of reinforcements shall not be greater than 200mm. Reinfor-
cement diameter shall not be less than 8mm.

10.2.20 For the bottom reinforced part of shear wall of partial frame-suppo1ted shearwall struture.
the both ends of wall shall be arranged with flange walls or end columns; in seismic design, restraining
boundary members shall be arranged according to the requirements of Article 7.2.15 of this
specification.

10.2.21 The foundation of the shear wall linked with the ground of partial frame-supported shearwall
struture shall be with good integrity and anti-rotational capability.

10.2.22 The construction of the wal l on the upper part of frame-supported beam of partial frame-
supported shearwall shall meet the following requirements:

1 Where there is side door opening on the upper wall of beam (Figure 10.2.22), the opening
side wall should be arranged with flange walls, end column or be thickened, and carried out
reinforcement design according to the requirements of restraining boundary members in Article 7 .2.15
of this specification; where the opening is near the beam end, and the shear bearing capacity of beam
cannot meet the requirements, measures such as haunch of frame-supported beam or increasing the
rigidity of the connection beam of the frame-suppo1ted wall opening may be adopted .

Figure 10.2.22 Construction Requirements of Opening Side Wall Where There is Side Door Opening on the
Frame-supported Beam
I- Flange wall or end column: 2- Shearwall; 3- Frarne-support beam haunch

2 The anchorage length of vertical steel reinforcementof wall on the upper part of frame-
supported beam stretching into wall column shall not be less than l aE in the seismic design, and sha ll
not be less than la in non-seismic design.

3 The wall on the upper part of frame-supported beam should be checked according to the
following requirements:

1) The area As of ve1tical steel reinforcement of the wall end on the colum n:

( I 0.2.22-1)

105
 2) The area Asw of vertically distributed steel reinforcement within the width range 0.2/11 of
the column s ide:

( 10.2.22-2)

3) The area A511 of horizontally-distributed reinforcement of wall within the altitude range
0.2/n on the upper part of frame-supported beam:

(10.2.22-3)

Where /11- Clear span of frame-suppo11ed beam (mm);

hc--Section height of frame-supported column (mm);

hw--Section thickness of wall column (mm);

0"01 - -Design value of mean compression stress considering the combination of wind load
and seismic action within the range of he of wall on the column (N/mm2);

0"02- -Design value of mean compression stress considering the combination of w ind load
and seismic action within the range of 0.2/n of wall on the column (N/mm 2) ;

O"xmax--Design value of horizontal tensile stress considering the combination of wind load
and seismic action on the interface of frame-supported beam and wall (N/mm2).

With the combination of seismics action, O"oi, 0"02, O"xmax in Formula (10.2.22-1)-( 10.2.22-3) shall
be multiplied by YRE. YRE shall be taken as 0.85 .

4 The horizontal construction joint of frame-suppo11ed beam and the wall on the upper pa11 of
it should be checked the sliding resistance capacity according to Article 7.2.12 of this specification.

10.2.23 In pa11ial frame-supponed shearwall structure, the floorslab thickness of frarne-suppo1ted

transfer story should not be less than 180mm; it shall be arranged reinforcements in double story and
double direction, and the reinforcement ratio of each story and each direction should not be less than
0.25%; reinforcements in floorslab shall be anchored in boundary beam or wall; the fl oorslabs around
shear wall linked with the ground and tube should not be opened. Boundary beams shall be arranged
o n the floorslab edge and around big opening, and the w idth should not be less than 2 times the slab
thickness; the reinforcement ratio of longitudi nal reinforcement of total section shall not be less than
1.0%, and the floorslabs of story near transfer story shall also be reinforced properly.

10.2.24 The design value of section shear force of the building frame-supported transfer story on the
seismic designed rectangu lar plane in partial frame-supported shearwall structure shall meet the
following requirements:

(10.2.24-1 )

(I 0.2.24-2)

Where br, tr - -Width and thickness of the checking section of floorslab of frame-suppo11ed
transfer story respectively:
106
 Vi-Design value for assembly shear force of frame-suppo1ted floor slab, which is
calculated according to rigid floor slab where the shear force is transmitted from
non-ground shearwall to ground shearwall. Under Intensity 8, it shall be multiplied
by enhancement coefficient 2; under Intensity 7; where checking ground shearwall,
this enhancement coefficient shall be given no consideration;

A5--Section area of all steel reinforcement in frame-supported transfer story floor

(including beam and board) the shear wall linked with the ground;

yRl, -Seismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity, it may take 0.85.

10.2.25 Building frame-supported transfer story on the seismic designed rectangu lar plane in pattial
frame-suppo1ted shearwall structure in partial frame-supported shearwall structure, where the plane is
relatively long or irregu lar,and the internal force of internal force is considerably different, flexural
strength in the slab plane may be checked with simplified method.

10.2.26 For the peripheral transfer column and inner tube of tube structure of transfer story with
carrying column in seism ic design, the middle distance of the external wall of core tube should not be
larger than 12m.

10.2.27 For the transfer story structure of carrying column, where the transfer members adopt truss.
the intersection point of the diagonal web member of transer truss, the vertical web member of
vierendeel truss should be coincident with the position of thick columns on the upper part; reinforcement
and constructional measures shall be reinforced for the joints of transer truss.

10.3 Structure with Outriggers and/or Belt Members

10.3.1 Where the lateral rigid ity of frame-core-tube and tube-in-tube structure can not meet the
requirements, the horizontal extension arm members w ith proper rigidity may be arranged at refuge
story and equipment room of the building to form a tall building with reinforcement layer. If necessary,
peripheral hori zontal girdle band members may be arranged for the reinforcement layer simul taneously.
Hori zontal extension arm members, peripheral gird le band mem bers may be diagonal web member
truss, entity beam, box beam, vierendeel truss etc ..

10.3.2 Structure design of tall building with story with outriggers and/or belt members shall meet
the fo llowing requirements:

1 The quantity, rigidity and arranging position of story with outriggers and/or belt members
sha ll be designed rationally. Where one story with outriggers and/or belt members is ar:ranged, it may
be arranged near 0.6 times the he ight of buildings; where 2 stories with outriggers and/or belt members
are arranged, thry may ne arranged on the top and near 0.5 times the height of buildings respectively;
where several stories with outriggers and/or belt members are arranged, they should be vertically
arranged from the top to the bottom evenly.

2 The horizontal extension arm members of story w ith outriggers and/or belt members should
penetrate core tube, and the plane layout should be located at the intersection angle of core tube/ tee
joint; the connection of horizontal extension arm members and perimeter frame should adopt hinged
connection or half rig id connection; the story arranged w ith horizontal extension arm truss should
consider the deformation in slab plane in the calculation of structure internal force and displacement.

107
 3 Reinforcement constructions shal l be reinforced for the story with outriggers and/or belt
members and the frame column of the adjacent story.

4 The rigidity and reinforcement shall be reinforced for the story with outriggers and/or belt
members and the floor of the adjacent story.

5 In terms of the construction procedures and connection details, measures shal l be taken to
reduce the influence of the vertical temperature deformation and axial compression difference of
structure, and the structural analysis model shall be able to reflect the influence of construction
measures.

10.3.3 In seismic design, structure design of tall building with story with outriggers and/or belt
members shall meet the following requirements:

1 The seismic grade of story with outriggers and/or belt members and the frame columns,
core tube shear wall of adjacent story shall be adopted by increasing one grade, and Grade I
shall be increased to the Special Grade r, but those extra grade are not allowed to increase;

2 The story with outriggers and/or belt members and the frame column, stirrup of the
adjacent story shall be arranged densedly for the whole column section; the axial compression
ratio limit shall be adopted by reducing 0.05 based on the values of the frame columns of other
stories;

3 Restraining boundary members shall be arranged for story with outriggers and/or belt
members and the core tube shear wall of the adjacent story.

10.4 Structure with Staggered Stories

10.4.1 In seismic design , tall buildings shall avoid split-story arrangement along vertical direction.
Where split-story caused by the different parts of build ing with different functions, seismic joints
should be adopted to divide them into indentedent structural units.

10.4.2 The both sides of split-story should adopt structural system with similar structural arrange-
mentand lateral rigidity.

10.4.3 In split-level structure, stagger stories shall not be sotted to a rigid floorslab; computational
analysis model shall be able to reflect the influence of split-story.

10.4.4 In non-seismic design, frame columns on the split-story shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The section height shall not be less than 600mm; the concrete strength grade shall not
be less than C30; stirrup shall be arranged densedly for the whole column section;

2 Seismic grade shall be adopted by increasing one grade, and Grade I shall be increased
to Special Grade I, but those extra grade are not allowed to increase.

10.4.5 Under the seismic action in precautionary intensity, the bearing capacity of the section of
frame column on the split story should meet the requirements of Formula (3 .11.3-2) of this specification.

10.4.6 The section thickness of weighted shear wall outside the plane of split-story shall not be less
than 200mm in non-seism ic design, and shall not be less than 250mm in seismic design, and wall
108
column or support-wall c9lumn vertical to it shall be arranged; in seismic design, the seismic grade
shall be adopted by increasing one grade. The concrete strength grade of shear wall on the split-story
shall not be less than C30: the reinforcement ratio of horizontally and vertically distributed steel
reinforcement shall be less than 0.3% in non-seismic design, and shall not be less than 0.5% in
seismic design.

10.5 Towers Linked with Connective Structure

10.5.1 The independent parts of towers linked with connective structure (s) shall be with the same or
similar configuration, plane layout and rigidity; p lan form with symmetrical biaxial should be adopted.
In the seismic design which is in Intensity 7, Intensity 8, buildings with great d ifference in story
number and rigidity should not adopt towers linked with connective structure (s).

10.5.2 In Intensity 7 (0.15g) and Intensity 8 seismic design, the connector of towers linked with
connective structure (s) shall consider the vertical seismics influence.

10.5.3 In the seismic design under Intensity 6 and Intensity 7 (0.1 Og), the connector of High-order
towers linked w ith connective structure (s) should consider the vertical seismics influence.

10.5.4 Connector structures and major structures should adopt rigid connection. When adopting
rigid connection, the main structure members of connector structure shall at least stretch into the
major structure one span and be connected reliably; they may extend to the inner tube of the major
part, and reliably connected w ith the inner tube.

When the connector structure and the major structure adopt sl ip connection, the slip amount of
suppo1t shall be able to the requirements of displacement of the two d irections under rare earthquake
action, and shall take meas ures to prevent falling and impacting. The req uirements of displacement
under rare earthquake action shal l be rechecked with time-h istory analysis method.

10.5.5 Rigidly connected connector structure may be arranged with steel beam, steel truss, section
steei concrete beam, and section steel shall stretch into the major structure at least one span and
reliably anchored. The boundary beam section of connector struture should be enlarged; the floors lab
thickness should not be less than l 50mm, and double-layer-double-direction reinforcement net should
be adopted; the reinforcement ratio of steel bar mesh of each story and each direction should not be
less than 0.25%.

Where connector structure consists of several stories, the structure design of the story at the
bottom and the top shall be specially reinforced.

10.5.6 In seismic design, connector and the structural components connecting with it shall
meet the following requirements:

1 Connector and the structural components connecting with it, within the altitude range
of the connector and the upper-and-lower layers, the seismic grade shall be adopted by increasing
one grade, and G rade I shall be increased to the extra grade, but those Special Grade I are not
allowed to increase;

2 The frame column connecting with the connector, within the altitude range of the
connector, stirrup shall be arranged densedly for the whole column section; the axial compression
ratio limit shall be adopted by reducing 0.05 based on the values of the frame columns of other
109
stories;

3 Shearwall connecting with the connector, within the altitude range of the connector and
the upper-and-lower layers, shall be installed with restraining boundary members.

10.5.7 The calculation of towers linked with connective structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 The floorslab of rigidly connected connector shall be checked the shear section and bearing
capacity according to Article 10.2.24 of this specification;

2 When the floorslab of rigidly connected connector is relatively thin, tower model shall be
used for calculation and analysis.

10.6 Structure with Setback and Cantilever

10.6.1 Vertical irregularity tall building which is multi-tower structure with a common podium and
whose degree of configuration setback and cantilever is greater than the limit of Article 3.5.5 of this
specification shall comply with the requirements of this section.

10.6.2 For multi-tower structure with a common podium and structure with configuration setback or
cantilever, the floorslab of vertical configuration mutated part shall be reinforced, and the floorslab
thickness should not be less than 150mm, and shall be arranged with double-layer-double-direction
reinforcement; the reinforcement ratio of steel bar mesh on each story should not be less than 0.25%.
The floorslab of the upper-and-lower layer structure of configuration mutated pat1 shall also reinforce
constructional measures.

10.6.3 In seismic design, multi-tower tall building with a common podium shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The story number, plane and rigidity of each tower building shall be approximate: tower and
chassis shall be arranged symmetrically; the d istance between the comprehensive mass center and
chassis structure mass center of the upper tower struture should not be larger than 20% of the
correspondingly side length of the chassis.

2 Transfer story should not arranged in the upper tower buildingon the chassis roof.

3 The peripheral columns and shear walls connecting with podiums in the tower build ing,
with in the altitude range of from the fixed end to the upper story of the podiums roof, the minimum
reinforcement ratio of column longitudinal steel reinforcement should be properly improved; restraining
boundary members should be arranged for shear wall accord ing to At1icle 7 .2.15 of this specification;
column stirrup should be <lensed in total height within the range of the upper-and-iower layers of
podium building roof.

4 For multi-tower structure with a common podium with chassis, the ratio of the first period
based on torsion and the first period based on translation of the integral structure and each tower
building may be calculated accord ing to the computation model of integrity and the divided tower
bui lding specified in Article 5.1.14 of this specification, and shall meet the relevant requirements of
Article 3.4.5 of this specification.

10.6.4 The design of canti lever structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 Measures to reduce the structure self-load shall be adopted for the cantilever part.
110
 2 Structure form with higher redundance should be adopted for the structure of the cantilever
part.

3 In the calculation of structure internal force and displacement, the story of the cantilever part
should consider the deformation within the slab plane; the structural analysis model shall be able to
reflect the vertical vibration effect that horizontal seismics may has on the cantilever part.

4 In Intensity 7 (0.1 Sg), Intensity 8and Intensity 9 seismic design, the cantilever structure shall
consider vertical seismics influence; in the seismics design under Intensity 6 and Intensity 7, the
cantilever structure should consider vertical seismics influence.

5 In seismic design, the seismic grade of the key members of cantilever struture and the key
members of the adjacent major structures shall be adopted by incresing one grade, Grade I shall be
increased to the Special Grade I, but those extra grade are not allowed to increase.

6 U nder the presstimate seismic action, the bearing capacity of the section of key members for
cantilever structure should meet the requirements of Formula (3 .11.3-3) of th is specification.

10.6.5 The design of Configuration setbacktall buildings and multi-tower structure with a common
podium whose chassis height is 20% greater than the height of buildings shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Measures should be taken to reduce the variation of structural rigidity on the configuration
setback position, the bottom story inter-story displacement angle of the upper pa11 setback struture
should not be 1.5 times larger than the maximum inter-story displacement angle of the adjacent lower
pa11 section;

2 In seismic design, the seismic grade of the ve11ical structural components of the periphery of
the upper and lower two stories of tower building of the configuration setback part shall be adopted by
incresing one grade, Grade I shall be increased to Special Grade I, but those Special Grade I are not
allowed to increase;

3 When the structure is eccentrically setback, measures of reinforcement construction of ve11ical

member periphery the two-story stucture below the setback part shall be rei nforced.

Ill
 11 Design of Mixed Structures

11.1 General Requirement

11.1.1 The mixed structure specified in this chapter refer to the frame-corewall structure composed
of peripheral steel frame or section steel concrete, steel tube concrete frame and reinforced concrete
core tube, or the tube-in-tube structure composed of peripheral steel frame tube or section steel
concrete, steel pipe concrete frame tube and reinforced concrete core tube.

11.1.2 The applicable maximum height of mixed structure tall building shall be in accordance with
those specified in Table 11.1.2.

Table 11.1.2 Applicable Maximum Height Ratio of Mixed Structure Tall Building (m)

Seismic precautionary iniens1ty

Non-seismic
Structural system Intensity 8
design Intens ity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 9
0.2g 0.3g

Steel-frame remforccd-concrete core tube 210 200 160 120 100 70

Frame-core-tube Section steel (steel pipe) concrete
240 220 190 150 130 70
frame-reinforced concrete core tube

Steel outer tube-reinforced concrete core

280 260 210 160 140 80
tube
Tube-in-tube
Section steel (steel pipe ) concrete outer
300 280 230 170 150 90
tube -remforced concrete core tube

Note: As for structures irregular m both horizontal and vertical directions. their maximum apphcable height shall be reduced proper!).

11.1.3 The height-width ratio of tall building of mixed structure shal l be in accordance with those
specified in Table 11 .1.3.

Table 11.1.3 Applicable Maximum Height-width Ratio of Mixed Structure Tall Building

Structural system Non-seismic design

Seismic precautionary intensity I
Intensity 6 and 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9

Frame-core-tube 8 7 6 4

Tube-in-tube 8 8 7 5

11.1.4 In seismic design, the mixed structure buildings shall be adopted with di~ferent seismic
grades _according to the precautionary category, intensity, structure type and building height,
and also shall meet the requirements of the corresponding calculation and constructional
measures. The seismic grade of Category C buildings shall be determined according to Table
11.1.4.

11.1.5 For mixed structures. under the action of wind load and frequent ea11hquake, the ratio of the
maximum inter-story displacement and story height calculated according to elastic method shall meet
the relevant requirements of A11icle 3.7.3 of this specification; under rare earthquake action, the
elastic-plastic storey displacement of structure shall meet the relevant requirements of A11icle 3.7.5 of
this specification .

112
 Table 11.1.4 Seismic G rade of Steel-concrete Mixed Structure

Seismic precautionary intensity

Structure type
Intensity 6 Intensity 7 Intensity 8 Intensity 9

Building height (m) SlSO >ISO $130 >I SO $100 >I SO $70
Steel-frame reinforced- Reinforced concrete core
II I I Special I I Special G I Special I
concrete core tube tube
Reinforced concrete core
Section steel (steel pipe) II II II I I Special I Special I
tube
concrete frame-reinforced
Section steel (steel pipe)
concrete core tube III II II I I I I
concrete frame

Building height (m) $180 >180 9SO >ISO $120 >120 $90
Steel outer tube-reinforced Reinforced concrete core
II I I Special I I Special I Special l
concrete core tube tube
Section steel (steel pipe) Reinforced concrete core
II II II I I Special I Special I
concrete outer tnbe- tube
reinforced co ncrete core Section steel (steel pipe)
III II II I I I I
tube concrete outer tube
Note: The seismic grade of steel structure me mbers shall respecti\'ely be Grade IV, Ill. II and I, when the seismic
precautionary Intensity is 6, 7, 8, 9.

11.1.6 The seismic shear force the mixed structure frame bearing shall meet the requireme nts of
Article 9.1.11 of this specification.

11.1.7 Under seismic design conditions, the seismic adj ustment coefficient of bearing capacity yRE
of concrete structure members and steel members of section steel (steel pipe) shall be respectively
adopted according to Table 11.1.7- 1 and Table 11.1.7-2.

Table 11.1.7-1 Seismic Adjustment Coeffi cient (l'RE) of Mem ber Bearing Capacity of Concrete Structure Members of
Section Steel (Steel Pipe)

Calculation of inclined section

Calculation of normal section load-bearing capacity
load-bearing capacity
Section steel concrete Section steel concrete column and
Shearwall Bracing All types of member and node
beam steel core concrete column

0.75 0.80 0.85 0.80 0.85

Table 11.1. 7-2 Seis mic Adjustment Coeffi cient ()IRE) of Bea rin g Ca pac ity of Steel Member

Strength destruction (beam. column, bracing, node plate member, bolt, welded joint) Flexion Stabil ity (column, bracing)

0.75 0.80

11.1.8 Where profiled steel sheet concrete composite floor s lab is adopted, the floorslab concrete
may be light-wehght concrete w hose stre ngth grade shall not be less than LC25; the internal pa1tition
of steel-concrete m ixed structure of tal l building shall adopt light partition wall.

11.2 Structural Layout and Arrangement

11.2.1 In add ition to the requirements of this section, the structural layout of mixed-structure
113
buildings shall also meet relevant provisions of A1ticle 3.4.3 of this specification.

11.2.2 The plane layout of mixed structure shall meet the following requirements:

1 The plane should be simple, regular, symmetrical and with sufficient integrity torsional
rigidity; the plane should adopt regular planes such ad square, rectangular, polygon, round, elliptical;
the bay and depth of building shou ld be uniform;

2 In tube-in-tube structure system, where the peripheral steel frame column adopt H section
column, the major axis direction of column section shall be arranged in the peripheral tube plane;
corner column should adopt crisscross, square, or circular section;

3 Floor main beam should not be placed on the connection beam of core tube or inner tube.

11.2.3 The ve1tical layout of mixed structure shall meet the following requirements:

1The lateral rigidity and bearing capacity of structure should uniformly change along the
ve1tical direction and be free from mutation; member section should be gradually reduced from the
top to the bottom .

2 The peripheral frame column of mixed structure along height should adopt homogeneous
structure members; where different types of structural members are adopted, transition layer shall be
arranged, and the flexural rigidity changes of single column should not exceed 30%.

3 Reliable transition strengthening measures shall be adopted for stories with bigger rigidity
changes.

4 Where bracing is adopted for steel frame part, eccentric bracing and energy consuming
bracing should be adopted; bracing should be continuously arranged in double directions; frame
bracing should extend to the foundation.

11.2.4 In Intensity 8, 9 seismic design, section steel columns shall be arranged on the joints of floor
steel beam or section steel concrete beam and concrete tube and in the quadrangle wall of concrete
tube; in Intensity 7 seismic design, section steel columns should be arranged on the joints of floor
steel beam or section steel concrete beam and concrete tube and in the quadrangle wall of concrete
tube.

11 .2.5 In mixed structure, rigid connection shall be adopted for beams and columns in the plane of
peripheral frame; the connection of floor beam and reinforced concrete tube and peripheral frame
column may adopt rigid connection or hinged connection.

11.2.6 Floor system shall be w ith good horizontal rigidity and integrity, and the layout shall meet the
following requirements:

1 Profiled steel sheet cast-in-place reinforced concrete composite floorslab, cast-in-placeconcrete

floorslab or prestressed reinforced concrete folding floorslab should be adopted, and floorslab and
steel beam shall be connected reliably;

2 The floorslab on the story where the computer room equipment story, refuge story and the
upper and lower chords of overhanging arm truss are located, should adopt reinforced concrete
floorslab, and shall be adopt strengthening measures;

3 For building floor with large openings or be the transfer story, cast-in-placeconcrete tloorslab

114
shall be adopted; strengthening measures such as rigid horizontal bracing shall be arranged for the
large openings of floorslab.

11.2.7 Where the lateral rigidity is insufficient, story with outriggers and/or belt members with
appropriate rigidity may be arranged for mixed structure. Story with outriggers and/or belt members
should adopt extension arm truss, it may be used to arrange peripheral ribbon truss if necessary. The
design of story with outriggers and/or belt members shall meet the following requirements:

1 Extension arm truss and peripheral ribbon truss should adopt steel trusses.

2 Extension arm truss and core-tube wall shall adopt rigid connection; the upper and lower
chord shall extend to and penetrate the wall; diagonal web members or concealed bracing should be
arranged in the wall; overhanging arm truss and peripheral frame column should adopt hinged
connection or half rigid connection, and the connection of peripheral ribbon truss and outside frame
co lumn should adopt rigid connection.

3 Structure section steel columns should be arranged on the joint of core-tube wall and
extension arm truss; section steei column should at least extend to one story respectively upper and
lower outside the height of extension arm truss.

4 Where story with outriggers and/or belt members of outreach truss is arranged, effective
measures shall be taken to reduce the internal force of truss members caused by the vertical
deformation differences between o uter frame column and concrete tube.

11.3 Structural Analysis

11.3.1 During the elastic analysis, the combined action of steel beam and cast-in-place concrete
floor slab should be considered; the beam rigidity may take 1.5-2.0 times of steel beam rigidity, but it
shal l ensure that steel beam and floor s lab are reliably connected. During the elasto-plastic analysis,
the combined action of floor slab and beam may not be considered.

11.3.2 During the internal force and displacement calculation at the structural elastic stage, member
rigidity values shall meet the following requirements:

1 Rigidity of section steel concrete member and steel pipe concrete column may be calculated
according to the following Formula:

(11.3.2-1)

(11.3 .2-2)

(11.3.2-3)

Where Eclc, EcAc, GcAc--Section bending rigidity, axial rigidity and shear rigidity respectively of
reinforced concrete pa11;

Eala, EaAa, GaA 3- -Section bending rigidity, axial rigidity and shear rigidity respectively of
section steel and steel pipe pa11s.

2 As for the section steel concrete shearwall without end column, the axial, bending and shear
rigid ity may be approximately calculated accordi ng to the concrete shearwall on the same section, and
the improving action of end section steel to the section rigidity may be omitted;
11 5
 3 As for the section steel concrete shearwall with end column, the axial and bending rigidity
may be calculated according to H concrete section; the section steel in the end column may be
converted to the equivalent concrete area and counted in the flange area of H section; the shear
rigidity of wal l may not be counted into the section steel action;

4 As for the steel plate concrete shearwall, the steel plates may be conve1ted to the equivalent
concrete area to calculate its axial, bending and shear rigidity.

11.3.3 During the calculation of ve1tical load action, the structural additional internal force caused
by the vertical deformation difference of steel column, section steel concrete (steel pipe concrete)
column and reinforced concrete core tube shou ld be considered; during the calculation of vertical
deformation difference, the influence of such factors as concrete shrinkage, creep, settlement and
construction adjustment should be considered.

11.3.4 Where the concrete tubes are constructed before the peripheral frame structure, the unfavorable
stress state of concrete tube under the action of wind force and other loads at the construction stage
shall be considered; the bearing capacity, stability and deformation of peripheral section steel
structure under the action of construction loads and possible wind loads before concrete placement
shall be calculated for checking, so as to determine the interval stories of concrete for steel structure
installation and story placement.

11.3.5 The damping ratio of composite structure under the action of frequent earthquakes may take
0.04. The damping ratio may take 0.02-0.04 under the action of wind load during the checking
calculation of story displacement and member design.

11.3.6 During the calculation of structural internal force and displacement, as for the stories with
extension arm truss and big open ings on the floor slab, the adverse effect of slab plane deformation
shall be considered.

11.4 Design of Structure Members

11.4.1 Width-to-thickness ratio of section steel plate piece (Figure 11.4. 1) in section steel concrete
member should not be greater than th e requirements of Table 11.4.1 .

Table 11.4.l Width-to-thickness Ratio Limit of Section Steel Plate Piece

Column
Beam
Steel grade H. +and T sections Box section

bltr h,Jt,, b/tr h,Jt\\ h,Jr\\

Q235 23 107 23 96 72

Q345 19 91 19 81 61
Q390 18 83 18 75 56

~
--t~~- --'lo-

1' j
Figu re 11.4.1 Section Steel Plate Piece Sketch
116
11.4.2 Section steel concrete beam shall meet the fo llowing construction requi rements:

1 Maximum diameter of coarse concrete aggregate should not be greater than 25mm; section
steel should adopt Q235 and Q345 steel and may a lso adopt Q390 or other steels meeting the
structural performance requirements.

2 Minimum reinforcement ratio of section steel concrete beam should not be less than 0.30%;
longitudinal reinforcement of beam should avoid passing through the flange of section steel in the
column. Longitudinal stressed reinforcement of beam should not be greater than two rows; where two
rows of reinforcements are arranged, the second row of rei nforcements should be arranged outside of
section steel section . Where the depth of beam web is greater than 450mm, the longitudinal
constructional reinforcements which shou ld not be greater than 200mm in spacing shall be arranged
along the depth on both side faces of the beam.

3 The thickness of concrete cover of section steel in the section steel concrete beam should not
be less than 1OOmm; the clear spacing of beam long itudinal reinforcement as well as the minimu m
clear distance between beam longitudinal reinforcement and section steel skeleton shall not be less
than 30mm and shall not be less than 1.5 times of the maxi mum particle diameter of coarse aggregate
and 1.5 times of diameter of beam longitudinal reinforcement.

4 Longitudinal stressed reinforcements in section steel concrete beam should adopt mechanical
connection. If the longitudinal reinforcement shall penetrate the section steel column web and be fixed
into the column section after bent 90°, for those in the seism ic design, the straight reach length before
bending shall not be less than 40% of the seismic basic anchorage length labE of reinforcement and
bending straight reach length shall not be less than 15 times of the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement;
for those in the non-seismic design, the straight reach length before bending shall not be less than
40% of the basic anchorage length lab of reinforcement and bend ing straight reach length shall not be
less than 12 times of the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement.

5 Openings on beam should not be greater than 40% of the total height of beam section, should
not be greater than 70% of the section steel section height, and shal l be located at the middle region of
beam height and section steel height.

6 Longitudinal stressed reinforcements at the cantilever beam free end of section steel concrete
shall be arranged with special anchoring members; top flange of section steel beam should be
arranged w ith male pins; transfer beam of section steel concrete should be arranged with male pi ns on
the top flange of section steel. The max imum spacing of male pins should not be greater than 200mm;
the minimum spacing of male pins shall not be less than 6 times of the diameter of male pin rod along
the beam axis direction and shall not be less than 4 times of the diameter of male pin .rod vertical to
the beam direction; the distance between the center of male pin to the section steel plate piece margin
shall not be less than 50mm. Thickness of concrete cover at the top surface of male pin shall not be
less than l 5mm.

11.4.3 Stirrups of section steel concrete beam shall meet the foll owing requirements:

1 M inimum area reinforcement ratio of stirrups shall meet the requirements ofitem 4 of Article
6.3.4 and Item I of A1ticle 6.3.5 in this specification and shall not be less than 0.15% .

2 During the seism ic design, stirrups at the beam end shall be arranged in a dens ified way. In
the dens ified area, for Grade I, the arrangement shall take 2.0 times of the beam section height, and
117
for Grade II, III and TV, it shall take 1.5 times of the beam section height; where the clear span of
beam is less than 4 t imes of the beam section height, beam stirrup shal l be arranged in a densified way
along the full span.

3 Section steel concrete beams shall adopt closed stirrups of 13 5° hooks whose straight reach
length shal l not be Jess than 8 ti mes of the diameter of stirrups. During the non-seismic design. the
diameter of beam stirrup shall not be less than 8mm and the stirrup spac ing shall not be greater than
250mm; during the seismic design, the diameter and spacing of beam stirrup shall meet the requirements
of Table 11.4.3.

Table 11.4.3 Diameter and Spacing of Beam Stirrup (mm)

Seismic grade Stirrup diameter Stirrup spacing in the non-densified area Stirrup spacing in the densified area

I :::12 5180 5120

11 ::: 10 5200 5 150

Ill ::: 10 5250 5180

IV :::s 250 200

11.4.4 During the seismic design, the axial compress ion ratio of section steel concrete column in the
composite structure should not be greater than the limits specified in Table 11.4.4, which may be
calculated according to the following Formula:

(11.4.4)

Where p~Axial compression ratio of section steel concrete column ;

N--Design va lue of axial force of column in consideration of seismic combination;

Ac--Sectional area of concrete after ded ucted section steel;

fc--Design value of axial compressive strength of concrete;

fa--Design value of compressive strength of section steel;

Aa--Sectional area of section steel.

Table 11.4.4 Axial Compression Ratio Limit of Section Stee l Co ncrete Co lumn

Seismic grade I !I Ill

Axial compression ratio limit 0.70 0.80 0.90

Note: I Axial compression ratio of transfer column shall be adopted by reducing the values m the table by 0. 10;

2 As for the columns with shear span ratio not greater than 2. the axial compression ratio shall be adopted by reducing the

values m the iablc by 0.05:

3 Where the concrete above C60 1s adopted. axial compression ratio should be reduced by 0.05.

11.4.5 Section steel concrete column design shall meet the following construction requirements:

1 Slenderness ratio of section steel concrete column should not be greater than 80 .

2 Section steel concrete co lumns at the bottom story, top story and connecting story of section
steel concrete and reinforced concrete in the buildings should be arranged with male pins, so should
the columns with box-type section steel sections; the horizontal spacing of male pins should not be
118
greater than 250mm.

3 The maximum diameter of coarse concrete aggregate should not be greater than 25mm.
Protection thickness of section steels in the section steel columns should not be less than l 50mm;
clear spacing of co lumn longitudinal reinforcements should not be less than SOmm and shall not be
less than 1.5 t imes of the diameter of column longitudinal reinforcements; the minimum clear distance
between the column longitudinal reinforcement and section steel shall not be less than 30mm and 1.5
times of the maximum particle diameter of coarse aggregate.

4 Mi111mum reinforcement ratio of longitudinal reinforcements in the section steel concrete

columns should not be less than 0.8%, and a longitudinal reinforcement not less than l 6mm in diameter
shall be arranged on each corner.

5 The spacing of longitudinal stressed reinforcements in col umns should not be greater than
300111111; where the spacing is greater than 300mm, the longitudinal constructional reinforcements not
less than 14mm in diameter should be arranged.

6 Steel ratio of section steel in section steel concrete column should not be less than 4%.

11.4.6 Structure design of stirrups in section steel concrete column shall meet the following
requirements:

1 During the non-seismic design , the diameter of stirrups shall not be less than 8mm, and the
stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 200mm.

2 During the seismic design, stirrups shall be made into 135° hooks whose straight reach length
shall not be less than 10 times of the diameter of stirrups.

3 During the seismic design, stirrups at the column end shall be densified, and the densified
area shall take the maximum value among the long side dimension of rectangular section column (or
the diameter of circular section column), 1/6 of column clear height and SOOmm; as for the columns
with shear span ratio not greater than 2, the stirrups shall be densified along the full height and the
stirrup spacing shall not be greater than 1OOmm.

4 During the seism ic design, the diameter and spacing of column stirrups shall meet the
requirements of Table 11.4.6; the minimum vol ume stirrup ratio of stirrups in the densified area shall
also meet the requirements of Formula ( 11.4.6) and that in the non-densified area shall not be less
than half of that in the densified area; as fo r the columns with shear span ratio not greater than 2, the
volumetric stirrup ratio of stirrups shall also not be less than 1.0%, and shall not be less than 1.3%
during Intens ity 9 seismic design.

A20.85J.Jc/.f.,. (11.4.6)

Where ),v--Minimum stirrup characteristic value of column, which should be adopted according
to Table 6.4.7 of this specification.

Table 11.4.6 Diameter and Spacing of Stirrups in Section Steel Co ncrete Col umn (mm)

Seismic grade Stirrup diameter Stirrup spacing in the 11011-dcnsified area Stirrup spacing in the densified area

I ~12 5150 5 100

II ~10 5200 5 100

Ill and IV ~8 5200 5 150

119
 Note: Stirrup diameter shall not only meet the requirements in the table, but also shall not be less than 1/4 of the diameter of
longitudinal reinforcements.

11.4.7 Beam-column joints of section steel concrete shall meet the following construction requirements:

1 Section steel columns shall be arranged with stiffening ribs at the horizontal flanges of beam,
and the construction of stiffening rib shall not influence the sol id concrete placeme nt;

2 Stirrup spacing should not be greater than 1.5 times of the spacing in the densified area at the
column end; stirrup diameter should not be less than that in the stirrup densified area at the column
end;

3 Where the reinforcements in the beam pass through the beam-column joints, they should not
pass through the column-type steel flange; where reinforcements need to pass through the column
web, the section loss rate of column web should not be greater than 25%, if greater than 25%, the
column web shall be reinforced; main reinforcements in the beam shal l not be directly welded with
the column-type steel.

11.4.8 Concrete members and nodes of circular steel pipes may be designed according to Appendix
F of this specification.

11.4.9 Circular steel pipe concrete columns shall also meet the following construction requirements:

1 Steel pipe d iameter shou ld not be less than 400mm.

2 Steel pipe wall thickness should not be less than 8mm .

3 The ratio of outer diameter to wall thickness of steel pipe Dlt shou ld be (20-100) ~23 5 I fy ,
h thereof is the yield strength of steel.

4 Hooping index of circular steel pipe concrete column

f A
_ a_ a ,
~
shall not be less than 0.) and
fcAc
should not be greater than 2.5.

5 Slenderness ratio of column shou ld not be greater than 80.

6 Eccentricity eofrc of axial compressive force should not be greater than 1.0, e 0 thereof is
eccentricity, and re thereof is the cross section rad ius of core concrete.

7 During the rigid connection between steel pipe concrete columns and frame beams, stiffening
ribs corresponding to the upper and lower flange positions of beam shall be arranged inside and
outside of the column; where the stiffening ribs are a1Tanged inside the column, holes shall be reserved
in favor of concrete placement; where the stiffening ribs are arranged outside the column. they shall
form a stiffening ring plate.

8 As for the circular steel pipe concrete members greater than 2m in diameter, effective measures
shall be taken to reduce the influence of concrete shrinkage in the steel pipe to the mechanical
performance of members.

11.4.10 Rectangular steel pipe concrete columns shall meet the following construction requirements:

1 Short side dimension of steel pipe section shou ld not be less than 400111111;
120
 2 Wall thickness of steel pipe should not be less than 8mm;

3 Height-width ratio of steel pipe section should not be greater than 2 . Where the maximum
side dimension of rectangular steel pipe concrete column section is not less than 800mm, constructional
measures such as welding male pins and longitudinal stiffening ribs on the internal wall of column
should be taken;

4 The ratio of side length to thickness of plate piece on the wall of steel pipe shall not be
greater than 60 ~235 I fy ;
5 Slenderness ratio of column should not be greater than 80;

6 Axial compression ratio of rectangular steel pipe concrete column shall be calculated according
to Formula (11.4.4) of this specification and should not be greater than the limits in Table 11.4.10.

Table 11.4.10 Axial Compression Ratio Limit of Rectangular Steel Pipe Concrete Column

Grade I Grade II Grade III

0.70 0.80 0.90

11.4.11 Where the core-tube wall bears relatively large bending moment, shear force and axial force,
core-tube wall may adopt section steel concrete shearwall or steel plate concrete shearwall. Shear
section and shear bearing capacity of steel plate concrete shearwall shall meet the requirements of
Articles 11.4.12 and 11.4.13 of this specification, and the structure design shall meet the requirements
of A11icles 11.4.14 and 11 .4.15 of this specification.

11.4.12 Shear section of steel plate concrete shearwall shall meet the following requirements:

1 Durable and temporary design conditions

(11.4.12- 1)

( 11.4.12-2)

2 Seismic design conditions

Where shear span ratio Jc is greater than 2.5

(11.4.12-3)

Where shear span ratio }. is not greater than 2.5

(11.4.12-4)

V =V- - 1-( 0.25 r A + 0.5 r A ) (11.4.12-5)

cw YRE A Ja al ,1, -0. 5 Jsp sp

Where V- -Design value of shear force on the steel plate concrete shearwall section;
121
 Vcw--Design value of shear force only on the reinforced concrete section;

2 - -Shear span ratio of calculated section. When },<l .S, },= 1.5, when J.>2.2, },=2.2; Where
the distance between the calculated section and wall bottom is less than O.Sh"{)' I.
shall be calculated according to the bending moment value and shear force value
O.Shwo away from the wall bottom;

fa--Design value of compressive strength of section steels arranged in the hidden column
at the end of shearwall;

A31- -Sectional area of section steel arranged on one end of shearwall, which shall take the
area of the smaller end. where the sectional areas of section steels arranged at both
ends are different:

/sµ-- Design value of compressive strength of steel plates arranged on the shearwall;

Asp-Cross-sectional area of steel plates arranged on the shearwall.

11 .4.13 The inclined section shear bearing capacity of steel plate concrete shearwall in eccentric
compression shall be checking calculated according to the following Formulae:

1 Durable and temporary design conditions

2 Seismic design cond itions

Where N--Design value of axial compressive force on shearwall, which shall take 0.2fcbwh"
where greater than 0.2/cb"h".

11.4.14 Section steel concrete shearwall and steel plate concrete shearwall shall meet the following
construction requirements:

1 During the seismic design, at the bottom reinforced part of Seismic Grade 1 and 2 section
steel concrete shearwall and steel plate concrete shearwall, the axial compression ratio of wall limb
under the action of gravity load representative value should not be greater than the limits specified in
Table 7.2.13 of this specification, wh ich may be calculated according to following Fonnula:

(11.4.14)

Where N--Des ign value of the axial compressive force of wall limb under the action of the
gravity load representative value;

Ac-Concrete section area of shearwall limb;

Aa-- Total sectional area of section steels arranged on the shearwall.

2 Section steel concrete shearwall and steel plate concrete shearwall should be arranged with
concealed beams at the story elevation.
122
 3 As for the concrete shearwall arranged with section steels at the end, the protection layer
thickness of section steel should be greater than I OOmm; horizontally distributed reinforcements shall
bypass or pass through the section steels at the wall end and shall meet the requirements for reinforcement
anchorage length.

4 As for the cast-in-place reinforced concrete shearwal! with peripheral section steel concrete
columns and beams, the horizontally distributed reinforcements of shearwall shall bypass or pass
through the peripheral column-type steel and shall meet the requirements for reinforcement anchorage
length; where interval cross is adopted, strengthening rei nforcements should be arranged. Section
steel, longitudinal reinforceme nt and stirrup arrangement of peripheral co lumn shall meet the design
require ments for section stee l concrete column.

11.4.15 Steel plate concrete shearwall shall also meet the following construction requirements:

1 T hickness of steel plates in the steel plate concrete shearwall should not be less than 1Omm
and should not be greater than 1/15 of the wall thickness;

2 Reinforcement ratio of distribution reinforcement on the steel plate concrete shearwall should
not be less than 0.4%, and the spacing should not be greater than 200mm; the distribution reinforcements
shall be reliably connected with the steel plates;

3 Steel plates should be welded with the surrounding section steel members;

4 The construction requirements for the connecting pieces between the steel plates and concrete
walls may be implemented according to the construction requirements for the shearing connecting
pieces of compos ite beam in "Code for Design of Stee l Structures" GB 50017; the spacing of male
pins should not be greater than 300mm;

5 Within the scope of 1/5 plate span at the corner of steel plate wall and not less than 1000mm,
the spacing of distribution reinfo rcements of reinforced concrete wall and shear resistant male pins
shou ld be densified properly.

11.4.16 Steel beam or section steel concrete beam sha ll reliably connect with concrete tube and shall
be able to transfer ve1tical shear force and horizontal force. Where steel beam or section steel concrete
beam connect with concrete tube through embedded parts, the embedded parts shall have sufficient
anchorage length and the con nection methods may be adopted according to Figure 11.4.16.

11.4.17 During the seismic design, steel column, section steel concrete column and steel pipe concrete
column in the composite structure shou ld adopt the embedded type colu mn base. Where embedded
type column bases are adopted, the follow ing requirements shall be met:

1 Embedded length shall be determ ined by ca lcu lation and should not be less than 2.5 times of
the long side dimension of section steel column section;

2 Male pins should be arranged at the column base and w ithin the scope of one story above the
column base, whose diameter shou ld not be less than I 9mm and ve1tical and horizontal distance
should not be greater than 200mm .

Note: Where there is reliable basis, the number of male pins may be determined by calculation.

11.4.18 Design for the reinforced concrete core tube and inner tube shall not only meet the
requirements of A1tic le 9. J. 7 of this specification but also meet the fo llowing requirements:
123
 1 During the seismic design, the minimum reinforcement ratio of distribution reinforcement at
the tube bottom reinforced part of steel frame-reinforced concrete core tube structure should not be
Jess than 0.35%: that at other parts of tube should not be less than 0.30%;

3
5

(a) Hinged connection (b) Hinged connection

(c) Hinged connection (d) Rigid connection

Figure 11.4.1 6 Connection Structure Sketch of Steel Bea m, Section Steel Concrete Beam and Concrete Core Tube
I-Male pin: 2-High strength bolt and slotted hole: 3-Stcel beam: 4-End plate of embedded part: 5-Penetrating reinforcement:
6~oncretc wall: 7-Embedded reinforced concrete column in wall

2 During the seismic design, the length of constrained boundary members at the tube bottom
reinforced part of steel frame-re inforced concrete core tube structure along the wall limb should take
1/4 of the section height of wall limb: the wall above the tube bottom reinforced part should be
arranged with constrained boundary members according to the requirements of A1ticle 7.2.15 of this
specification;

3 Where the connection beam has insufficient shear resistant sections, measures such as
arranging section steels or steel plates in the connection beam may be taken.

11.4.19 Design for the structural members in the composite structure shall also meet the relevant
requirements of the national current standard "Code for Design of Steel Structures" GB 50017, .. Code
for Design of Concrete Structures" GB 50010, "Technical Specification for Steel Structure of Tall
Buildings" JGJ 99 and "Technical Specification for Steel Reinforced Concrete Compos ite Structures''
JGJ 138.

124
 12 Design of Basement and Foundation

12.1 General Req uirement

12.1.1 Tall building should be arranged with basement.

12.1.2 The design of foundation for tall building shall take comprehensive consideration of such
factors as engineering and hydrologic geology of bui lding site, type of topside structure, height of
buildings. construction technology, and economic conditions, so as to enable bui lding to be free of
excessive settlement or incline, and to satisfy the regular service requirements of the building; and
know about the position and elevation of underground facilities and structures nearby, so as to reduce
mutual influence to adjacent bui ldings.

12.1.3 In seismic area, tall building should be kept clear from district unfavorable to seismic
protection; otherwise, the reliable measures shall be taken to keep foundation from fai lure or destroy,
or avoid excessive settlement or incline.

12.1.4 Local matured and reliable technology should be adopted in foundation design; and interaction
effect between foundation and topside structure should be considered. Where ground water level is
requi red to lower in construction period, the effective measures to ensure safety and regular service of
adjacent build ings, structures and underground faci lities shall be taken; and the duration of water level
lowering shall be paid attention, so as to avoid problems, like build ing floating upward caused by
water level rising early after stopping water level lowering.

12.1.5 Tall building shall adopt a type of foundation with better integrity that can satisfy the
requirements in foundation bearing capacity and allowable building deformation, and adj ust
nonuniform settlement; and should adopt raft foundation or raft foundation with pile foundation; may
adopt coffer foundation if necessary. Where the geologic conditions are better and can satisfy the
requi rements in fo undation bearing capacity and defonnation, the foundation type may beam-crossing
fou ndation or other types; where the fou ndation bearing capacity or deformation cannot satisfy the
design requirements, it may be pile foundation or composite foundation.

12.1.6 The centroid of foundation base for tall build ing major structure should superpose on gravity
load center of permanent action; when adopting pi le fo undation, the vertical rigid ity center of pile
foundation should superpose on permanent gravity load center of tall bui ld ing.

12.1.7 Under the combined action of gravity load and horizontal load standard va lues, or gravity
load representative value and freq uent horizontal earthquake standard value, for tall bu ilding w ith a
height-width ratio greater than 4, the foundation base should not have zero stress zone; for tall building
with a height-width ratio not greater than 4, the area of the zero stress zone between foundation base
and foundation shall not exceed 15% the foundation base area. The foundation base stress may be
calculated out respectively for main building and podium building with larger eccentricity.

12. 1.8 Foundation should be arranged in a certain buried depth. To determ ine the buried depth, such
factors as bui lding height, shape, foundation soi l quality, and seismic precautionary intensity sha ll be
taked comprehensive consideration. The buried depth of foundation shall be counted frm outdoor
Ooori ng to foundation base, and it shou ld meet the following requirements:

1 For natural foundation or composite foundation, it may be 1/1 5 the height of building;
125
 2 For pile foundation, excluding pile length, it may be 1118 the height of building.

Where building adopts rock foundation or is taken with effective measures, the buried depth of
foundation may be less limited than the requirements of Items 1 and 2 in this A1ticle, on the
precond itions of meeting the foundation bearing capacity and stabil ity requiremen ts and the ones
sepecified in Article 12.1. 7 in this specification.

Where foundation has possible slid ing, effective measures to prevent sl iding shall be taken.

12.1.9 Where settlement joint is arranged for tall building foundation and foundation of podiums
connected with it, it shall be considered that foundation of main tall bu ilding shall have reliable lateral
restraint and effective buried depth; without settlement joint, the effective measures shall be taken to
reduce differential settlement and its effect.

12.1.10 The concrete strength grade of tall building fo undation should not be less than C25. Where
there is water-proofing requirement for foundation, the concrete impermeabi lity grade shall be
selected from Table 12.1.10 according to the embedded depth of foundation; elevated drainage layer
may be arranged if necessary.

Table 12. 1. 10 Im permeability Grade of Foundation Waterproo f Concrete

Buried depth of foundation H(m) Impermeability grade

H<IO P6

109/<20 P8

IOS.H<20 P IO

H?JO Pl2

12.1.11 Foundation and basement external wall/base plate, if made of flyash concrete, the concrete
design strength hereof may be the strength index at a age of 60d or 90d.

12.1.12 In the seismic design, fo undation tie beam should be arranged for individual foundation
along two main axles; shear wall foundation shall have better rotation-resisting capac ity.

12.2 Design of Basement

12.2.1 Where the top-slab of tall building basement is designed as the fixing position of superstructure.
it shall meet the following requirements:

1 The basement top plate shall not be arranged with large opening, and the concrete strength
grade hereof shall meet the relevant requirements of Article 3 .2.2 in this specification. The fioor
design shall meet the relevant requirements of Article 3.6.3 in this specification;

2 The lateral rigidity ratio first underground story and adjacent upper-layer shall meet the
requirements of Article 5.3.7 in this specification;

3 T he design of beam-column joint on basement top plate corresponding to overground frame

column shall meet one of the fo llowi ng requirements:

1) The area of longitudinal steel reinforcement on each side column section on the first
underground story, besides meeting the requirements of the calculation, shall not be less
than 1.1 times the one on each side of the column correspond ing the first overground
126
 story; the longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam end top surface and bottom surface on
first underground story shall be 10% larger than the calculated value.

2) The area of the longitudinal steel reinforcement on each side column of the first
underground story shall not be less than 1.1 times of the one on column of the first
overground story corresponding and the su m of the bend bearing capacities (actually
arranged at same direction) of the lower column upper end and beam end crosssection on
right and left sides of the basement top plate beam-column joint shall not be less than 1.3
times the one the lower end (actual arranged) of the column corresponding on the first
overground story.

4 The cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel reinforcement for boundary components at the
shear wall limb end of basement corresponding to the upper pa1t shall not be less than the one of the
longitudinal steel reinforcement of the first overground story.

12.2.2 In tall building basement design, the unfavorable effects of topside load, rock-soil side
pressure and underground water action shall be taken comprehensive consideration. The basement
should meet the requirements in overall anti-floating, and the measures like drainage, balance weight
addition or pull-resistance anchor pile (rod) may be adopted. ln case, underground water has corrosive
activity, corresponding anti-corrosion measures shall be taken for basement external wall and base
plate.

12.2.3 Deformation joint should not be arranged for tall building basement. Where the length of
basement exceeds the maximum spacing of the expansion joint, later strength of concrete may be used
to reduce cement use: or construction post-placed strip penetrating top plate, bottom and wallboard
may be arranged per 30m-40m. The post-placed strip may be arranged within the intermediate range
of the trisected column space and nearby shear wall, and the direction hereof should be orthogo nal to
the beam and in same span a long vertical direction; the post-placed strip fo r base plate and external
wall should be arranged with additionai waterproof layer; the seal time of the post-placed strip should
be delayed over 45d, the concrete strength grade should be increased by a level, and nonshrinkage
concrete should be adopted and mould in low temperatute.

12.2.4 On the junction between basement base plate and extended basement base plate in tall
bu ilding major structure, the section thickness and distributed reinforcement shall be strengthened
properly.

12.2.5 The design of tall building basement external wall sha ll meet the load-carrying requirements
under the action of water and soil pressure and ground load side pressure, and the vertically and
horizontally distributed steel reinforcement shall be arranged in double-layer and two-way mode, the
spacing should not be greater than l SOmm, and the reinforcement ratio should not be less than 0.3 %.

12.2.6 The periphery backfill for tall building basement shall adopt graded sand/stone, sandy so il or
lime soil and be tamped in layers.

12.2.7 For basement with window or shaft shall be arranged with external retaining wall, and
reliable connection shall be arranged with retaining wall and basement external wall.

12.3 Design of Foundation

12.3.1 Tall building basic design shall give priority to reducing fou ndation defo1111ation and differential
127
deformation under the action of long term gravity load. In the calculation of foundation deformation,
load effect transmitted to foundation base shall adopt quasi-permanent combination of load action
under serviceability limit state, and not be counted in wind load and earthquake action; where
foundation base area and buried depth are determined by foundation bearing capacity or the quantity
of piles is determined by pile foundation bearing force, load effect transmitted to founda tion or
bearing platform bottom shall adopt standard conbination of loads effect under normal operating
condition, and the corresponding resistance shall adopt characteristic value of foundation bearing
capacity or pile foundation bearing force; under wind load combination effect, the maximum foundation
base counter stress shall not be larger than 1.2 times the bearing force characteristic value, and the
average foundation base counter stress shall not be larger than the characteristic value of the bearing
force; under earthquake action combination effect, the checking calcu lation of foundation bearing
capacity shall comply with the requirements of the current national standard "Code fo r Seismic
Design of Buildings" GB 50011.

12.3.2 Where tall building foundation is embedded into ragstone, sandy or other mattress layer may
be arranged nearby foundation and on bottom surface, and the thickness of the mattress layer may
adopt 50mm- 100mm; and the practice of filling concrete in large tank shou ld not be adopted.

12.3.3 The plan size of raft foundation shall be determined according to factors such as foundation
soil bearing force, topside structure layout and load distribution on topside structure.

12.3.4 The plate thickness of flat raft foundation may be determined by calculation according to
punching shear bearing capacity, and it shou ld not be less than 400mm. in punching calculation, the
additional shear force caused by unbalanced moment on gravity center of critical punching section
shall be considered. Where raft plate cannot meet the punching shear bearing capacity requirement on
some column, raft under the column may be intensified partially or arranged with punching resistant
steel reinforcement.

12.3.5 Where foundation is uniform, topside structure has better rigidity, and variance in topside
structure column spacing or column load does not exceed 20%, onl y local bending action may be
considered for tall building raft foundation, and the local bending action may be calculated by
converse floor method. When not conforming to the above-mentioned conditions, the local bending
action should be calculated according to elastic foundation plate.

12.3.6 Raft foundation shall adopt two-way mesh reinforcement steel fa bric respectively arranged
top and bottom surface of the plate, the stressed steel bar diameter should not be less than l2mm, the
spacing of bars should not be less than l 50mm and shoud not be larger than 300mm.

12.3.7 Where the width of ribbon strip for beam plate raft foundation is less than the column width.
ribbon strip may be haunched on column side and it shall meet corresponding construction requirements.
Longitudinal steel reinforcement for wall and column shall be crossed into ribbon strip and it shall
meet the requirements in steel bar anchorage length.

12.3.8 The beam height of beam-plate raft foundation shall include base plate thickness, and it
should not be less than 1/6 the average column space. The beam height shall be determined by taking
comprehensive consideration of factors such as load, column space and geologic condition, and meet
the requirements in bearing force.

12.3.9 When meeting the requirements of foundation bearing capacity, the periphery of raft
foundation should not extended or enlarged more outwards. When it needs be projected outwards, raft
128
foundation should be projected with its ribbon strip.

12.3.10 Pile foundation may adopt reinforced precase concrete pile, bored concrete pile or piling bar.
Pile foundation bearing platform may adopt independent bearing platform under column, two-way
crossing beam, raft bearing platform and box type bearing platform. pile foundation selection and
bearing platform design shall be considered according to factors such as topside structure type, load,
pile-passing, pile tip bearing stratum quality, underground water level, construction condition and
experience, and pile material supply condition.

12.3.11 Design for vertical bearing force, horizonta l bearing fo rce and pull-resistance bearing force
of pile foundation shall meet the relevant requirements of the current professional standard " Technical
Code for Building Pile Foundations" JGJ 94.

12.3.12 The arrangement of pile shall meet the following requirements:

1 The center distance of equal-diameter pile shall not be less than 3 times the side length or
diameter of pile cross section; the center distance of pedestal pile shall not be less than 1.5 times the
pedestal diameter, and the clear distance between two extended heads should not be less than Im.

2 In pile arrangement, the force concurrence point of all pile cap bearing forces shall superpose
w ith the action point of corresponding vertical permanent load resultant forces, and the pile
fou ndation shall have larger moment caused along the direction of relatively big moment cause by the
horizontal force.

3 In flat pile raft foundation, piles should be arranged under column or wall; if necessary,
arranged fully; and <lensed properly under core tube. In beam plate pile raft foundation, piles should
be arranged under foundation beam or column. In pile box foundation, piles should be arranged under
wall. For large diameter pile with a diameter of not less than 800mm, each may be arranged with a
column .

4 Relatively hard soil layer shall be used as pile tip bearing stratum. The depth of the pile tip
(pile diameter d) total-cross-section, for cohesive soil or silty soil, should not be less than 2d; for sandy
soil, it should not be less than l.5d; for rubble soil, it should not be less than I d. Where there is soft
underlying bed, the thickness of the hard bearing stratum under thepile tip should not be less than 4d.

In the seismic design, the depth of the pipe entering into gravel soil, moulding gravel, coarse
sand, medium sand, compacting silty soil or hard cohesive soil shall not be less than 0.5m; for other
non-rock soil, it shall not be less than I .Sm.

12.3.13 For pile foundation of the build ings with strict requirements in settlement and ones with
friction-type pile, settlement calculation shall be applied. The horizontal d isplacement shall be checked
and calculated for pile foundations stressed with larger permanent horizontal action or one of building
with strict requirements in horizontal displacement.

Where, the pile foundation settlement is calcu lated under serviceabil ity lim it state, load effect
shall adopt quasi-permanent combination; where transve rse deflection, crack resistance and crack
width of pi le foundation are calculated, characteristic load combination and quasi-pennanent load
combination shal l be adopted respectively according to service requirement and crack control level
and the long term actio n affect shall be considered.

12.3. 14 Pi ling bar shal l meet the following requirements:

129
 1 Piling bar may be pipe-shaped or H-shaped, and the material quality hereof shall meet the
requirements of the current relevant standards of the country;

2 Section length of piling bar should not exceed I Sm, and the weld assembly shall adopt strong
connection;

3 Corrosion allowance increase may be applied in pi ling bar anticorrosion treatment; where the
internal wall of steel pipe pile is isolated from the outside, no corrosion protection may be adopted for
internal wall. The corrosion protection rate of piling bar, without field data, may be 0.03min annually
if the pile top is under the underground water level and the underground water is free of corrosion;
and the corrosion reserved shall not be less than 2mm.

12.3.15 The connection of pile and bearing platform shall meet the following requirements:

1 The length of pile top embedded into bearing platform, for large diameter pile, should not be
less than lOOmm; for medium or minor diameter pile, it should not be less than 50mm;

2 The pile top longitudinal reinforcement of concrete pile shall be inserted into bearing
platform, and the anchorage length hereof shall meet the releva nt requirements of current national
standard "Code for Design of Concrete Structures" GB 500 I 0.

12.3.16 The plan size of coffer foundation shall be determined according to factors such as
foundation earth bearing force, topside structure layout and loads. the external wall should be
arranged along the bu ilding periphery and the internal wall shall be arranged evenly longitudinally
and transversely along topside structure column grid or shear wall, and the total area of wall horizontal
section should not be less than -1/10 the horizontal projected area of the external wall overall size of
coffer foundation. For coffer foundation with plane length-width ratio larger than 4, the horizontal
section area of the longitudinal wall hereof shall not be less than l / 18 the horizontal projected area of
the external wall overall size of coffer foundation.

12.3.17 The height of coffer fou ndation shall meet the requirements in bearing force, rigidity and
building use function of the strucure, and generally it should not be less than 1/20 the coffer foundation
length, and should not be less than 3m. Herein, the coffer foundation length excludes cantilever slab
patt outside of the wall.

12.3.18 T he thickness of top plate, base plate and wall for coffer foundation shall be determined
according to the requirements in load carrying condition, overall rigidity and water-proofing demand.
For coffer foundation without civil air defence design requirements, the thickness of the base plate
shall not be less than 300mm; the one of external wall shall not be less than 250mm, the one of the
internal wall shall not be less than 200mm, and the one of the top plate shall not be less than 200mm.

12.3.19 Where the foundation for podiums connected with tall main building adopts outward-projected
coffer foundation wall or girder, the effective measures shall be taken for outward-projected foundation
bootom to make it have capacity to adapt differential settlement deformation.

12.3.20 Door open ing in coffer foundation wall should be arranged in middle position between
columns, and the calculation of load-bearing capacity shall be applied for upper and lower lintel on
the opening.

12.3.21 Where the soil layer within foundation compressive layer depth range is uniform at ve1tical
and horizontal force directions and the regular frame, shear wall or frame-shear wall structure are
130
arranged on topside structure (on horrizonal and ve11ical plane), the top and base plate of coffer
foundation may be calculated only in consideration of local bending; in calculation, the base plate
counter stress shall be deducted by plate deadweight and deadweight of layer and fill on it, and the top
plate load shall be considered according to the actual situation. Overal bending effect may be
considered in the structyre.

Besides meeting the calculation requirements, the reinforcement for top plate and base plate of
coffer foundation, on support at longitudinal and transverse direction shall have 1/3-1 /2 penetrating;
and the mid-span steel bars shall all be penetrated according to the actual calculat ion. Steel bar should
adopt mechanical connection; the length of overlapping, if use, shall be considered according to
tensile reinforcement.

12.3.22 Top plate, base plate and wal l for coffer foundation shall adopt double-layer two-way
reinforcement. The diameter of ve11ical and horizontal steel reinforcement for wall shall not be less
than I Omm, and the spacing hereof shall not be larger than 200mm. except shear wall in upper part,
wall crown of internal and external wall should be arranged with full-length constructional bars with a
diameter of not less than 20mm.

12.3.23 The length of column longitudinal steel reinforcement (on topside strucmre bottom) stretching
into coffer foundation wall shall meet the following requ irements:

I For inner column with coffer foundation wall existing three or four sides under column,
besides longitudinal steel reinforcement at the four corners of the except are directly extended to
fou ndation base, other steel bars may be stretched to 40 times the longitudinal steel reinforcement
d iameter under the top plate bottom;

2 Longitudinal steel reinforcement for external column and column connected with shear wall
shall be directly extended to foundation base.

131
 13 Construction of Tall Building

13.1 General Requirement

13.1.1 The construction organization in charge of tall and super-tall building shall have corresponding
qualifications .

13.1.2 Construction organization shall carefully get famil iar with the drawing, and participate in the
design d isclosure and drawing review.

13.1.3 Before construction, construction organization shall, according to engineering characteristics

and execution conditions, as well as relevant regulations, compile construction organ ization design
and construction scheme, and then conduct technical disclosure.

13.1.4 In compiling the construction scheme, correspond ing construction condition s imulation and
force analysis shall be carried out according to the pressure influence of construction method, climbing
equipment attached to wall, vertical transpo1tation equipment and local temperature, wind force and
other natural conditions on structure and construction members.

13.1.5 Construction at winter shall meet the requirements of "Specification for Winter Construction
of Building Engineering" JGJ I 04. Under the cl imate conditions of rainy period, high temperature and
dry heat, special construction scheme shall be compiled.

13.2 Surveying

13.2.1 Construction surveying shall meet the relevant requirements of current national standard
"Code for Engineering Surveying" GB 50026, and constructional measurement plan shall be compiled
according to the plane surface, shape, number of storeys, height, site conditions and construction
requirements of buildings.

13.2.2 The measuring instrument adopted in tall building construction shall be in accordance with
the relevant requirements of national administrative depaitment to be carried out verification.
cal ibration and qualification before use. The accuracy of measuring apparatus shall meet the fol lowing
requirements:

1 In site horizontal control surveying, electronic total station or telemeter, with distance
accuracy not less than ± (3mm+2 x 1o-6 xD) and angle measurement accuracy not Jess than ±5" rank.
should be used (Dis the distance measurement, in mi llimeters);

2 In site elevation measurement the automatic level compensator with accuracy not less than
DSZ3 shall be used;

3 In the ve1tical fling measurement of axial line, laser theodolite of ±2" rank or automatic laser
vertical apparatus should be used.

13.2.3 As for the construction items of large and medium-type tall buildings, it shall be established
with horizontal control network on field zone, and then separately established with the horizontal
control network of buildings; as for the independent construction item of small scale or high accuracy,
the horizontal control network of bui ldings can be directly implanted. Control network shall be
132
positioned and measured according to the property line after the rechecking or the control point of
urban survey, and pile position protection shall be done well.

1 Horizontal control network on field zone can, according to the orographic condition on fie ld
zone and the arrangement of buildings, be implanted into the grids in building, traverse net, triangular
mesh, corner net or GPS net. The maj or technical requirements of grids in bui lding shall be in
accordance with the requirements in Table 13 .2.3- I.

Table 13.2.3-1 Major Technical Requirements of Grids in Building

Grade Length of side (m) Mean error of angle measuring (") Relative mean error of length of side

Grade I 100-300 5 1130000

Grade II 100-300 8 1/20000

2 Horizontal control network of building shou ld be implanted into rectangular. In some special
occasion, it may also be laid into a cross-shaped main axis or a polygon parallel to the external outside
of build ing. Its major technical requirements shall be in accordance with the requirements in Table
13.2.3-2.

Table 13.2.31-2 Major Technical Requirements of Horizontal Control Network of Buildings

Grade Mean error of angle measuring (") Relative mean error of length of side

Level I 7" 1-Jn 1/30000

Grade II 15"1fn 1120000

Note: n is the span number of building.

13.2.4 The external outline of building sha ll be based on building horizontal control network to be
cast and measured towards the cushion course of concrete floor. After closing for calibration and
qualification, the detail axial line and related border line shall be laid. The allowable deviation of
fo undation 's external outli ne of axial line shall be in accorda nce with the requirements in Table
13.2.4.

Table 13.2.4 Allowable Deviation in Dimension of Foundation's External Outline of Axial Line

Length L, Width B (m) Allowable deviation (111111)

L(B)S30 ±5

30<L(B)S60 ±10

60<L(B)S90 ± IS

90<L(B)S l20 ±20

I20<L(B)S 150 ±25

L(B)> 150 ±30

13.2.S Tall building construction can adopt the internally pi loting method or outside piloting method
to conduct vertical fli ng measurement of axial line. After the acceptance of the first floor paying-off,
according to the measurement plan, the internally piloting dot shall be set up or the control axis line
shall be led to the opposite of structure and as the reference fo r ve1t ical fling measurement of each
construction layer. The vertical fling measurement of axial shall take control pile of axial line of
build ing as its survey station. The allowable dev iation of vertical fling measurement shall be in
accordance with the requirements in Table 13.2.5 .
133
 Table 13.2.5 A llowable Deviation of Axial Line' s Vertical Fling Measurement

Item Allowable deviation (mm)

Each layer 3

HS30 5

30<HS60 10

60<HS90 IS
Total height H (m)
90<HSI20 20

120<HS 150 25

H>I50 30

13.2.6 After control axis is cast and measured to construction layer, closure verification shall be
carried out. Control axis shall include:

1 The external outline of axial line of building;

2 The axial line at both sides of stretch seam and settlement joint;

3 The axial line at both sides of elevator hoistway and staircase;

4 Boundary axial lines of unit and the section of construction running water.

In the paying off of the construction, axial line shall be first verified, cast and measured on
structural plan; and then detail axial line and the side line of wall. column, beam, door and window
and entrance to cave etc shall be measured. The allowable deviation of paying off shall be in
accordance with the requirements in Table 13.2.6.

Table 13.2.6 Allowable Deviation of Paying off in Construction Layer

Item Allowable deviauon (mm)

LS30 ±5

The length of main axis of external 30<LS60 ± 10

outline l (m) 60<LS90 ±15

'
l >90 ±20

Detail axial line ±2

Side line of bearing wall, beam and column ±3

Side line of non bearing wall ±3

The line at entrance to cave of door and window ±3

13.2.7 Site elevation control network shall be measured according to the benchmark after rechecking:
the measurement elevation should adopt the echo measure method. Its closure error shall not exceed
±6 fn mm (n is the number of survey station) or ±20 .JL mm (L is the length of measuring line, in
kilometer).

13.2.8 Vertical transfer of elevation shall be measured vertically from the starting elevation line at
the ground floor and each building shall be transferred up respectively from three positions. When the
elevation difference of three points is less than 3mm, its average value shall be taken, otherwise the
remeasurement shall be carried out. The allowable deviation of elevation shall be in accordance with
the requirement in Table 13.2.8 .
134
 Table 13.2.8 Allowable Deviation of Vertical Transfer of Elevation

Item Allowable deviation (mm)

Each layer ±3

HS.30 ±5

30<HS.60 ±10

60<HS.90 ±15
Total height H (m)
90<HS.120 ±20

120<1/S. 150 ±25

H>150 ±30

13.2.9 Before the sealing of the enclosing structure of building, external piloting axial line shall be
measured inside the structure as the reference of interior decoration and equipment installation
paying-off.

13.2.10 Subsidence and deformation observation shall be carried out according to the design
requirements on tall buildings, which shall meet the relevant requirements of national current standard
"Code for Design of Building Foundation" GB 50007 and "Code for Deformation Measurement of
Building and Structure" JGJ 8.

13.3 Foundation

13.3.1 Before foundation construction. the construction scheme of groundwater conditioning, foundation
pit supporting, and suppo1t struc.ture dismantling and basic structure shall be Fomrnlated according to
construction drawing, date of geologic examination and site operation condition. Special demonstration
should be carried out on deep foundation pit support.

13.3.2 Deep foundation construction shall meet relevant requi rements of national current standard
··Technical Specification for Box Type and Raft Foundation of Tall Building" JGJ 6, "Technical
Specification for Building Pile Foundation" JGJ 94, "Technical Specification for Retaining and
Protection of Building Foundation Excavations" JGJ I 20, "Safety Technique Specifications for Cubic
Meter of Earth and Stone in Building Operation" JGJ 180, ·'Specifications for Bolt-shotcrete Suppo1t"
GB 50086, "Code for Acceptance of Construction Qual ity of Building Foundation" GB 50202 and
"Technical Specification for Construction P it in Engineering Monitoring" GB 50497, etc ..

13.3.3 1n the foundation pit and foundation construction, measures of rain precipitation, artificial
recharge and waterproof cu1tain etc shall be taken to prevent the underground water afTecti ng the
construction and environment. According to soil quality, ground water condition and different
precipitation depth, the precipitation plan of water catchment in open drainage, singe level well point,
multilevel well point, ejector well point or pipe well shall be adopted. The stopp ing time of rain
precipitation shall meet the design requirements.

13.3.4 Slope excavation, support methods and reverse construction method or semi-reverse constiuction
method shall be adopted in foundation engineering for construction.

13.3.5 Methods of soil-nai ling wall, steel sheet pile, underground diaphragm wall and reverse
construction for arch wall etc can be selected in the support structure and its space fu nction and the
combination with permanent structure shall be considered. When cantilever structure can't be adopted,

135
soil anchor, horizontal internal bracing, the incline support and ring beam support and other anchored
or internal bracing system can be selected.

13.3.6 Methods of compaction pile slip casing by pressure and deep zone stirring etc can be adopted
in foundation treatment.

13.3.7 In the construction of foundation pit, the whole process of safety monitoring and massage
feedback of the surrounding buildings (structure) and underground line shall be strengthened and
protective measures and emergency plan shall be Formulated.

13.3.8 Support dismantling shall be carried out in the reverse order of support execution; the
variance of slope protection in dismantling shall be monitored to Formulate emergency plan.

13.3.9 The quality inspection of engineering pile can adopt the methods of high strain, low strain
and static test or core sampling etc to test the defect, bearing capacity and completeness of pile body.

13.4 Vertical Transportation

13.4.1 Vertical transportation equipment shall be with certificate of quality; its quality and safety
performance shall meet the requirements of relevant national standard; and its acceptance shall be
carried out according to relevant regulations.

13.4.2 The acceptance, installment, use and dismantling of the hoisting equipment, concrete pump
sent equipment and builders lift etc selected in the tall building construction shall respectively meet
the relevant requirements of national current standard "Safety Rules for Lifting Appliances" GB 6067,
Tower Crane" GB/T 5031, "Safety Specifications for Tower Crane" GB 5144, "Concrete Pump''
GB/T 13333. " Standard for Builders Lift" GB/T I 0054, "Safety Specifications for Builders Lift" GB
10055, "Technical Regulation for Concrete Pump Sent Construction" JGJ/T 10, "Safety Procedure for
Use of Construction Machinery" JGJ 33 and '·Technical Regulation for Machinery Surveying on
Construction Site" JGJ 160 etc ..

13.4.3 The allocation of vertical transportation equipment shall be determined according to the
layout of structural plan, transportation volume, hosting capacity and size of single piece, parameter
of apparatus and construction period requirement and other factors. Special construction plan shall be
compiled for the installment, use and dismantling of vertical transportation equipment.

13.4.4 The equipment, installment and use of tower crane shall meet the fol lowing requirements:

1 Recalculation of bearing capacity, stead iness and deformation shall be carried out on base
foundation and engineering structure according to the technical requirements of crane, when tower
crane is arranged at the edge of fou ndation pit, it shall meet the safety requirement of foundation pit
support.

2 In adopting multistation tower crane, there shall be anticollision measure.

3 Before operation, inspection on rigging, machines and tools shall be carried out. After using
every time. each facility shall be carried out the maintenance prevention in accordance with
specification.

4 When air velocity is more than pyatyi, the tower came shall not be carried out the roof
hoisting, joining height or dismantling operation.
136
 5 When tower crane of adhesion system is attached to the bui lding, it shall meet its technical
requirements. The maximum distance of attachment point should not be larger than 25m. The
embedded members setting of attachment point shall be approved by design organization.

13.4.5 The equipment, installment and use of concrete pump shall meet the following requirements:

1 The model selection and equipment numbers of concrete pump shall be detennined according
to the maximum height of delivery of concrete, horizontal distance, output and pouring volume.

2 Piping design shall be carried out in compiling the special plan of pump concrete; in seasonal
construction, thermal insulation or insulation measures shall be taken on the transm ission pipeline
according to requirements.

3 In adopting reiay pump to carry out concrete pump sending, the transmitting capacity of the
up and down pumps shall be matched. The structural beari ng capacity of the floor w here is set up the
relay pump shall be recalculated.

13.4.6 The equipment and installment of builders lift shall meet the following requirements:

1 When the building height exceeds 15 floors or 40111, construction elevator shall be arranged
and the product with reliable falling protection lifting system shall be selected;

2 The selection of bui lders lift shall be determined according to the building shape, building
area, amount oftraffic, construction period requirements and terms of delivery etc.;

3 The determi nation of the builders lift's position shall be convenient for installment and the
distribution of personal and material;

4 Before the installation of builders lift, design shall be carried out on its foundation and
anchor device attached to wall and drainage facility shall be set up around the foundation .

13.5 Scaffold and Falsework

13.5.1 The construction scheme for scaffold and falsework shall be prepared and implemented upon
examination and approval. Special argumentation shall be carried out for construction scheme of tall
or large scaffold or falsework.

13.5.2 For scaffold and falsework, the load value, combination and calculation method as well as
frame body construction and construction requ irements shall meet the reievant req uirements current
professional standards of the country ·'Standard for Safety Inspection of Building Construction" JGJ
59, "Technical code for Safety of Steel Tubular Scaffold with Couplers in Construction" JGJ 130,
''Technical Code for Safety of Frame Scaffo ldings with Steel Tubules in Construction" JGJ l 28,
"Technical Code for Safety of Cuplok Steel Tubular Scaffolding in Construction" JGJ 166, "Technical
Code for Safety of Forms in Construction" JGJ 162, etc ..

13.5.3 Reasonable type of external scaffold shall be selected according to the bu ilding height:

1 For building lower than 50m, external scaffold should adopt ground scaffold or cantilevered
scaffold;

2 For building higher than 50m, it should adopt attached lifting scaffo ld or cantilevered
scaffold.
137
13.5.4 Ground scaffold should adopt doub le-row fastener-type steel pipe scaffold, frame scaffolding
with steel tubules, or socket type steel pipe scaffo ld.

13.5.5 Cantilevered scaffold shall meet the following requi rements:

1 Overhanging members should adopt H-section steel, and frame body should adopt double-
row fastener type steel pipe scaffold or cleated. or socket type steel pipe scaffold;

2 The section height of scaffold erected by sections shall not exceed 20m;

3 Overhanging members may be fixed with embedded parts, and the embedded pa1ts shal l be
made of steel not applied with co ld treatment;

4 Where cantilever support is set on balcony, cantilever beam or large-span beam, its safety
shall be checked and calculated.

13.5.6 Tipping stage shall meet the followi ng requirements:

1 Design and checking calcu lation shall be carried out for tipping stage structure and the
special construction plan shall be prepared;

2 Tipping stage shall be disengaged with external scaffold;

3 Tipping stage must not be used under overload state.

13.5.7 Falsework shou ld adopt tool type suppott and shall meet the requirements of the relevant
standard.

13.6 Formworks

13.6.1 Special design shall be carried out in formwork and construction scheme shall be compiled.
Template program shall be determined according to planefonn, structural form and execution conditions.
The calculations of bearing capacity, rigidity and stability shall be carried out towards the template
and its ho lder.

13.6.2 The design, fabrication and installment of template shall meet the relevant requirements of
national current standards "Code for Acceptance of Constructional Quality of Concrete Structures'·
GB 50204, "Technical Code of Composite Steel-form" GB 50214, "Technical Code of Slipform
Engineering" GB 50113 , "Technical Regulation for Plywood Form with Steel Frame" JGJ 96 and
"Technical Regulation for Application of As-cast Finish Concrete" JGJ 169, etc ..

13.6.3 Formwork selection shall meet the following requ irements:

1 Walls should select component framework, such as large template, reverse mould, slip form
and climbing template etc. for construction;

2 Stereotypia form should be adopted on column formwork. Glassfiber reinforced plastics or

steel plate can be adopted for molding in cylindrical form;

3 Plywood with steel frame, composite steel formwork or plywood without frame etc should be
selected for beam and slab form in integral, using prefabrication for installment in integral or slice;

4 Flying formwork (bench formwork, desk formwork), ribbed slab shuttering, permanent
formwork etc should be selected for slab form;
138
 5 Hinged cylindrical large template should be selected for e levator's shaft's cylinder formwork
and climbing template should be adopted for core tube;

6 As-cast finish concrete, decorative concrete shall meet the design requirements of the
concrete modeling and impressions.

13.6.4 Early-dismantled formwork should be adopted in cast-in-situ floor fo rm work. Late poured
band shall be separately set from the formwork and bracket at its both sides of the beam and pate
structure.

13.6.5 The whole piece of sheet steel, as well as plywood with steel frame or steel plate with frame,
plywood assembly can be adopted for large formwork board. W hen loaded by the external formwork
at the upper layer of the hanging triangular bracket support, concrete strength of the cast-in-place
external wall shall reach 7.5MPa. When large formwork is dismantled and lifted, bumping against the
wall is strictly prohibited.

The allowable deviation of large formwork installment shall be 111 accordance with the
requirements in Table 13.6.5.

Table 13.6.5 Allowable Deviation of Large Form Setting

Item Allowable deviation (mm) lnspccllon method

Position 3 lnspcctmg with a steel ruler

Elevation ±5 Level gauge or pulling line, dipstick metering

The width of upper port ±2 Inspecting wnh a steel ruler

Verticality 3 Inspecting with 2m wiring board

13.6.6 The integral design of bearing capacity, rigidity and steadiness shall be carried out on slip
form and its operating platform: and shall meet the requirements of bui ld ing mould. Before the
construction of climbing form, it shall be in accordance with the requirements of serial construction to
make overall arrangement and lift the machines, tools and fittings etc. The labor equipment, procedure
coordination, vertical transpo11ation and horizontal transpo11 capacity all shal l be correspond ing with
the slip speed. The fonnwork shall have inclination with small upper port and large lower port and its
gradient of single side should be 1/ 1000-2/1 OOO of the height of the formwork. The mold strength of
concrete shall reach no-felling down and no splitting after its molding. The selection of suppo11ing
bars shal l be correspondi ng with the construction of lifting jack. Its length should be 4111-6111. There
shall be at least staggered 500mm at the lappi ng position of the adjacent support bars. The inner joint
in the same depth of section should not exceed 25% of total nu mber. We should select the large-
tonnage lifting jack w ith the rated elevating capacity above 60kN and its asso11ed supp011ing bar of
steel pipe.

The allowable deviation of sl ip form assembly shall be in accordance with the requirements in
Table 13.6.6.

13.6.7 Climbing fo rm shou ld adopt large forrnwork combined of plywood w ith steel frame etc. Its
height shal l be the story height of standard floor add ing I 00mm-300mm . At the rear surface of
formwork and climbing bracket shall be accompanied by c limbing device. C limbing bracket can be
made of structural steel with height of3 .0-3.5 standard floors. Its upright column should be sectioned,
combined with standard knot and connected w ith flange plate; when its pedestal is hooked onto
underlayer wall ing, the wall screw penetrating walls shall not be less than 4 pieces and there shall be
139
equipped with operating platform and safeguard at the bottom. The c limbing device can select
hydraul ic cored jack cored jack, electronic devices and chai n block etc. Climb ing technique can select
mutual climbing between formwork and climbing bracket, between formwork and fo rm work, between
climbing bracket and climbing bracket and integral climbing etc. After each fitting is installed.
tightening inspection shall be carried out towards all the connecting bo lt and screw penetrati ng
through walls and trail climbing and acceptance shall also be carried out. ln climbing, the concrete
strength at the stained pa1t of screw penetrating through the walls sha ll not be less than 1OMPa . It
shall be of steady rise, steady fall ing and peace, steady emplacing. It shall not be stuck by other
component pa1t. T he climbing of each unit shall be completed within one workbench class. After
fi nishing the climbing, it shall be timely fixed.

Table 13.6.6 A llow able Deviation of Slip Fo rm Assem b ly

Item Allowable deviation (mm) Inspection method

The position of the structural axis and corresponding structural

3 Inspecting with a steel ruler
axis of forrnwork

Horizontal direction 3
The enclosure position deviation inspecting with a steel ruler
Venical direction 3

Within the plane 3

Vertical misalignment of lifting frame Inspecting with 2111 wiring board
Outside the plane 2

Relative elevation deviation of cross girder of the lifting frame for Level gauge or pull ing line, dipstick
5
cmplacing lifting jack metering

The size deviation of form work with Upper port - l

Inspecting with a steel ruler
gradient taken into consideration Lower pon +2

The position deviation of the lifting Jack "ithin plane 5

Inspecting with a steel ruler
installment Outside the plane 5
I
The deviation between the diameter of round forrn and side
5 Inspecting with a steel ruler
length of square form !
The smoothing deviation two adjacent formwork planes 2 Inspecting with a steel ruler

The allowable deviation of cl imbi ng formwork assembling shall be in accordance with the
requi rements in Table 13.6.7. When the tightening torque of screw penetrating into the wall is
40N · m- 50N · m. torque spanner can be adopted fo r testing.

Ta bl e 13.6. 7 Allowa ble Deviat ion of C limbing Template Assem b ling

Item Allowable deviation Inspection !11Cthod

The hole site left on wall surface of screw

±5111111
penetrating into the wall The hole diameter of Inspecting with a steel ruler
+2mm
screw penetrating into the wall

Large forrnwork It is the same with this specificahon Table 13.6.5

Climbing bracket: ±Smm I

And mspecting with horizontal steel ruler
Elevation 5mm or 0.1 % of the height of climbing
Line fal ling
Venicality bracket
I
13.6.8 In the construction of cast-in-place hollow block formwork, measures shall be taken to
prevent the floating upward of prefabrication core tube and reinforcement bar when pouring the
140
concrete.

13.6.9 Form stripping shall meet the following requirements:

I In the construction at normal temperature, the concrete removal strength shall not be less
than l .5MPa and walling removal strength shall not be less than 1.2MPa;

2 Form removal and insulation in winter shall meet the requirements of critical intensity of
freezing resistance of the concrete;

3 In the form removal of beam and base plate, when the span is no larger than 8m, the concrete
strength shall reach 75% of the design strength; when the span is more than 8m, the concrete strength
shall reach l 00% of design strength;

4 In the form removal of overhanging members, concrete strength shall reach I 00% of design
strength;

5 In the form removal of late pouring band, concrete strength shall reach l 00% of design
strength.

13.7 Steel Reinforcement

13.7.1 The raw material, processing, installment and acceptance of reinforcing work shall meet the
relevant requirements of '·Code for Acceptance of Constructional Quality of Concrete Structures" GB
50204.

13.7.2 High level concrete structure should adopt should adopt high tensile steel bar. The quantity,
specification, type and physical performance shall meet the design requirements .

13.7.3 The reinforcement bar with heavy gauge shou ld adopt should adopt mechanical connection.
The mechanical connection can adopt the methods of straight thread muff Joint and sleeve squeezing
connection etc. In welding, the method of electro slag pressure welding and other methods can be
adopted. Splice of reinforcement shall meet the current professional standard "Technical Specification
for Mechanical Splicing of Steel Reinforcing Bars" JGJ I 07, "Specification for Welding and Acceptance
of Reinforcing Steel Bars" JGJ 18 and "Testing Methods of Welded Joints of Steel Bars" JGJ 27, etc ..

13.7.4 In spot we lding mesh reinforcement steel fabric, it shall meet the relevant requirements of
current professional standard "Techn ica l Specification for Concrete Structures Reinforced w ith
Welded Steel Fabric" JGJ 114.

13. 7.5 In adopting cold rolled ribbed steel wires and Bars and prestress w ith steel w ir.e, steel strand,
it shall meet the relevant requirements of the current professiona l standard "Technical Specification
for Concrete Structures with Cold-Rolled Ribbed Steel Wires" JGJ 95 and "Steel Strand, Steel Tendon
and Unbounded Prestressed Tendon" JG 3006, etc ..

13. 7.6 Frame girder, co lumn in fall and longitudinal stressed steel reinforcements of the beam shall
be put inside the column longitudinal steel reinforcement and the reinforcement bar of secondary
beam shall be laid inside the stub pole reinforcement bar when both ways are stub pole, reinforcement
bar position shall be put in accordance with design requirements.

13.7.7 The bending radius of stirrup, size of internal diameter, straight length of the hook, banding
distance and position, and other building methods shall meet design specification. With opening
141
stirrup, the opening direction shall be put at compression zone and arranged staggeringly. With spiral
hoop and other new type of stirrup, it shall meet design and technological requirements.

13.7.8 In the construction of profiled steel sheet-concrete composite floor, the position and cover
thickness of reinforcement shall be ensured to be accurate. The reinforcement bar truss can be
processed in plant and welded w ith profiled steel sheet into an integral reinforcement bar truss
formwork system.

13.7.9 The reinforcement bar of beam, plate, wall and column should adopt the installation methods
of prefabrication. In the transponation and assembly process of framework of steel reinforcement and
reinforcing mesh, protective measures shall be taken for strengthening.

13.8 Concrete

13.8.1 Tall buildings should adopt premixed concrete or the concrete supp lied by mixing station
with reliable quality control and automatic scale shutter. The premixed concrete shall meet the
requirements of current national standard " Premixed Concrete" GB/T 14902. The pouring of concrete
should adopt serial construction from pump into form and shall meet the requirements of the current
professional standard "Concrete Pump Construction Technical Regulation" JGJ/T 10.

13.8.2 The raw material, mix design, construction and acceptance of concrete works shall meet the
relevant requirements of national current standard "Standard for Quality Control of Concrete" GB
50164, "Code for Utility Technical of Concrete Admixh1re" GB 50119, "Technical Specification for
Use of Flyash Concrete" GB 50146, "Standard for Evaluation of Concrete Compressive Strength'"
GB/T 50 I 07 and "Technical Specification for Fair-faced Concrete Construction" JGJ 169, etc ..

13.8.3 Tall building should select particular high performance concrete according to different
engineering requirement. In adopting high strength concrete, cement, coarse and fine aggregates,
admixture and additive shall be optimized, and preparation, pouring and maintenance shall be done well.

13.8.4 When premixed concrete is schlepped to the pouring place, the in specification of slump
constant shall be carried out. Its allowable deviation shall be in accordance with the requirements in
Table 13.8.4.

Table 13.8.4 Allowable Deviation of Concrete Slump Constant by Site Actual Measurement

The requirement of slump constant Allowable deviation (mm)

<50 ±JO

50-90 ±20

>90 ±30

13.8.5 The placement lift shall ensure segregat ion not to happen on concrete. T he free height of
concrete pouring from altitude shall not be larger than 2m . the pouring distance of concrete within
column and wall formwork shall meet the requirements in Table 13 .8.5; when it fails to meet it, the
devices of collude, downspouting, elephant trunk and etc should be added and set up.

13.8.6 In the process of pouring concrete, special person shall be assigned for observation of the
form bracket, reinforcement bar, embedded parts and the deformation and shifting of blackout. Once
problem is found , measures are taken timely.

142
 Table 13.8.5 Pouring Distance Limit of Concrete I nsid e the Column and Wall Formwor k

Condition The pouring distance of concrete

Aggregate size >25mm '.03

Aggregate size S25mm '.06

13.8.7 After pouring concrete, the maintenance shall be carried out timely. According to different
area, season and engineering characteristics, waterspreading, integrative heat storage, electrical, far
infrared ray, steam and other maintenance methods can be selected and covered with plastic cloth,
thermal insulation or by brushing film.

13.8.8 The construction of prestressed concrete structure shall meet the relevant requirements of
national current standard ·'Anchorage, Grip and Coupler for Prestressing Tendons" GB/T 143 70 and
"Concrete Structures Prestressed with Unbonded Tendons" JGJ 92 and etc ..

13.8.9 When the design strength grade of structure column and wall is higher than that of beam and
plate, separation measures shall be taken in border area. The separation position shall be in the
component pa11 of low strength grade and the marginal distance from the component part of high
strength should not be less than 500mm. The high strength grade concrete shall be poured first, and
then comes to the low strength grade one.

13.8.10 The concrete construction slot should be retained at the position where the structure stress is
sma ll and easy for construction.

13.8.11 Late pouring band shall be reserved in accordance w ith the design requirements, poured
with concrete according to specified time and carried out the covering and maintenance. When design
doesn't have any special requirement towards the concrete, the concrete in late pouring band shall be
o ne strength grade higher than its adjacent structure.

13.8.12 The allowable deviation of cast-in-situ concrete structure shall be in accordance with the
requirements in Table 13 .8.12.

Tab le 13.8.12 Allowable Deviation of Cast-in-s it u Concrete St r ucture

Item Allowable deviation (mm)

Axes position 5

:S5m 8
Each layer
Verticality >5m 10

Total height HI! OOO and :030

Each layer ±10

Elevation
Total height ±30

+8, -5 (plastering)
Section dimension
+5, -2 (no plastering)

Surface smoothness (2m length) 8 (plastering), 4 (no plastering)

Embed component 10

The center line position of embedded facility Embedded bolt 5

Embedded duct 5

Center line position of embedded holes !5

143
 Table 13.8.12 (co ntinued)

Item Allowable deviation (mm)

Length and width of shaft as for positioned ccnter line +25, 0

Lill well
The venicality for shaft 's total height (If) Hf l OOOand !'030

13.9 Massive Concrete

13.9.1 Before the construction of bulk mass and overlength structural concrete, special construction
plan shall be compiled and temperature calculation of mass ive concrete shall be carried out. If
necessary, anticrack reinforcement (silk) net can be set

13.9.2 Massive concrete construction shall meet the requirements of current national standard "Code
for Construction of Massive Concrete" GB 50496.

13.9.3 When adopting flyash concrete, the bulk mass fou ndation plate and the basement external
wall concrete can use 60d or 90d strength to carry out the mix design and construction.

13.9.4 The mix propo1tion of bulk mass and overlength structural concrete shall determine through
trial preparation. Raw material shall meet the requirements of relevant standard. It should select low
alkali cement of mid-low cement content water heat transmittion, w ith adequate pulverized fuel ash
and additives of delayed coagulation type blended and cement content shall be controlled.

13.9.5 The vibrating of massive concrete pouring shall meet the following requirements:

1 It should avoid high temperatures construction. If the high temperatures construction at

summer vacation time is necessary, measures shall be taken to red uce the internal temperature of
concrete mixture and concrete.

2 According to the area, thickness and other factors, it should take continuous placing in
integral layering way or in lapsing ·way. The supply speed of concrete shall be greater than the initial
condensation speed of speed. Before the initial condensation of the lower-layer concrete, the second
floor concrete pouring shall be carried out.

3 When setting the horizontal construction joint layering upon layering, besides it shall meet
the design req uirements, it still shall determine its positi on and interval time according to the
requirements of temperature crack control in the process of concrete pouring, the deliverabil ity of
concrete, the construction of reinforcing work, embedded duck installment and other factors.

4 It should adopt secondary vibrating technique and the pouring surface shall be timely carried
out secondary mop and press treatment.

13.9.6 The maintenance and temperature measurements of massive concrete shall meet the following
requirements:

1 After pouring massive concrete, the measures of mo isturizing and temperature control shall
be taken within 12 hours. The temperature d ifference between the inside and surface within the
concrete deposit should not be larger than 25 'C . The temperature difference between the surface of
concrete deposit and atmosphere should not be larger than 20 'C;

2 The automatic temperature measurement system should be adopted to measure the temperature

144
and special person is assigned to be responsible for. The point for measuring temperature arrangement
shall have representativeness and temperature measurement frequency shail meet the requirements of
relevant standard.

13.9.7 Overlength massive concrete construction can take the methods of retaining movement joint,
late pouring band construction or jumping storehouse for construction.

13.10 Mixed Structures

13.10. 1 Mixed structure construction shall meet the related requirements of national current
standard "Code for Acceptance of Constructional Quality of Concrete Structures" GB 50204 and
··code for Acceptance of Construction Quality of Steel Structures" GB 50205 and "Technical
Regulations for M ixed Structure of Section Steel Concrete" JGJ 138.

13.10.2 Under construction, the coordination and cooperation between the reinforced concrete
Structure and steel structure construction shall be strengthened. According to structural feature,
construction organization design shall be compiled to determine sequence of construction, the division
of running water section, technological process and resource allocation.

13.10.3 Deepening design shall be carried out before the fabrication of steel structure.

13.10.4 Mixed structure sha ll be in compl iance with the principle that firstl y is the steel structure
installment and then comes to the reinforced concrete execution to organize the construction.

13.10.5 The core tube construction shall come before the steel framework o r sect ion steel concrete
armature construction; the he ight difference should control in 4-8 grade and should meet the inserted
requirement of the construction procedure.

13.10.6 T he vertical member of section steel concrete shall be in accordance w ith the sequence of
steel structure, reinforcement bar, formwork and concrete to organize the construction. The section
steel installment shall at least one segment installment before concrete construction.

13.10.7 ln the construction of steel framework-reinforced concrete tube structure, control of variance
of the ve1tical deformation inside and outside the structure shall be considered.

13.10.8 The steel pipe reinforced concrete structure shall meet the following requirements: shall
meet the following requirements:

1 It should adopt the self-compacting concrete; the concrete pouring inside the tubes can select
the methods of nose downward ordinary pouring, pumping roof hoisting pouring and high position
throwing and fa lling etc ..

2 Adopting the method of downward pouring from nose, the vent ho le observation of pipe wall
at the bottom shall be strengthened; after the grout effuse is ratified and the pouring is sol id, the vent
hole shall be blocked.

3 In adopting the method of roof hoisting pouring by pumping, the roof hoisting pouring
equipment shall be selected reasonably. The roof hoisting speed shall be controlled and the diameter
of steel pipe should not be less than twice than the diameter of pump pipe.

4 In adopting the method of throw ing and fa lling from the high position to pour concrete, the
technical parameter of concrete should be determined through test. With regard to the segment whose
145
throwing and falling degree is insufficient to 4m, it shall be cooperated with manual vibrating. The
3
throwing and falling vol ume once shall be contro lled around 0.7m .

5 The distance between the concrete pouring surface and the we lded j o int of the remaining
we ld ing position shall not be less than 600mm.

6 When the pouring of concrete ins ide the steel pipe is close to the top surface, the thickness of
concrete laitance shall be measured; the cobble volume of identical grade with the former concrete
shall be calculated ; it shall be plunged into and vibrated solid.

7 The cast quality of concrete outside the tubes can adopt tapping method outside of tubes,
ultrasonic testing or core sampling for testing; for the uncompacted patt, it shall be adopted the
drilling mud jack method to carry out the reenforcement.

13.10.9 The stirrup of section steel concrete shou ld adopt should adopt seal hoop and should not
weld di rectly the stirrup to the steel column. The stirrup at the beam-col um n jo int position col umn can
be welded section by sect ion.

13.10.10 When using section steel girder steel skeleton to hang beam shuttering, the calculation of
its bearing capacity and deformation shall be carried out.

13.10.11 In the concrete construction of profiled steel sheet floor, its supporting system shall be
properly set according to its rigidity.

13.10.12 In the concrete construction of section steel, steel plate and RC sheal wall, vent hole shall
be retained at the flange section of section steel. If necessary, pouri ng hole can be set up at the s ide
surface of wall form.

13.10.13 Vent hole and pouring hole of concrete should be reserved at the joint section of beam
column of section steel concrete and the bottom of its flange. When the reinforcement bar is intensive,
self-compacting concrete can be adopted for pouring.

13.11 Complicated Structures

13.11.1 The complex construction, such as concrete transfer story, reinforced layer, connecting
structure, multi-tower structure w ith a large chassis, shall be compiled of special construction plan.

13.11.2 The construction of concrete structure transfer story and reinforced layer shall meet the
following requirements:

1 When the beam of transfer story suppo1t system of plate concrete uses the floor plate of
lower layer or other structure to transfer loading, it shall be determined through calculation. If
necessary, reinforcement measures shall be taken;

2 Loading analyzing and calculation of horizontal thrust shall be carried out towards the
formwork and bracket of the incl ined component parts, such as concrete truss and limos is steel frame.

13.11.3 Overhung structure construction shall meet the fo llowing requirements:

1 The falsework of overhanging members can adopt steel pipe, section stee l and overhung truss
for suppo1t ing. The camber value of formwork should be 0.2%~0.3% of cantilevered length;

2 When adopting the hang formwork, the calculation of the skeletal bearing capacity and
146
deformation shall be made;

3 There shall be measures of controlling the cover thickness of upper stressed steel bar.

13.11.4 Multi-tower structure with a large chassis, the sequence. of construction among towers,
height difference of construction, the setting of late pouring band and the time of concrete pouring
shall meet the design requirements.

13.11.5 The connecting construction of towers shall meet the following requirements:

1 Before the construction of mai n bodys of the towers, the connector construction or hoisting
plan shall be determined;

2 The recalculation shall be carried out toward the partial and integral stress of major structure
according to construction scheme. If necessary, strengthening measures shall be taken;

3 In the construction of main body of the towers, the embedded parts or reserved cavity shall
be set up according to the requirements of connector construction and installation scheme.

13.12 Construction Safety

13.12.1 Tall building construction shall meet the relevant requirements of the current professional
standards ·'Safety Technique Specifications for The High Altitude Operation of Building Operation"
JGJ 80, "Safety Procedure for the Use of Construction Machinery" JGJ 33, "Technical Code for
Safety of Temporary Electrification on Construction Site" JGJ 46, "Technical Code for Safety of
Frame Scaffoldings with Steel 1'ubules in Construction" JGJ 128, ·'Technical Code for Safety of Steel
Tubu lar Scaffold with Couplers 1n Construction" JGJ 130 and ·'Technical Regulation for Safe Work
Practices of Hydraulical Sl ipform" JGJ 65 , etc ..

13.12.2 Integral climbing scaffold of adhesion system shall be identified with product qualification
certificate, use license and permit license.

13.12.3 Reliable lightning arrester shall be set up at construction site.

13.12.4 Safeguard shall be set up at exit and entrance of buildings, mouth of staircase, oending,
foundation pit and around the each layer of buildings.

13.12.5 In the construction of steel fonnwork, there shall be with anticreep measure.

13.12.6 In the construction with self winding, roof hoisting scaffold or operating platform, it shall
be enforced strictly with the operation specifications and implemented after its acceptance.

13.12.7 Tall building construction shall take the measure of upper and lower communication for
contact.

13.12 .8 Tall building construction shall be provided with fire fighting system and firefighting water
system shall meet the requirements of storey fire protection.

13.12.9 The paint and coating for construction shall be kept well, far away from ignition source.

13.13 Green Construction

13.13.1 The construction organ ization design and construction scheme of tal l buildings shall meet
147
the requirement of green construction, and the education and training of green construction shall be
carried out.

13.13.2 The hazardous substances, such as alkali, chlorine and ammonia, m concrete, shall be
controlled.

13.13.3 Under construction. the following energy saving and energy utilization measures shall be
adopted:

1 Formulate measures to raise the mechanical utilization rate and full load full load rate;

2 Adopting the energy-efficient equipment and construction energy saving gaffer; using
current-using equipment of energy saving type;

3 Regular maintenance preventions shall be carried out on equipment.

13.13.4 Under construction, the following water conservation and utilization of water resources
measures shall be adopted:

1 In the process of construction, management shall be canied out on water resources;

2 With the technique of construction water conservation, water conservation facilities, metering
mechanism shall be installed;

3 In the construction of deep foundation pit, the control measures of underground water shall
be taken;

4 The construction site where has conditions should be established water system to implement
the periodic duty of water resource.

13.13.5 Under construction, the following measures of nodal wood and material Utilization shall be
adopted:

1 New technology of rational utilization of nodal wood and material resource. new process.
new material and new facilities shall be adopted:

2 It should adopt recyc ling material:

3 Waste shall be recycled by classification and regenerated for utilization.

13.13.6 Under construction, the following land conservation measures shall be taken :

1 The general layout of construction shall be arranged properly;

2 Saving construction roadway and temporary facilities roadway to avoid or reduce secondary
transportation;

3 Groups running water construction by section shall be organized, labor force balance shall be
carried out and the quantity of temporary facilities and turnover materials shall be reduced.

13.13.7 The environmental protection during construction shall meet the following requi rements:

1 Analysis of the environmental factors in the process of construction shall be carried out, and
antipollution measure shall be Formulated;

2 Dust reducing measure shall be taken on site;

148
 3 Noise reduction measure shall be taken on site;

4 Environment protection building material shall be adopted;

5 Light pollution prevention measure shall be taken;

6 Sewage discharge on site shall meet the relevant requirements. Cleaning shall be carried out
for in-out vehicle on site;

7 The garbage on construction site shall be classified and discharged in accordance with the
Specification:

8 Paint, engine oil and so on shall be kept well without loss or sprinkling.

149
 Appendix A Calculation of the Acceleration of Floor Vertical Vibration

A.0.1 Acceleration of floor vertical vibration should be calculated by time-history analysis method.

A.0.2 Floor vibration peak acceleration caused by people walking may be approximately calculated
according to the following Formula:

F
a = -P g (A.0.2-1 )
P /Jm

Fr -- Poe-0.35/n (A.0.2-2)

Where ap-- Floor vibration peak acceleration (m/s 2);

Fp--Acting force caused by people walking when approximate to the natural vibration
frequency of floor (kN);

p 0--Acting force (kN) caused by people walking, which shall be adopted according to
Table A.0.2;

fn--Vertical natural vibration frequency of floor (Hz);

(J- -Damping ratio of floor, which shall be adopted according to Table A.0.2;

w--Effective weight (kN) of floor impedance, which may be calculated according to

Article A.0.3 of this Appendix;

g- -Gravity acceleration, which shall take 9.8m/s 2.

Table A .0.2 People Walking Act i ng Force and Floor Damping Ratio

Personnel act ivity environment People walking acting force p0 (kN) Floor damping ratio f3

House, office and church 0.3 0.02-0.05

Shopping mall 0.3 0.02

Indoor pedestrian overcrossing 0.42 0.01-002

Outdoor pedestrian overcrossing 0.42 0.01

Note: I Damping ratio in this Table is used to the reinforced concrete fl oor and steel-concrete combined floor;

2 As for house, office and church, damping ratio 0.02 may be used to the situation without furn iture and nonstructural

members, such as paperless electronic office area, open office area and church; damping rat io 0.03 may be used to the

situation with furniture. nonstructural members, and a small amount of demountable partition: damping ratio 0.05 may be

used to the situation with fu ll height filler wall:

3 As fo r the indoor pedestrian overcrossing, damping ratio 0.02 may be used to the overcrossing with dry-hang suspended

ceiling.

A.0.3 Effective weight w of floor impedance may be calculated according to the following Formula:

m = m BL (A.0.3-1)

150
 B=CL (A.0.3 -2)

Where w--Effective weight of floor per unit area (kNlm\ which shall take the sum of
permanent load and effective distribution live load. Effective distribution live load
2
of story: 0.55kN/m for office buildings; 0.3kN/m2 for houses;

L--Beam span (m):

B--Effective mass distribution dispersion of floor impedance (m);

C--Flexural continuity influence coefficient of floor ve11ical to the beam span direction,
which shall take 1 for boundary beam and 2 for intermediate beam.

15 1
 Appendix B Wind Pressure Coefficients of Buildings

B.0.1 Wind pressure coefficients of buildings shall be adopted according to the following requirements
based on the building planeform:

1 Rectangular plane

µ,,

0.80 - ( 0.48 + O.o3 T) - 0.60 - 0.60

Note: His the building height

2 L-shaped plane

.,,.__ .LI "

.u_.
-.J I
.u ,: ,u.,-.
s1
L L
>
,u,,
L
,LI ,.

,l
A.1
~
oo
µ,,

0.80
µ,2

- 0.70
,,,,
- 0.60
µH

-0. 50
µ,5

- 0.50
Jls6

-0.60

45° 0.50 0.50 - 0.80 - 0.70 - 0.70 - 0.80

225° - 0.60 - 0.60 0.30 0.90 0.90 OJO

3 Groove-shaped plane

-0 6 - 0.b - 0.5

-0.7~ -0.7
-0 5 -0 'i
-05 -
-0 7

~
-07

() 8
O.S 08

4 Regular polygon plane and circular plane

152
00
 1.2
1) µ, = 0 .8 + J;; (n is the side number);

2) When the circular tall building surface is rough, µ 5=0.8.

5 Sectorial piane

·0.6

nG~ I

I. 3J. I [ [/.. .>

1 ,

6 Fusiform plane

l}() c=J-06
-0 65

O'
-O 5

O.S
-(I

O.'
6.'

,• I ~ /. ; ! I .;[

7 Cruciform plane
-0 ~

() h

II ~
0.6

~~
0.6/

8 fr shaped plane

o.s Io.s

9 X shaped plane

-·~.~ '~-o9-,o 6

-0.6 - 0.6

0. 8 t 0.8

l l J '2 l l
I I f I
153
 10 * shaped plane

11 Sexangle plane

~
oo
µ,,

0.80
µ,2

- 0.45
I's>

-0.50
µ,,

-0.60
µ ,s

-0.50
µ,,,

- 0.45

30° 0.70 0.40 -0.55 - 0.50 -0.55 -0.55

12 Y shaped plane

I~ µ,,
oo

1.05
10°

1.05
20°

1.00
30°

0.95
40°

0.90
50°

0.50
60°

-0.15

µ.2 J.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 040 -0. 10 j

µ,, -0.70 -0.10 0.30 0.50 0.70 0.85 0.95 I
µ,, - 0.50 -0.50 - 0.55 - 0.60 -0.75 -0.40 -010

µ,5 - 0.50 - 0.55 - 0.60 -0.65 -0.75 -0.45 -0.15

µ,,, - 0.55 - 0.55 -0.60 - 0.70 - 0.65 -0.15 -0.35

µ,, - 0.50 - 0.50 - 0.50 - 0.55 -0.55 - 0.55 -0.55

154
 (continued)

~
µ,s
oo

-0.55
10°

-0.55
20°

-0. 55
30°

-0.50
40°

-0.50
50°

-0.50
60°

-0.50

µ,. -0.50 -0. 50 -0.50 -0.50 -0.50 -0.50 - 0. 50

µr.IO -0.50 -0. 50 -0. 50 -0.50 -0.50 -0.50 -0.50

µ,11 -0.70 -0.60 -0.55 -0.55 -0.55 -0.55 -0.55

µ,12 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.80 0.75 0.65 0.35

155
 Appendix C Horizontal Earthquake Calculation with Equivalent Base

Shear Method

C.0.1 Where the horizontal earthquake action of tall building is calculated by base shear method,
only one degree of freedom may only be considered for each story along the calculation direction
(Figure C) and shall meet the following requirements :

\/ - --.1
•

! -

Figure C Base Shear Method Calculation Sketch

1 Standard value of the horizontal eaithquake action shall be calculated according to the
fo llowing Formula:

(C.0.1-1)

(C.0.1-2)

Where FEk--Standard value of the total horizontal earthquake action of a structure;

a 1--Horizontal se ismic influence coefficient con-esponding to the structural basic natural

vibration period Ti, wh ich shall be determined according to A1ticle 4.3.8 of thi s
specification; structural basic natural vibration period T 1 may be approximately
calculated according to Article C.0.2 of this Appendix, which shall be reduced in
consideration of the influence of non bearing wall;

Gcq - -Representative value for total gravity load of structures in the case of calculating
earthquake action;

Gio-Representative value of total gravity load of structures in the case of calculating

eaithquake action, wh ich shall take the sum of representative values· of gravity load
on each mass point.

2 The standard value of horizontal earthquake action on mass point may be calculated
according to following Fonnula:

F, = ,,G,H, FEk(l-b'n) (i=l. 2, n) (C.0.1 -3 )

IGJHJ
1=1

Where F,--Standard value of horizontal earthquake action on mass point i;

156
 G,, G,--Representative values of the gravity loads respectively concentrated on the mass
points i and), which shall be dete1mined according to A1ticle 4.3 .6 of this specification;

H,, H,-Calculated height of mass points i and) respectively;

6 0 - -Additional seismic action coefficient on the top, which may be adopted according to
Table C.0.1.

Table C.0.1 Additional Seismic Action Coefficient on the Top 0 0

Tg (s) T1> l .4Tg T1:S l.4Tg

::5035 0.08T1+0.07

>0.35. ::50.55 0.08T1+0.0l Omitted

>0.55 0.08T1-0.02

Note: 1 TGis the characteristic period of ground:

2 T1 is structural basic natural vibration period, which may be calculated according to Article C.0.2 of this Appendix, or by
other methods based on the actual measured data in consideration of the influence of seismic action.

3 Standard value of additional horizontal earthquake action on the top of major structure may
be calculated according to the following Formula:

(C.0.1 -4)

Where llF0 --Standard value of additional horizontal earthquake action on the top of major
structure.

C.0.2 As for the frame structure, frame-shearwall structure and shearwall structure whose mass and
stiffness are uniformly distributed along the height, the basic natural vibration period may be calculated
according to the following Formula:

T; = 1. 71J\.;;; (C.0.2)

Where T1- -Structural basic natural vibration period (s);

ui - -Hypothetical horizontal displacement (m) at the structural peak, namely the

representati ve value G, of gravity load concentrated on each story regarded as the
horizontal load of this story, and elastic horizontal displacement at the structural
peak calcu lated according to the relevant requirements of Section 5.1 of this
specification ;

!l'i--Reduction coefficient of nonbearing wall stiffness to the influence of structural

natural vibration period, which may be determined according to Article 4.3.17 of
this specification.

C .0.3 Where the horizontal earthquake action of tall building is calculated by the base shear method,
buildings protruding the roof (staircase, elevator room and water tank room) shou ld be calculated as a
mass point. T he standard val ue of calculated horizontal earthquake action shall be enlarged with the
enhancement coefficient ,80 adopted according to Table C.0.3. Enlarged earthquake action is only used
to the buildings protruding the roof and the major structure members directly connected to them.
157
 Table C.0.3 Earthquake Action E nh a ncement Coeffici ent of Build in gs Protr uding the Rooflln

~
Structural basic natural
0.001 0.0 10 0.050 0.100
vibration period T1 (s) G

0.0 1 2.0 1.6 1.5 l.5

0.25 0.05 1.9 1.8 1.6 1.6

010 1.9 1.8 1.6 1.5

0.0 1 2.6 1.9 1.7 1.7

0.50 0.05 2 .1 2.4 1.8 1.8

0. 10 2.2 2.4 2.0 1.8

0.01 3.6 2.3 2.2 2.2

0.75 0.05 2.7 3.4 2.5 2.3

0.10 2.2 3.3 2.5 2.3

0.01 4.8 2.9 2.7 2.7

1.00 0.05 3.6 4.3 2.9 27

0.10 2.4 4.1 3.2 3.0

0.01 6.6 3.9 3.5 3.5

1.50 0.05 3.7 5.8 3.8 3.6

0.10 2.4 5.6 4.2 3.7

Note: I K., and G., are respectively representative values of lateral stiffness and gravity load of buildings protruding the roof; Kand
G are respectively representative values of lateral sllffness and gravity load of maJOr structure stones, which may take the
mean of each story;

2 Lateral stiffness of story may be calculated by story shear divided by mter-story displacement of story.

158
 Appendix D Check of Stability of Structural Wall

D.0.1 Wall limb of shearwall shall meet the stability requirements of the following Formula:

(D.0.1)

Where q--Design value of equivalent vertical uniformly distributed load on the wall crown
combination;

Ec--Elastic modulus of shearwall concrete;

/ -- Section thickness of shearwall wall limb;

/ 0-Calculated length of shearwall calcu lated length, which shall be determined according
to Article D.0.2 of this Appendix.

D.0.2 Calculated length of shearwall wall limb shall be calculated according to the fo ll owing
Formula:

(D.0.2)

Where ,8- Calculated length coefficient of wall limb, which shal l be determined according to
Article D.0.3 of this Appendix;

h -- Height of story where wall limb located.

D.0.3 Calculated length coefficient ,8 of wall limb shal l be adopted according to the fo llowing
requirements based on the supporting cond itions of wall limb:

1 Single independent wall limb shall be calculated according to the suppo1ting plates on both
sides, ,8 shall take 1.0.

2 Flanges (Figure D) of T-shaped, L-shaped, groove-shaped and I-shaped shearwall shall be

calculated according to Formula (D.0.3-1) by adopting the supporting plates on three sides; when the
ca lculated value of ,8 is less than 0.25, it shall take 0.25.

/3=--r====2 (D.0.3-1)

1+(-h
2b,.
)
Where br--Unilateral flange section height of T-shaped, L-shaped, groove-shaped and I-shaped
shearwall shall take the larger value or maximum value of each br. in Figure D.

3 · Web (Figure D) of T-shaped shearwa ll shall also be calculated accord ing to the suppo1ting
plates on three s ides, but br in Formula (D.0.3-1 ) shall be replaced by bw.

4 Webs (Figure D) of groove-shaped and I-shaped shearwall shall be calculated according to

Formula (D.0.3-2) by adopting the suppo1ting plates on four sides; when the calculated value of ,8 is
less than 0.2, it shall take 0.2.
159
 (a) T-shaped (b) L-shaped (c) Groove-shaped ( d) I-shaped

Figure D Shearwall Web and Unilateral Flange Section Height Sketch

1
/J=--====2 (D.0.3-2)

1 ( 3h
+ 2b\V
J
Where hw--Web section height of groove-shaped and I-shaped shearwall.

D.0.4 Where the flange section height of T-shaped, L-shaped, groove-shaped and I-shaped shearwall
or the sum of web section height of T-shaped and L-shaped shearwall and flange section thickness is
less than twice of section thickness and 800mm, the monolithic stability of shearwall should be
checked according to the following Formula:

(D.0.4)

Where N--Design value of vertical load on the wall crown combination;

/--Inertia moment of integral shearwall section, which shall take the smaller value
along two directions.

160
 Appendix E Lateral Stiffness Requirements for Stories Adjacent to

Transfer Story

E.0.1 Where the transfer story is arranged on the first or second story, the equivalent shear stiffness
ratio Yei of transfer story and its adjacent upper structure may be adopted to approximately represent
the structural stiffness variation of stories adjacent to the transfer story; Yei should be approximate to 1,
which shall not be less than 0.4 in the non-seismic design and shall not be less than 0.5 in the seismic
design. Yei may be calculated according to the following Formula:

(E.0.1 - 1)

A, = ~v., +I c,, 1 Ac, ,1 u=1 , 2) (E.0.1-2)

J

c,,, = 2.s( h~J (i=l , 2) (E.0.1-3)

Where G 1, G2--Concrete shear modulus of transfer story and its upper story respectively;

Ai, A2--Converted shearing sectional area of transfer story and its upper story respectively,
which may be calculated according to Formula (E.0.1-2);

A". ,--Effective sectional area of all shearwall on the /h story along the calculation
direction (excluding flange area);
.
Aci,1- -Sect1ona I area o f ; ·th co1umn on t he r-th story;

h, --Story height of the /h story;

hc;,1- -Section height of/' column on the ;th story along the calculation direction;

C,, 1--Section area conversion coefficient of/' column on the i 1h story, which shall
take 1 when the calculated value is greater than 1.

E.0.2 When the transfer story is arranged above the second story, the lateral stiffness ratio of
transfer story to its adjacent upper story calculated according to Formula (3 .5 .2-1) of th is specification
shall not be less than 0.6.

E.0.3 When the transfer story is arranged above the second story, equivalent lateral stiffness ratio re2
of stories adjacent to transfer story should be calculated according to Formula (E.0.3) by adopting the
computation models shown in Figure E. rc 2 should be approximate to 1, which shall not be less than
0.5 during the non-seismic design and shall not be less than 0.8 during the seism ic design.

(E.0.3)

Where Ye2- -Equivalent lateral stiffness ratio of stories adjacent to transfer story;
161
 H 1- -Height of transfer story and it lower structure (computation model l );

~ 1 --Lateral displacement of transfer story and the top of its lower structure (computation
model I) under the action of unit horizontal force;

H 2--Height of several stories (computation model 2) above transfer story, which shall be
equal to or approximate to the height H 1 of computation model 1 and not greater
than H 1;

~ 2--Lateral displacement of the top of several stories (computation model 2) above

transfer story under the action of unit horizontal force.

Transfer member

(a) Computation model !-transfer story and its lower structure (b) Computation model 2-transfer story and its upper strncture

Figure E Equivalent Lateral Stiffness Computation Models for Stories Adjacent to Transfer Story

162
 Appendix F Design of Concrete Filled Circular Steel Tubes

F.1 Member Design

F.1.1 Axial compressed bearing capacity of steel tube conc rete single-limb column shall meet the
requirements of the following Formula:

Durable and temporary design conditions (F.1.1 - 1)

Seismic design conditions (F.1.1 -2)

Where N - -Design value of axial compressed force;

N0 --Axial compressed bearing capacity design value of steel tube concrete single-limb
column.

F.1.2 Axial compressed bearing capacity design value of steel tube concrete single-limb column
shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

(F .1.2-1)

N0 = 0.9Acfc (1 + aB) (when ~[BJ) (F. I .2-2)

N0 = 0.9Acfc (l + JB + B) (when B>[B]) (F.1.2-3)

(F.1.2-4)

In any case, it shall meet the following conditions :

(F. l .2-5)

Table F.1.2 Coefficients a and 101

Concrete grade :::css C55-C80

a 2.00 I.80

Wl l.00 1.56

Where N 0--Bearing capacity design value of steel tube concrete axial compression short column;

B--Hooping index of steel tube concrete;

a--Coefficient related to the concrete strength grade, which shall be adopted according
to Table F.1.2 of this Appendix;

[B]--Hooping index th reshold value related to the concrete strength grade, which shall
be adopted according to Table F.1.2 of this Appendix;

Ac- -Cross-sectional area of core concrete in the steel tube;

fc--Design val ue of compressive strength of core concrete;

163
 Aa---Cross-sectional area of steel tube;

fa--Design values of tensile and compressive strength of steel tube;

tpr----Bearing capacity reduction coefficient in consideration of slenderness ratio influence,

which shall be determined according to the requirements of Article F.1.4 of this
Appendix;

ip
0
--Bearing capacity reduction coefficient in consideration of eccentricity influence,
which shall be determined according to the requirements of Article F.1.3 of this
Appendix;

tp 0--tp 1 value considered according to axial compression column.

F.1.3 Bearing capacity reduction coefficient (/Je of steel tube concrete column in consideration of
eccentricity influence shall be calculated according to the fo llowing Formula:

When eolrc:'.SI.55

1 (F.1.3- 1)
(/Je =
1+1.85 eo
re

(F.1.3-2)

When eolrc> l.55

0.3 (F.1.3 -3)

Where e0--The larger one of axial compressive force eccentricity at the column end ;

rc--Radius of core concrete cross section;

M 2- -The larger one of column end bending moment design value;

N- - Design value of axial compressive force .

F.1.4 Bearing capacity reduction coefficient tp 1 of steel tube concrete column in consideration of
slenderness ratio influence shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

When LJD>4

(F .1.4-1 )

When LJD:'.S4
(F. 1.4-2)

Where D--External diameter of steel tube;

164
 Le--Equivalent calculated length of column, which shall be determined according to
Articles F.1.5 and F.1.6 of this Appendix.

F.1.5 Equivalent calculated length of column shall be calculated according to the following
Formula:

(F.1.5)

Where L- -Actual length of column;

p--Calculated length coefficient m consideration of the constraint conditions at the

column end, which shall be determined based on the beam & column stiffness ratio in
accordance with the current national standard "Code for Design of Steel Structures"
GB5 00 17;

k--Equivalent length coefficient in consideration of the bending moment distribution

gradient influence at the column shaft, which shall be determined according to
Article F.1 .6 of this Appendix.

F.1.6 Equivalent length coefficient k of steel tube concrete column in consideration of the bending
moment di stribution gradient influence at the column shaft shal l be calculated according to the
fo llowing Fonnula:

1 Axial compression column and member (Figure F.1.6 a):

k=I (F.1.6- 1)

( jf )

-...l --

1 f
,.
.If: . c':71~
\' T,.
(a) Axial compression (b) Single bending without (c) Hyperbolic bending (d) Hyperbolic bending

lateral disol acement without lateral displacement with lateral displacement

1\'
L(:~) .I /, .1/,
--7 !
l J
I I
.:::
I
I
~ .\ /~

(e) Single bending (f) Hyperbolic bend ing

Figure F.1.6 Frame Column and Cantilever Column Calculation Diagrams

2 Frame column without lateral displacement (Figure F.1 .6 b, c) :

k=0.5 +0.3/J+0.2/J2 (F.1.6-2)

165
 3 Frame column (Figure F.1.6 d) and cantilever column (Figure F. 1.6 e, f) with lateral
displacement:

When eolrc~0 .8

k= 1- 0.625eolrc (F.1.6-3)

When e0 /rc>0.8 , k=0.5.

When there is moment M 1 at the free end,

(F.1.6-4)

k values obtained from Formula (F. l.6-3) and formula (F. l.6-4) shall be compared to get the
larger one.

Where /3--The ratio of the smaller one M 1 to the larger one M 2 between the absolute values of
design values of bending moment at both ends of the column, which shall take the
positive value during the single bending and take the negative value during the
hyperbolic bending;

/3 1- -The ratio of the design val ue of bending moment M 1 at the free end of cantilever
column to the design val ue of bending moment M2 at the bu ild-in end; when /3 1 is
negative, during the hyperbolic bending, it shall be calculated according to the sub
cantilever columns at the altitude of L 2 separated by the inflection points (Figure
F.1.6 f).

Note: I Frame without lateral displacement refers to the one, arranged with supporting structures such as support frame, shearwall

and elevator shaft whose lateral st iffness is not less than 5 times of that of frame; frame with lateral displacement refers to

the one, not arranged with the above-mentioned supporting structures or arranged with supporting structures whose lateral

stiffness is less than 5 times of that of frame:

2 Build-in end refers to the one where the ratio of line stiffness of transverse beam intersecting on the column to that of

column is not less than 4, or the length and width of column foundation is not less than 4 times of column diameter.

F.1.7 Tensile bearing capacity of steel tube concrete single-limb column shall meet the following
requirements:

N M
- + - sl (F.1.7- 1)
Nut Mu

(F. I. 7-2)

(F.l.7-3)

Where N- -Design value of axial tension;

M--The larger one of column end bending moment design value.

F.1.8 When the shear span a (the distance from the transverse concentrated load action point to the
edge of support or node) of steel tube concrete single-limb column is less than twice of column
diameter D , transverse shear bearing capacity of column shall meet the requirements of the following
Formula:
166
 (F.1.8)

Where V--Design value of transverse shear force;

Vu--Design value of transverse shear bearing capacity of steel tube concrete single-limb
column.

F.1.9 Design value of transverse shear bearing capacity of steel tube concrete single-limb column
shall be calculated according to the following Formulae:

(F.1.9-1 )

Vo=0.2AJc( I +30) (F.1.9-2)

Where Vo--Bearing capacity design value of steel tube concrete single-limb column under the
pure shear;

N --Design value of axial force corresponding to the design value of transverse shear
force V;

a--Shear span, namely the distance from the transverse concentrated load action point
to the edge of suppo1i or node.

F.1.10 Pa1iial compression of steel tube concrete shall meet the requirements of the following
Formu la:

(F .1.I O)

Where N,--Design value of partial action axial compressive force;

Nur---Partial load-carrying capacity design value of steel tube concrete column.

F.1.11 When the steel tube concrete column is compressed in the center (Figure F. I. I I), the pa1iial
load-carrying capacity design value shall be calculated according to the following Formula:

.1,
!· ·1·

I@
I
I

'{~
i)
.·11

(b) (c)

Figure F.I.11 Partial Compression in the Center

(F.l.lI)

Where N0--Axial compression load-bearing capacity design value of steel tube concrete short
column in the paiiial compression segment, which shal l be calculated according to
Formulae (F.1 .2-2) and (F.1.2-3) in A1iicle F.1.2 of this Appendix;

167
 A,--Partial compression area;

Ac----Cross-sect ional area of core concrete in the steel tube.

F.1.12 When the steel tube concrete column is compressed nearby its combination interface (Figure
F.1.12), the partial load-carrying capacity design value shall be calculated according to the followi ng
Formula:

When A/A.2 113:

(F.1.12-1 )

When A/Ac<l /3:

(F.1.12-2)

Where N0--Axial compression load-bearing capac ity design value of steel tube concrete sh011
column in the pa11ial compression segment, which sha ll be calculated according to
Formulae (F. l.2-2) and (F.1.2-3) in Article F.1.2 of this Appendix;

N'-- Design value of non-partial action axial compressive force;

w----Coefficient in consideration of partial compression stress distribution conditions,

which shall take 1.00 when the partial compression stress is distributed uniformly,
and take 0.75 when the partial compress ion stress is distributed non-uniformly (such
as flexible shearing connecting piece welded with the internal wall of steel tube).

When the partial compression load-bearing capacity is insufficient, the tube wall in the pattial
compression segment may be thickened.

.I.
I
.{

/
ia 1 ( b} (cl

Figure F.1.12 Partia l Co mpression Nearby the Co mbination Interface

F.2 Connection Design

F.2.1 Where the diameter of steel tube concrete column is small, steel beam and steel tube concrete
column may be connected w ith outer stiffener ri ng (Figure F .2. 1- 1) which sha ll be closed fu ll ring
encircling the steel tube concrete column (Figure F.2. 1-2). Outer st iffener ring and external wall of
168
steel tube shall-be connected with full-penetration weld; outer stiffener ring and steel beam shall be
connected by bolt welding. Thickness of outer stiffener ring shall not be less than the thickness of
steel beam flange, and the minimum width c shall not be less than 70% of steel beam flange width.

A
I r+-+.J +
I
I
t+-+-•j '

Outer stiffener nng

Figure F.2.1-1 Sketch of Steel Beam and Steel Tube Concrete Column Adopting Outer Stiffener Ring Connection
Structure

Corner column Side column Center column

Figure F 2.1-2 O uter Stiffener Ring Construction Sketch

F.2.2 Where the diameter of steel tube concrete column is large, steel beam and steel tube concrete
column may be connected with internal stiffener ring. Internal stiffener ring and internal wall of steel
tube shall be connected with full -penetration groove weld. Beams and columns may be directly
connected on s ite, or beam splice may be carried out on site w ith columns with cantilever beam
segments. Cantilever beam segment may adopt constant section (Figure F.2.2-1) or variable section
(Figure F.2.2-2 and Figure F.2.2-3); where variable section beam segment is adopted, the gradient
should not be greater than 1/6.

Internal
stiffener ring +• II ++
" ii +>
• • II ....

(a) Vertical plan

169
 (b) Plan view

Figure F.2.2-1 Sketch of Constant Section Cantilever Steel Beam and Steel Tube Concrete Column Adopting
Internal Stiffener Ring Connection Structure

(a) Vemcal plan

(b) Plan view

Figure F.2.2-2 Sketch of Canti lever Steel Beam with Widened Flange and Steel Tube Concrete Col umn Connection
Structure

(a) Vertical plan

(b) Plan view

Figure F.2.2-3 Sketch of Ca ntilever Steel Beam with Widened Flange and Ha unched Web and Steel tube Co ncrete
Co lumn Connection Structure
I-Internal stiffener ring; 2-Widened flange; 3-Variable height (haunched web) cantilever beam segment

F.2.3 Connection structure of reinforced concrete beam and steel tube concrete column shall
simu ltaneously meet the shear force transfer and bending moment transfer requirements outside the
tubes.
170
F.2.4 Where reinforced concrete beam and steel tube concrete column are connected, shear force
transfer outside of the steel tube may adopt annular bracket or bearing pin ; where reinforced concrete
beamless floor slab or # -type ribbed slab and steel tube concrete column are connected, shear force
transfer outside of the steel tube may adopt cone-type annu lar depth bracket. Other connecting modes
meeting the calculation load-carrying requirements may also be adopted to transfer the shear force
outside of the tube.

F.2.5 Annular bracket and cone-type annular depth bracket may be composed of radiated uniformly-
distributed ribbed plates and upper/lower strengthening rings (Figure F.2.5). Ribbed plates shall be
welded by fillet weld with the external surface of steel tube wall and upper/lower strengthening rings;
upper/ lower strengthening rings may be respectively welded by fillet we ld w ith the external surface of
steel tube wa ll. T he upper/lower strengthening rings of annular bracket and the lower strengthening
rings of cone-type depth bracket shall be reserved w ith vent holes not less than 50mm in diameter.
Diameter of lower strengthen ing ring of cone-type annular depth bracket may be determined by the
punching bearing capacity calculation of floor slab.

I h I

f-""'-'J _...._t "-+-I ~

.:\ \
11-11

(a) Annular bracket (b) Cone-type depth bracket

Figure F.2.5 Annu lar Bracket Construction Sketch

I-Upper strengthening ring; 2-Web or ribbed plate; 3-Lower strengthening ring; 4-Steel tube concrete column; 5-Vent hole

F.2.6 Where the outer diameter of steel tube concrete column is not less than 600mm, shear force
may be transferred by the bearing pin. As for the bearing pin composed of piercing web and upper/
lower flange plate (Figure F.2.6), its section height should take 50% of the section height of frame
beam, and its planimetric position shall be determ ined according to the position of frame beam.
Flange plate may be narrowed down gradually after passing the stee l tube wa ll not less than 50mm.
Steel tube and flange plate, or steel tube and piercing web shall be welded w ith full-penetration

171
groove weld; piercing web and opposite steel tube wall (Figure F .2.6 a) or the pierc ing web in the
other direction (Figure F.2.6 b) shall be welded with fillet weld.

~-

1 1'~ ·=xy- 4,
I ~ 1
: I

·- ---.,'-----
,_,

50

1- 1

(a) Side column (b) Center column

Figure F.2.6 Bearing Pin Construction Sketch

F.2.7 The bending moment transfer outsider of tube for reinforced concrete beam and steel tube
concrete column may adopt # -type double beam, ring beam, piercing single beam and width-variable
beam, or other connecting modes meeting the force analysis reinforcements.

F.2.8 Longitudinal reinforcements of 1F-type double beam may pass through the side of steel tube in
a parallel way, and should be arranged with diagonal constructional reinforcements (Figure F.2.8)~
concrete shall be placed between #--type double beam and steel tube.

1:L - - -

Figure F.2.8 Well-type Double Beam Construction Sketch

I-Steel tube concrete column: 2- Longitudinal reinforcement of double beam: 3-Additional diagonal reinforcement

F.2.9 Reinforcement of reinforced concrete ring beam (Figure F.2.9) shall be determined by
calculation. The construction of ring beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 Section height of ring beam should be 50mm higher than the frame beam;

2 Section width of ring beam should not be less than the width of frame beam ;

172
 Figure F.2.9 Reinforced Concrete Ring Beam Construction Sketch
I-Steel tube concrete column: 2-Circumferential reinforcement of ring beam; 3-Longitudinal reinforcement of frame beam:
4-Stirrup of ring beam

3 Anchorage length of longitudinal reinforcement of frame beam in the ring beam shall meet
the requirements of the current national standard "Code for Design of Concrete Structures" GB 50010;

4 Section area of upper/ lower ring reinforcement of the ring beam shall be respectively not less
than 70% of that of upper/lower longitudinal reinforcement of the frame beam;

5 Circumferential waist reinforcements shall be arranged inside and outside of ring beam; the
diameter of waist reinforcement should not be less than l 6mm and the spacing should not be greater
than 150rnm;

6 Diameter of stirrup of ring beam arranged according to the construction should not be less
than 1Omm; the outside spacing should not be greater than l 50mm.

F.2.10 Where piercing single beam construction is adopted (Figure F.2 .10), lining tube segment or
outer bushing tube segment shall be adopted in the opening segment of steel tube to weld against the
steel tube wall; the wall thickness of lining tube (sleeve) shall not be less than that of steel tube;
circumferential net moment of piercing holes shall not be less than the maj or diameter b of the hole;
clear distance w from the end face of lining tube (sleeve) to the hole edge shall not be less than 2.5
times of the major diameter b of the hole; double-reinforcement split down perforation should be
adopted (Figure F .2.10).

.I S

~
1\
L ==J:t:!===it=!l=l>===I~= J 3:
I 'h-rr-TTTTTTTT""ih-ili; 3
3

Figure F.2.10 Piercing Single Beam Construction Sketch

I- Split down double reinforcement: 2- Lining reinforcement tube segment: 3-Column steel tube
173
 F.2.11 Where the diameter of steel tube is relati vely small or the beam width is relat ively large, the
width-variab le beam with broadened beam end may be adopted to transfer the outer bending moment
of tube (Figure F.2.11). 2 longitudinal reinforcements of width-variable beam along one direction may
pass through the steel tube; the rest longitudinal reinforcements may continuously bypass the steel
tube; the inclination of wind ing reinforcement shall not be greater than 1/6; additional stirru p shall be
arranged in the width-variable segment of beam.

Figure F.2.11 Width-variable Beam Construction Sketch

I-Longitudinal reinforcement of frame beam; 2-Additional stirrup of frame beam

174
 Explanation of Wording in This Specification

1 Words used for different degrees of strictness are explained as follows in order to mark the
differences in executing the requirements in this specification:

1) Words denoting a very strict or mandatory requirement:

"Must" is used for affirmation; "must not" for negation.

2) Words denoting a strict requirement under normal conditions:

"Shall" is used for affirmation; "shall not" for negation.

3) Words denoting a permission of a slight choice or an indication of the most suitable

choice when conditions permit:

"Should" is used for affirmation; "should not" for negation.

4) "May" is used to express the option available, sometimes with the conditional permit.

2 "Shall comply with·· .... " or "shal l meet the requirements of-····· " is used in this code to
indicate that it is necessary to comp ly with the requirements stipulated in other relative standards and
codes.

175
 List of Quoted Standards

1 "Code for Design of Building Foundation" GB 50007

2 "Load Code for the Design of Buildings" GB 50009

3 "Code for Design of Concrete Structures" GB 50010

4 "Code for Seismic Design of Buildings" GB 5001 1

5 "Code for Design of Steel Structures" GB 50017

6 "Code for Engineering Surveying" GB 50026

7 "Specifications for Bolt-shotcrete Support" GB 50086

8 "Technical Code for Waterproofing of Underground Works" GB 50108

9 "Technical Code of Slipform Engineering" GB 50113

10 "Code for Utility Technical of Concrete Admixture" GB 50119

11 "Technique of Powdered Coal Ash Concrete Spplication" GB 50146

12 "Standard for Quality Control of Concrete "GB 50164

13 "Code for Acceptance of Construction Quality of Building Foundation" GB 50202

14 "Code for Acceptance of Constructional Quality of Concrete Structures" GB 50204

15 "Code for Acceptance of Construction Quality of Steel Structures" GB 50205

16 "Technical Code of Composite Steel-form" GB 50214

17 " Standard for Classification of Seismic Protection of Building Constructions" GB 50223

18 "Code for Construction of Massive Concrete" GB 50496

19 "Technical Code for Monitoring of Building Excavation Engineering" GB 50497

20 "Safety Code for Tower Cranes" GB 5144

21 " Safety Rules for Lifting Appliances" GB 6067

22 "Safety Code for Builders Hoist" GB I 0055

23 "Tower Crane" GB/T 5031

24 "Builders Hoist" GB/T 10054

25 "Concrete Pump" GB/T 13333

26 "Anchorage, Grip and Coupler for Prestressing Tendons" GB/T 14370

27 "Ready-mixed Concrete" GB/T 14902

28 "Standard for Evaluation of Concrete Compressive Strength" GB/T 50107

29 "Technical Code for Tall Building Box Foundations and Raft Foundations" JGJ 6
176
 30 "Specifications for Building Deformation Measurements" JGJ 8

31 " Specification for Welding and Acceptance of Reinforcing Steel Bars" JGJ 18

32 " Standard for Test Methods of Welded Joint of Steel Bars" JGJ 27

33 "Technical Specification for Safety Operation of Construction Machinery" JGJ 33

34 "Technical Code for Safety of Temporary Electrification on Construction Site" JGJ 46

35 " Standard of Construction Safety Inspection" JGJ 59

36 "Technical Specification for Safety Construction of Hydraulic Removable Formworks" JGJ

65

37 "Code for Safety of High A ltitude Operation of Building Construction" JGJ 80

38 "Concrete Structures Prestressed with Unbonded Tendons" JGJ 92

39 "Technical Code for Building Pile Foundations" JGJ 94

40 "Technical Specification for Concrete Structures with Cold-rolled Ribbed Steel Wires" JGJ
95

41 "Technical Specification for Plywood Form with Steel Frame" JGJ 96

42 "Technical Specification for Steel Structure of Tall Buildings" JGJ 99

43 "Technical Code for G lass Curtain Wall Engineering" JGJ 102

44 "Specification for W inter Construction of Building Engineering" JGJ 104

45 "Technical Specification for Mechanical Splicing of Steel Reinforcing Bars" JGJ 107

46 "Technical Specification for Concrete Structures Reinforced with Welded Steel Fabric" JGJ
114

47 "Technical Specification for Retaining and Protection of Building Foundation Excavations"

JGJ 120

48 "Technical Code fo r Safety of Frame Scaffoldings w ith Steel Tubules in Construction" JGJ
128

49 "Technical Code for Safety of Steel Tubular Scaffold with Couplers in Construction" JGJ
130

so "Technical Code for Metal and Stone Curtain Walls Engineering" JGJ 133

51 "Technical Specification for Steel Reinforced Concrete Mixed Structures" JGJ 138

52 "Technical Specification for Inspection of Mach inery and Equipment on Construction Site"
JGJ160

53 "Technical Code for Safety of Forms in Construction" JGJ 162

54 "Technical Code for Safety of Cuplok Steel Tubular Scaffolding in Construction" JGJ 166

55 "Technical Specification for Fair-faced Concrete Construction" JGJ 169

177
 56 "Technical Code for Safety in Earthwork of Building Construction" JGJ 180

57 "Construction Technical Specification for Concrete Pumping" JGJ/T 10

58 "Steel Strand and Steel Wire Unbonded Tendons" JG 3006

178